Project Manual - Columbus Metropolitan Library · Dublin Branch Construction Documents Issue 2 Architect: Project No. 101253.00 ... 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

Project Manual Volume 2 of 4

For

Columbus Metropolitan Library Dublin Branch

Construction Documents

Issue 2

Architect:

Project No. 101253.00

27 October 2017

Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch Construction Documents Issue 4 – 27 November 2017

SECTION 000110TABLE OF CONTENTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 000110 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 OF 4

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS Issue 1, 2, 3, 4 002600 PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Issue 1 002601 PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Issue 1 003132 GEOTECHNICAL DATA Issue 2

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY Issue 1 012300 ALTERNATES Issue 2 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Issue 1 012501 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Issue 1 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Issue 1 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Issue 1 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Issue 1 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Issue 1 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Issue 1 014200 REFERENCES Issue 1 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Issue 2 015639 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Issue 1 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Issue 1 017300 EXECUTION Issue 1 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Issue 1 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Issue 1 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Issue 1 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Issue 1 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Issue 2



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 000110 - 2

VOLUME 2 OF 4

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024116 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Issue 1

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Issue 2 033300 ARCHITECTURAL SITE CONCRETE Issue 2 033500 INTERIOR CONCRETE POLISHING Issue 2 033503 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHING Issue 2 034900 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC) Issue 2 035411 FLOOR SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Issue 2

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Issue 2 042613 MASONRY VENEER Issue 2 044313 ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER Issue 2 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Issue 2

DIVISION 05 - METALS 050513 SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL Issue 2 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL Issue 2 052000 STEEL JOISTS Issue 2 053000 METAL DECKING Issue 2 054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Issue 2 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Issue 2 055100 METAL STAIRS Issue 2 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Issue 2 057313 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Issue 2

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Issue 2 061643 GYPSUM SHEATHING Issue 2 064000 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Issue 2



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 000110 - 3

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 070544 COMPOSITE FRAMING SUPPORT CLIP SYSTEM WITH THERMAL INSULATION Issue 2 070553 FIRE AND SMOKE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION Issue 2 071326 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING Issue 2 072100 THERMAL INSULATION Issue 2 072119 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION Issue 2 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS Issue 2 072616 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER Issue 2 074217 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS Issue 2 075423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING Issue 2 076000 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Issue 2 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES Issue 2, 3 077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES Issue 2 078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING Issue 2 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Issue 2 078500 FIRE-RESISTANT JOINT SYSTEMS Issue 2 079200 JOINT SEALANTS Issue 2

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Issue 2 081218 MINIMALIST ALUMINUM FRAMES Issue 2 081316 I INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED DOORS Issue 2 081400 WOOD DOORS Issue 2 083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Issue 2 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Issue 2 084126 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Issue 2, 3 084213 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Issue 2 084229 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES Issue 2 084423 STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS Issue 2 084423.10 CUSTOM STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS Issue 2 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Issue 2, 4 088000 GLAZING Issue 2 088300 MIRRORS Issue 2 088700 GLAZING SURFACE FILMS Issue 2



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 000110 - 4

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

090563 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL FOR FLOORING Issue 2 092116 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES Issue 2 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Issue 2 092900 GYPSUM BOARD Issue 2 093000 TILING Issue 2 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Issue 2 095426 LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS Issue 2 096280 RESINOUS FLOORING Issue 2 096500 RESILIENT FLOORING Issue 2 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Issue 2 096813 TILE CARPETING (Alternate) Issue 2 096816 SHEET CARPETING (Base Bid) Issue 2 098100 ACOUSTIC INSULATION Issue 2 099100 PAINTING Issue 2 099713 EXTERIOR STEEL COATINGS Issue 2

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Issue 2 102226 OPERABLE PARTITIONS Issue 2 102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Issue 2, 3 102813 TOILET ACCESSORIES Issue 2 104300 EMERGENCY AID SPECIALTIES Issue 2 104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Issue 2, 3 105113 METAL LOCKERS Issue 2 107516 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES Issue 2

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 113100 RESIDENTIAL AND COMMECIAL APPLIANCES Issue 3 115116 BOOK DEPOSITORIES Issue 2

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Issue 2 123600 COUNTERTOPS Issue 2 125219 UPHOLSTERED SEATING Issue 2 129300 SITE FURNISHINGS Issue 2



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 000110 - 5

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 142100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Issue 2, 3



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 000110 - 6

THIS PAGE INTENSIONAL LEFT BLANK



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 000110 - 7

VOLUME 3 OF 4

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 01 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS Issue 2 21 05 17 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING Issue 2 21 05 18 ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING Issue 2 21 05 29 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Issue 2 21 10 00 WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS Issue 2

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 01 03 ELECTRONIC DRAWING RELEASE Issue 2 22 05 01 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS Issue 2 22 05 04 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Issue 2 22 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Issue 2 22 05 17 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING Issue 2 22 05 18 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING Issue 2 22 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Issue 2 22 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Issue 2 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Issue 2 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Issue 2 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION Issue 2, 4 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Issue 2 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES Issue 2 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Issue 2 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES Issue 2 22 14 16 INTERIOR STORM DRAINAGE PIPING Issue 2 22 14 23 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES Issue 2 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS Issue 2 22 34 00 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Issue 2 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES Issue 2, 4 22 45 00 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES Issue 2 22 47 00 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS Issue 2 22 51 16 NATURAL GAS PIPING Issue 2



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 000110 - 8

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 01 INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT Issue 2 23 00 05 HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Issue 2 23 00 10 COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES Issue 2 23 00 15 SUBMITTALS Issue 2 23 00 20 RECORD AND INFORMATION BOOKLETS Issue 2 23 00 35 SLEEVES, SEALS AND FIRESTOPS Issue 2 23 00 40 PIPING EXPANSION, NOISE AND VIBRATION ISOLATION Issue 2 23 00 45 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS (NON-SEISMIC) Issue 2 23 00 50 GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS Issue 2 23 00 55 VALVE TAGGING Issue 2 23 00 60 LUBRICATION AND PACKING Issue 2 23 00 61 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION Issue 2 23 00 65 EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION Issue 2 23 00 80 VIBRATION ISOLATORS Issue 2 23 00 99 REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION Issue 2 23 05 01 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Issue 2 23 05 93 HVAC SYSTEMS BALANCING Issue 2 23 07 05 HVAC INSULATION Issue 2 23 08 01 HVAC SYSTEM CONFIRMATION Issue 2 23 09 23 TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DDC SYSTEM) Issue 2 23 09 93 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION Issue 2, 4 23 21 16 CONDENSATION DRAIN PIPING Issue 2 23 23 05 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM Issue 2 23 31 10 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK Issue 2 23 31 12 ACOUSTICALLY INSULATED DOUBLE WALL DUCTWORK Issue 2 23 33 13 DAMPERS Issue 2 23 33 15 FIRE DAMPERS Issue 2 23 37 13 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS Issue 2 23 41 05 FILTERS Issue 2 23 74 16 DEDICATED OUTSIDE AIR UNITS Issue 2, 4 23 81 27 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW AIR CONDITIONERS Issue 2 23 82 26 ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATERS Issue 2 23 82 39 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS Issue 2



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 000110 - 9

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT Issue 2 26 00 05 DIVISION 26 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Issue 2 26 00 10 COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES Issue 2 26 00 15 SUBMITTALS Issue 2, 3 26 00 20 RECORD AND INFORMATION MANUALS Issue 2 26 00 25 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES Issue 2 26 00 30 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS AND ENVELOPES Issue 2 26 00 55 SLEEVES, SEALS, AND FIRESTOPS Issue 2 26 00 70 DEMOLITION Issue 2 26 00 75 ACCESS PANELS Issue 2 26 00 99 REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION Issue 2 26 05 10 WIRE AND CABLE Issue 2 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING Issue 2 26 05 27 TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING INFRASTRUCTURE Issue 2 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Issue 2 26 05 33 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS Issue 2 26 05 34 OUTLET BOXES Issue 2 26 05 35 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES Issue 2 26 05 37 FLOOR OUTLETS Issue 2 26 05 38 RECESSED CONCRETE FLOOR BOXES Issue 2 26 05 39 POKE-THROUGH SERVICE FITTINGS Issue 2 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS Issue 2 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Issue 2 26 06 10 CABLE TRAY FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Issue 2 26 07 10 VOICE/DATA SYSTEMS RACEWAYS Issue 2 26 07 11 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEMS RACEWAYS Issue 2 26 07 12 SECURITY SYSTEM RACEWAYS Issue 2 26 08 40 ELECTRICAL TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, INSPECTION Issue 2 26 09 43 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Issue 2 26 22 13 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS Issue 4 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS Issue 2 26 24 20 PANELBOARDS Issue 2 26 26 30 TWO-WAY EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM Issue 2 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES Issue 2 26 28 16 SAFETY SWITCHES Issue 2 26 28 17 ELEVATOR SAFETY SWITCHES Issue 2 26 28 19 CIRCUIT BREAKERS Issue 2 26 43 13 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION Issue 2 26 51 14 LUMINAIRES Issue 2 26 81 10 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Issue 2 26 81 15 EMERGENCY RESPONDER RADIO ANTENNA/REPEATER SYSTEM Issue 2



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 000110 - 10




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 000110 - 11

VOLUME 4 OF 4 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 310000 EARTHWORK Issue 2

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 320190 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING Issue 2 321313 CONCRETE PAVING Issue 2, 3 321373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS Issue 2 321380 WATER REPELLENTS Issue 2 321416 BRICK UNIT PAVING Issue 2 323119 DECORATIVE METAL GATES Issue 4 329113 SOIL PREPARATION Issue 2 4 329200 TURF AND GRASSES Issue 2 329300 PLANTS Issue 2

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 334613 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE Issue 2

DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 000110 - 12


Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch SECTION 03 30 00 Construction Documents CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Issue 2 - 27 October 2017 SECTION 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00/Korda/Nemeth Engineering, Inc. 03 30 00 - 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Basic Specification: Perform work of this Section according to ACI 301-05, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," except as specifically modified herein. Numbers in parentheses (0.00) indicate a related paragraph of ACI 301.

B. Section Includes: All cast-in-place concrete shown on the Drawings and required by these

Specifications. Allow for the installation of cast-in-place items furnished under other Sections. Install anchor bolts for structural steel. Provide and install grout under steel column base plates and beam bearing areas.

C. The Engineer has designed a project which will be safe after full completion. The Engineer

has no expertise in, and takes no responsibility for, construction means and methods or job site safety during construction, which are exclusively the Contractor's responsibility. Processing and/or approving submittals made by the Contractor which may contain information related to construction methods or safety issues, or participation in meetings where such issues might be discussed, shall not be construed as voluntary assumption by the Engineer of any responsibility for safety procedures.

D. Architectural Concrete: Throughout this Section, the term "Architectural Concrete"

includes the exposed exterior concrete wall on the north and east elevations and the exposed vertical faces of concrete along the ramp. These areas are noted in the drawings to receive board formed finish. (See Section 6 of ACI 301 for relevant requirements.)

E. Provide concrete pads, piers, curbs, and bases required for equipment of all trades.

Coordinate dimensions and details with requirements of equipment being supplied, prior to placing concrete.

F. Coordinate the work of other trades who will provide and install items (sleeves, piping,

conduit, inserts, etc.) to be cast in the concrete. Place no concrete until all such items are in place.

G. Inspection and testing services required to establish mix designs are to be performed by an

agency retained by the Contractor (1.6.2 through 1.6.3). Other services required by this Section are to be performed by an agency retained by the Owner. Contractor shall provide facilities for storage and curing of specimens molded by the Owner's agency (1.6.3.2.d), and notify Owner's agency in advance of concrete placement to allow sufficient time for all required testing.

H. Related Sections: Carefully examine all other Sections and all Drawings for related work,

which includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 03 35 00, "Interior Concrete Polishing" 2. Section 05 12 00, "Structural Steel" 3. Section 05 20 00, "Steel Joists"

Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch SECTION 03 30 00 Construction Documents CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Issue 2 - 27 October 2017


4. Section 05 30 00, "Metal Decking" 5. Section 07 26 16, “Underslab Vapor Retarder” 6. Section 09 62 80, "Resinous Flooring"

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards: 1. ACI 117-10 Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI Detailing Manual, SP66(04). 3. CRSI "Placing Reinforcing Bars," 2011, 9th edition. 4. WRI "Manual of Standard Practice" July 2010, 8th edition.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a mix design for each class of concrete required (1.6.3.2.e). Submittals to comply with appropriate methods listed in ACI 301-05 (4.2.3). Indicate whether mixes have been designed for pumping.

B. Submit shop drawings for all reinforcing. Indicate strength, size, and details of all bar

reinforcing, and style and specification of all welded wire fabric (3.1.1). Notwithstanding any other requirements specified elsewhere in these specifications, one (1) set of electronic shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. The electronic set will be returned to the Contractor, who will make and distribute as many copies as needed. Only prints with the approval stamp printed on them shall be permitted on the site.

C. Submit, on request only, product literature for admixtures and curing compounds proposed

for use. D. Submit reports of all required testing and inspection. E. Submit for approval proposed spacing and location of construction and/or control joints in

concrete slabs on grade. Control joint locations at polished concrete areas shall be closely coordinated with the architect.

1.04 FIELD REFERENCE MANUALS

A. Provide at least one (1) copy of the ACI Field Reference Manual, SP-15(10), and one (1) copy of CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars," in the field office at all times (1.3.3).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material (4.2.1.1): 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M-12, Type I, II, or III. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag (GGBF): ASTM C989/C989M-13, Grade 100

or higher. GGBF can be substituted for Portland cement up to a maximum of 30% by mass.

3. Fly Ash or Pozzolans: ASTM C618-12a, Class F. Maximum loss on ignition 3%.



B. Water: Potable, conforming to C94/C94M-14 (4.2.1.3). C. Aggregates:

1. ASTM C33/C33M-13. Use size No. 57 coarse aggregate, unless otherwise indicated (4.2.1.2).

2. Class IIa (Polished Concrete) a. ASTMC33/C33M-13. Use size No. 57 coarse aggregate. Class 3S (maximum size

1" nominal). b. Fine-graded granular material: clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and

manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D448, size 10 with 100% passing a 3/8" sieve, 10 to 30 % passing a no. 100 sieve, and at least 5 percent passing no. 200 sieve.

D. Admixtures (where required or permitted) (4.2.1.4):

1. Water-Reducing: ASTM C494/C494M-13, Type A or D. 2. Superplasticizer (High Range Water Reducer): ASTM C494/C494M-16, Type F or G.

Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. Eucon 37 by Euclid Chemical Company. b. Sikament 686 by Sika Corporation. c. Master Rheobuild 1000 by Master Builders. d. Daracem 19 by GCP Applied Technologies.

3. Superplasticizer High Range Water Reducer (Polycaboxylates): ASTM C494/C494M-16, Type A and F. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. Plastol 5000 by Euclid Chemical Company. b. ADVA 140M by GCP Applied Technologies. c. ViscoCrete 4100 by Sika. d. Glenium 3030 NS by BASF.

4. Mid-range Water Reducer: ASTM C494/C494M-16, Type A or G. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. Sikaplast 200 or Sikaplast 300 GP by Sika. b. Eucon MR by Euclid. c. Master Polyheed 900 by BASF. d. Mira 35 by GCP Applied Technologies.

5. Air-Entraining: ASTM C260/C260M-10a. 6. Accelerating: ASTM C494/C494M-13, Type C or E, containing no more chlorides

than are present in municipal drinking water. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. Accelguard 80 by Euclid. b. MasterSet FP20 by BASF. c. Plastocrete 161FL by Sika Corporation. d. PolarSet by W.R. Grace.

7. Calcium Chloride is NOT permitted (4.2.1.4). 8. Synthetic Fiber Reinforcement: ASTM C1116/C1116M-10a. Acceptable products

include, but are not limited to: a. Nycon Nylon RC Fibers by Nycon b. Nylo-Mono Nylon Fibers or Mighty-Mono Polypropylene Fibers by Forta c. Fibermesh 150 Polypropylene Fibers by Propex d. Grace Fibers or Grace Microfibers by Grace e. PSI Fiberstrand 150 by Euclid



E. Reinforcing Steel (3.2.1):

1. Deformed Bars: ASTM A615/A615M-13, A996/A996M-14 (bars from rail steel shall be Type R), or A706/A706M-09b. Minimum yield strength to be 60 ksi. Bars to be welded are to be ASTM A706.

2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A1064/A1064M-13. Provide in sheet form (not rolls) (3.2.1.6).

F. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D1751-04(2013)e1 (2.2.1.4). G. Curing Compound: Comply with ASTM C309-11, Type 1, Class B (clear). Compound

shall comply with EPA's VOC requirements. Must be compatible with adhesive specified for floor finishes.

H. Curing and Sealing Compound: Comply with ASTM C1315-11. Type I Class A (clear)

compound shall comply with EPA's VOC requirements. Apply at the manufacturer's written recommended application rate. Must be compatible with adhesive specified for floor finishes.

I. Grout for Masonry Core Fill: ASTM C476-10, coarse type or fine type, placed ACI 530.1-

11, Table 5. J. Non-shrink Grout under Bearing Elements: Conform to Corps of Engineers Specification

CRD-C621-83 and ASTM C1107/C1107M-13. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: 1. Crystex by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 2. NS Grout and Tammsgrout Supreme by Euclid. 3. Sikagrout 212 by Sika. 4. 1107 Advantage Grout by Dayton Superior. 5. SureGrout by Kaufman Products. 6. Kemset Grout by ChemMasters.

K. Dovetail Slots: Galvanized steel, 24 gauge, minimum.

L. Bonding Agent: No thinner than 75 square feet per gallon. Acceptable products include,

but are not limited to: 1. Euco #452 MV by Euclid. 2. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod by Sika. 3. Sure-Poxy HM by Kaufman Products. 4. Sure Bond J58 by Dayton Superior

M. Joint Sealant: Use 1-component polyurethane, conforming to ASTM C920-14, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25. Use with backer rod as required. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: 1. Eucolastic I by Euclid. 2. Sikaflex-la by Sika. 3. Dymonic by Tremco.

N. Sealer: Clear membrane-forming compound which will not yellow. Must be formulated for the intended application, either interior or exterior and applied per the manufacturer's



written recommendations. Must comply with EPA VOC requirements and be compatible with the curing compound used.

O. Penetrating Sealer: Acceptable products include, but are not limited to:

1. Aquapel + Plus by L & M. 2. Baracade WB 244 by Euclid. 3. Weather Seal GP by Prosoco, Inc.

P. Keyed Floor Slab Joints: Mill galvanized steel, 20 gauge minimum, with minimum key

dimensions of 3/4 inch deep by 1 1/2 inches at its widest point. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: 1. Tongue & Groove Joint 95 by Heckmann Building Products, Inc. 2. G-33 Screed Key Joint by Dayton Superior

Q. Preformed Adhesive Waterstop: Conform to Federal Specification SSS-210. Acceptable

products include but are not limited to: 1. Conseal CS202 by Concrete Sealants, Inc. 2. 302SF Synko-Flex by Henry Company 3. Ultrastop by Vinylex 4. Lockstop by Greenstreak Group, Inc.

R. Paper Curing Membranes conforming to ASTM C171-07:

1. Orange Label Sisel Kraft by Fortifiber, or 2. Blue Shield 3560 by Holland.

S. Plate Dowels at Construction Joints: Smooth steel plate dowels, A36/A36M-12 steel. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: 1. Greenstreak Speed Plate System by Greenstreak Group, Inc.

2.02 MIXES

A. The following classes of concrete are required (4.2.2.8.b): 1. Class I – footings and interior piers. Minimum f'c=3000 psi. 2. Class II - interior slabs on grade unless noted otherwise, fill on composite deck, and all

interior concrete not otherwise identified. Minimum f'c=3500 psi; water-reducer required. Minimum cementitious content 517 lbs. per cubic yard. Maximum water-cementitious material ratio 0.45. All Class II concrete used for interior slabs on grade shall have synthetic fiber reinforcement.

3. Class IIA – interior slab on grade and fill on composite deck to receive polished concrete finish. Minimum f'c=3500 psi; water-reducer required. Minimum cementitious content 517 lbs. per cubic yard. Maximum water-cementitious material ratio 0.45.

4. Class III - exterior slabs on grade, exterior walls, perimeter walls and piers placed integral, and all exterior concrete not otherwise identified. Minimum f'c=4500 psi; air-entraining admixture and water-reducer required. Minimum cementitious content 564 lbs. per cubic yard. Maximum water-cementitious material ratio 0.45, air content 6 +1, -1.5% (4.2.2.4).

5. Class IV - backfill below footings. Minimum f'c=1500 psi (lean mix). 6. Class V - Fill in stair pans and treads. Minimum f'c=3500 psi, with water-reducer,

superplasticizer, #8 coarse aggregate, and synthetic fiber reinforcement. Minimum



cementitious material content 611 lbs. per cubic yard. Maximum water-cementitious ratio 0.45.

B. Pozzolans are permitted in all Classes except Class IIA polished concrete floors and Class

VI architectural concrete. C. Class IV concrete may be site mixed; all other concrete is to be ready-mixed (4.3.1). All

admixtures are to be added at the batch plant, except that superplasticizer, where used, is to be added at the site. Superplasticizer retarder can be added at the batch plant.

D. Concrete used for floors (Classes II, IIA, & V) is to have a minimum three (3) day

compressive strength of 1800 psi. E. Slump:

1. Design concrete mixes for a maximum slump of 4 inches, unless a superplasticizer is to be used.

2. If a superplasticizer is to be used, design mixes for a slump of 2 inches - 4 inches before its addition; maximum slump permitted after its addition is 8 inches.

F. Synthetic fiber reinforcement shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. Dosage rate shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, but not less than 1 lb. per cubic yard.

G. No air entraining admixture is required unless an air content is specified (4.2.2.4). H. Concrete mixes shall not contain any deleterious or other reactive aggregates or materials

that can initiate and promote alkali silica reaction (ASR). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION

A. This structure is designed to be self-supporting and stable after the building is fully completed. It is solely the Contractor's responsibility to determine erection procedures and sequence, and to ensure the stability of the building and its component parts, and the adequacy of temporary or incomplete connections, during erection. This includes the addition of any shoring, sheeting, temporary guys, bracing or tie-downs that might be necessary. Such material is not shown on the Drawings. If applied, they shall be removed as conditions permit, and shall remain the Contractor's property.

3.02 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Verify that excavations are free of water and ice, are of the required dimensions, and have been approved by the testing agency responsible for soils inspection, prior to placing concrete (5.3.1).

B. Determine field conditions by actual measurement.



C. Notify the Architect not less than 24 hours in advance of placing concrete. Place concrete only when the Architect is present, unless this requirement is specifically waived.

D. Prior to application of sealer, remove any synthetic fiber reinforcement projecting above

the top surface of slabs which remain exposed.

3.03 FORMWORK AND REINFORCING

A. Footings may be cast against earth cuts when soil conditions permit (2.2.2.3). B. At the Contractor's option, welded wire fabric can be substituted for deformed bars if the

welded wire fabric is engineered per ACI 318-08 and approved by the Engineer. C. Removal of Forms and Shoring:

1. Remove no forms within first 24 hours after placement for supported slabs and 12 hours for columns and walls.

D. Reinforcing:

1. Welding of reinforcing is prohibited, except where shown. All welding of reinforcing shall conform to AWS D1.4/1.4M:2011.

2. Use plastic-tipped bar supports for surfaces exposed to view in finished structure. 3. At the Contractor's option, welded wire fabric can be substituted for deformed bars if

the welded wire fabric is approved by the Engineer.

E. Metal deck is designed for a 20 psf construction load. If this load will be exceeded by bulk dumping or motorized finishing equipment, notify the metal deck supplier. Cost of increasing the deck gage shall be at the concrete placing contractor’s expense.

3.04 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Install embedded conduit, pipes, sleeves and anchor bolts subject to the following limitations: 1. Do not embed aluminum without prior approval of coating material. 2. Do not displace reinforcing steel. 3. In slabs and walls, limit outside dimension of conduits and pipes to 1/3 member

thickness. Where conduits cross, maintain same minimum concrete cover as required for reinforcing bars. Do not embed conduit or pipe in slabs over metal deck.

4. In columns, limit total area of pipes and conduit to 4% of column area. 5. Maintain a center-to-center spacing of at least 3 diameters of conduit, pipe or sleeve. 6. Install anchor bolts for base plates of steel elements according to tolerances of AISC

Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, March 18, 2005, Paragraph 7.5.

3.05 DELIVERY AND PLACEMENT

A. Preparation Before Placement: 1. Remove all debris from forms and deck. Clean steel deck of grease, oil, and other

substances which would reduce bond to concrete. 2. Do not use additives or salts to remove ice.



3. In cold weather, maintain temperature of forms and reinforcing such that concrete temperature can be kept within the specified range.

B. Delivery:

1. Conform to ASTM C94/C94M-14. 2. ASTM C94 requires discharge within 1 1/2 hours or 300 revolutions, whichever occurs

first, after the introduction of water to cement and aggregates, or the introduction of cement to the aggregates (4.3.2.2). The Architect may require an earlier discharge during hot weather or when high-early strength cement is being used.

3. Place concrete at the maximum slump for which the mix was designed with a tolerance of up to 1 inch above the maximum for one (1) batch in any five (5) consecutive batches tested (4.3.2.1).

C. Placement:

1. Place within 6 feet of final position. Spreading with vibrators is prohibited. 2. In walls and columns, deposit concrete in uniform horizontal layers with a maximum

depth of 5 feet. 3. Maximum free fall without chutes or elephant trunks to be 5 feet.

3.06 JOINTING

A. Interior Slabs on Grade: 1. Locate control and construction joints as shown on the Drawings. In the absence of

information on Drawings, locate at openings, walls, columns, grid lines, inside corners and at 15 feet on center generally. Schedule slab placements and sawcutting operations such that sawing is completed prior to onset of shrinkage cracking (5.3.5). Complete saw cutting within 12 hours after placement.

2. Provide isolation joints at columns (1/2 inch thick) and at walls (1/4 inch thick). Where isolation joint will be exposed to view, set top of joint filler below top of slab a distance equal to the filler thickness, to receive sealant. Where not exposed to view, set top of filler flush with top of slab.

3. Where joints are exposed to view in the finished building, provide joint sealant.

B. Interior Polished Concrete Slabs on Grade: 1. Locate control and construction joints as shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide a "decorative" joint, meaning that once the initial joint is cut (while the

concrete is still "green") the joint will be chased with a slightly thicker blade (or stack of blades) to remove rough edges typically found during the initial joint (typically between 1 to 4 weeks.)

3. All joints shall receive a gray epoxy joint filler.

C. Exterior Slabs on Grade: Locate joints as shown on the Drawings. In the absence of information on the Drawings, provide the following: 1. Expansion Joints: Full depth, with 1/2 inch joint filler, where slabs abut vertical

surfaces, at intersections of sidewalks, at abrupt changes in width, and at a spacing not exceeding 30 feet.

2. Control Joints: Tooled, 7/8 inch deep, 4 feet to 6 feet on center between expansion joints.



3.07 FINISHES

A. Schedule of finishes on flatwork is as follows: 1. Troweled finish: typical interior floor areas to receive adhesive-applied finish, or

carpet, or to remain exposed (5.3.4.2.c). 2. Floated finish: interior floor areas to receive finish in cementitious setting bed

(5.3.4.2.b). 3. Broom finish: exterior slabs (5.3.4.2.d).

B. Schedule of finishes on formed surfaces is as follows: 1. Rough form finish: foundation walls and surfaces not otherwise specified. (5.3.3.3.a). 2. Smooth form finish surface class A: walls, piers, and other surfaces exposed to public

view or scheduled to receive waterproofing: (5.3.3.3.b).

3.08 FINISHING TOLERANCES

A. Conform to F-number requirements noted below and as described in ASTM E1155-96(2008) for all interior slabs (5.3.4.3.c): 1. Polished concrete slabs on grade: FF-50/FL-30 minimum overall for composite of all

measured values; FF-35/FL-20 minimum for any individual floor section.

2. All other interior slabs on grade: FF-25/FL-20 minimum overall for composite of all

measured values; FF-18/FL-13 minimum for any individual floor section.

3. Polished concrete framed slabs: FF-50 minimum overall for composite of all measured

values; FF-35 minimum for any individual section.

4. All other interior framed slabs: FF-25 minimum overall for composite of all measured

values; FF-18 minimum for any individual section.

B. Take remedial measures if flatness and levelness testing indicates either of the following

conditions exist: 1. The entire floor composite value, when installation is complete, measures less than

either of the specified overall F-numbers. 2. Any individual floor section measures less than either of the specified minimum section

F-numbers. C. Obtain written approval of the Architect and Engineer for remedial measures proposed

before implementing measures. D. All exterior slabs shall be finished to a 1/2 inch in 10 foot tolerance.

3.09 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Temperature: 1. When air temperature during placement is less than 40 degrees, or will be within 24

hours, temperature of concrete as placed is to be between 50 and 90 degrees F (55 and 90 degrees F for sections less than 12 inches thick). Maintain concrete temperature within these limits for the full curing period of seven days (or three (3) days for high-early-strength concrete) (4.2.2.7).

2. The temperature of concrete as delivered shall not exceed 90 degrees F (4.2.2.7).



B. Curing:

1. Interior slabs that are polished concrete, receive finish in cementitious setting bed, or receive adhesive applied finishes are to be moist cured or cured using paper curing membranes, without the use of a curing compound (5.3.6.4.a through 5.3.6.4.d).

2. Surfaces which are to receive penetrating sealer are to be moist-cured without the use of a curing compound or cured using paper curing membranes (5.3.6.4.a through 5.3.6.4.d).

3. All other slab areas may be either moist-cured or cured using paper curing membranes (5.3.6.4.e).

4. Whichever curing method is used, it is to commence immediately after disappearance of water sheen, and continue for at least seven (7) days. Cure high-early-strength concrete for a minimum of three (3) days (5.3.6.1). Do not allow curing to be delayed overnight.

5. Prevent excessive moisture loss from formed surfaces (5.3.6.3). If forms are removed before seven (7) days have elapsed, cure the formed surfaces by moist-curing or application of curing compound for the remainder of the curing period.

6. All exterior slabs are to receive an application of penetrating sealer prior to completion of construction.

7. Interior slabs which remain exposed are to receive an application of sealer prior to the completion of construction.

3.10 GROUTING

A. Grout below bearing plates, setting plates, and column base plates is to be installed only after the steel is plumbed. The use of leveling plates at column bases is prohibited.

B. Install grout per the recommendations of the manufacturer.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Obtain concrete for required tests at point of placement (1.6.4.2). B. For each concrete class, perform one strength test for each 50 yards, or fraction thereof,

placed in any one day (1.6.4.2.d and 1.6.4.2.e). C. Determine slump for each strength test (1.6.4.2.f). D. Determine air content for each strength test of air-entrained concrete (1.6.4.2.h). E. Determine concrete temperature for each strength test when air temperature is less than 40

degrees F or will be within 24 hours (1.6.4.2.g). F. Do not place concrete when slump, air content or temperature vary from allowable. G. Test interior floor slab finished surfaces for flatness and levelness in accordance with

ASTM E1155-96(2008) (5.3.4.3.c).



H. Individual floor sections for floor tolerance testing purposes shall be bound by the following that provide the smallest sections: construction joints, control joints, column lines and half-column lines.

I. Each individual floor cast in a single day shall meet the composite flatness requirements. J. Floor tolerance tests shall typically be performed (and all defective areas identified) within

24 hours after slab placement and reported to all parties as soon as possible, but not later than 72 hours after installation. At areas cured with a paper curing membrane, floor tolerance tests shall be performed immediately following its removal. Shored elevated slabs shall be tested prior to removal of shoring.

K. Visual inspections:

1. Periodically inspect reinforcing steel for size, location and placement. 2. Continuously inspect reinforcing to be welded. 3. Continuously inspect anchor bolts cast into concrete. 4. Periodically verify the use of the required design mix. 5. Continuously inspect the placement of the concrete for proper techniques. Periodically

inspect for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques. 6. Periodically inspect concrete formwork for shape, location and dimensions of

members. L. Maintain records of all tests, indicating exact location of the structure represented by each

test.

END OF SECTION

This page left blank intentionally.

Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch Construction Documents Issue 2 - 27 October 2017

SECTION 033300ARCHITECTURAL SITE

CONCRETE

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033300 - 1

SECTION 033300 - ARCHITECTURAL SITE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Includes: 1. Vertical concrete structures detailed on landscape drawings.

B. Section includes cast-in-place architectural site concrete including form facings, reinforcement accessories, concrete materials, concrete mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit field measured drawing of areas receiving concrete structures. Show

locations of control and expansion joints. a. Overall Plan: Scale: Not less than 1/10” = 1’-0”, scale of Landscape

drawings (LA) b. Detail Plans: Scale: Not less than 1/10” = 1’-0”. Show building features

including doors, gridlines. 2. Detail joints. Show each type required. Show size, reinforcing, dowels, and

sealant assembly. Scale: Not less than half size.

C. Samples: Submit minimum samples of color and finish texture for Architect's approval. Texture of samples to be representative of completed concrete. 1. Match Architect's sample. 2. Preliminary Samples: Furnish 3 different finishes as directed by Architect.

a. Sample Size: 12" x 12". 3. Final Sample: Furnish one sample in as directed by Architect. See "Mock-Up"

under QUALITY ASSURANCE below. a. Sample Size: 24" x 24.

D. Design Data, Test Reports: Concrete mix design and test reports specified in Section 033000.

E. Formwork: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of all Architectural concrete work and exterior exposed surfaces of normal concrete work. Show general construction of forms including jointing, special form joint or rustications, and other items which affect exposed concrete visually. Also show location and pattern of form tie placement, below grade.



CONCRETE

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033300 - 2

1. Architect's review is for general architectural applications and features only. Design of formwork for structural stability and efficiency is Contractor's responsibility.

2. Submit sample of plywood forms for approval of surface characteristics; minimum size 1 feet x 1 feet. Sample to be representative of material used for construction.

F. Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Manufacturer’s Application Instructionsl2Manufacturer's Application Instructionsl2 Submit complete instructions for application of flooring system including any precautions or special handling instructions required to comply with applicable safety regulations and codes.


A. ACI Publications: Perform all work of this Section according to ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings", except as specifically modified herein. Numbers in parentheses (0.00) indicate the paragraph of ACI 301 which is being modified.

B. Municipal Standards: Standard details and drawings of municipality or agency governing project.

C. Obtain each material from same source and maintain high degree of consistency in workmanship throughout Project.

D. Job Mock-ups: After approval of samples and before starting work, build mock-up on site for approval. See "Samples" under SUBMITTALS above. Mock-ups to show finish/texture/color of approved samples. 1. Formed Concrete Mock-Up: Build mock-up on firm foundation in location as

directed by Architect. a. Show wall corner and any special shape conditions(s), minimum 4 feet long

by 4 feet high with not less than 2 foot corner return; minimum thickness 8 inches.

b. Mock-up to show the following: 1) Vertical butt form joint. 2) Chamfer strips as detailed or directed if not shown. 3) Form tie-hole treatment. (Below grade only)

2. After approval, mock-ups will be used as a standard for approval of subsequent work of this Section.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from batching until discharge.

B. Weather Conditions: Concrete work to comply with the following requirements as applicable: 1. "Hot Weather Concreting," ACI 305. 2. "Cold Weather Concreting," ACI 306.



CONCRETE

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033300 - 3

C. Temperature: When air temperature during placement is less than 40 degrees F or may be within 24 hours, temperature of concrete as placed to conform to limits specified below. Maintain concrete temperature within these limits for the full curing period. 1. Sections Less than 12 Inches Thick: Between 55 and 90 degrees F. 2. Sections 12 Inches Thick or Greater: Between 50 and 90 degrees F.

D. Do not place concrete when adverse weather conditions may have a detrimental effect on appearance or integrity of concrete work unless suitable protection is provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Formwork: To conform to ACI 347. 1. Flat Surfaces:

a. Without Form Liner: APA High Density Overlay (HDO) Plywood; minimum 3/4 inches thick, sealed all edges, seams, and recesses at fasteners. Provide in sizes required up to 4 foot widths and 12 foot lengths to minimize joints.

B. Form Ties: Standard coil or snap ties with 3/4 inch plastic cones on Architectural concrete surfaces. Provide with manufacturer's recessed plugs of grey concrete to seal tie holes; recess minimum 1/4 inch behind face of wall. Form ties permitted at below grade conditions, only

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for bars and welded wire fabric and other requirements for reinforcement accessories.

B. Micro-Reinforcement: ASTM C 1116, ¾” long, 100 percent pure virgin nylon-6 fibers.

C. Reinforcing Supports: 1. Welded Wire Fabric: "Mesh-Ups" by Lotel, Inc., Baton Rouge, LA (504/926-7327)

or equal. 2. Bars: Bolsters and chairs suitable for application by Dayton Sure-Grip or equal.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, gray . 2. Course Aggregate: Limestone, No. 57 maximum size.

B. Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M except free of wash water from mixer washout operations.



CONCRETE

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033300 - 4

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A or D (2.2.1.2).

a. "Eucon WR 75" by Euclid. b. "Plastocrete 161" by Sika. c. "WRDA" by W. R. Grace.

2. Superplasticizer: Not permitted. 3. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Single Use Wet Curing Blanket: ASTM C 171-03; polyethylene film or, non staining cellulose fabrics with a 3 mil white reflective impervious coating to protect against UV degradation. 1. Provide one of the following:

a. HydraCure S16, by PNA Construction technologies. b. UltraCure SUN, by McTech Group.

B. Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 1. For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with

sealer.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Abrasive Grit for Sandblasting: Ebony Grit 12 by Opta Minerals, Attica NY, (716)-912-1796. Water quenched mineral slag with less than 1.0 percent silica, and a Mohs hardness of 7.5 to 8.0, number 8-16 mesh size. Sand not acceptable. 1. Opti Minerals, www.optiminerals.com.

B. Expansion Joints: Provide with joint caps. 1. Basis of design: Products by WR Meadows. 2. Sponge Rubber: ASTM-D1751 Type I.

a. Typical Thickness: 1/4 inch. b. Joint Cap: Two-piece device with upper portion removable after curing

period; width corresponding to joint filler. 3. Cork: ASTM-D1752, Type II.

a. Typical Thickness: 1/4 inch. b. Joint Cap: Two-piece device with upper portion removable after curing

period; width corresponding to joint filler. 4. Sealant specified under Division 7. Colors to match each concrete color.



CONCRETE

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033300 - 5

2.7 AGGREGATE BASE

A. Aggregate Base: ODOT 304.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of cast-in-place architectural concrete proportioned on basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed

design mixtures based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Proportion concrete mixtures as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa). 2. Cement Content: 564 lbs. per cubic yard, minimum. 3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.48. 4. Slump: Not to exceed 5 inches.

C. Admixtures: 1. Water Reducing Admixture: All concrete shall contain the specified water

reducing admixture, or water reducing retarding admixture as needed to meet slump and water/cement ratio; do not use additional water for ease of placement.

2. Air Content: 5 percent plus or minus 1 percent. 3. Admixtures Not Permitted:

a. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride ions are not permitted (3.7.1).

b. High range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer).

D. Micro-Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate recommended by manufacturer.

E. Mixing: 1. Ready-Mixed or Site-Mixed Architectural Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and

deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information. a. Clean equipment used to mix and deliver cast-in-place architectural

concrete to prevent contamination from other concrete. 2. Do not retemper mix by adding water in field. 3. Concrete: All concrete is to be ready-mixed (7.2) except Class I concrete may

be site mixed (7.1). 4. Admixtures: All admixtures to be added at batch plant.

F. Minimum Quantity: Delivered mixed concrete subject to the following quantity limitations: 1. Quantity: Minimum 3 yards. 2. Mixer Size: Not less than 40% of the capacity of the mixing drum; e.g. a

minimum of 4 cubic yards in a 9-yard truck. 3. Fractional Yardage: Quantities shall be in full-yard increments; e.g. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,

9 cubic yards. ¼, 1/3, ½, or other fractional yardage not permitted.

G. All concrete to be ready-mixed (7.2).



CONCRETE

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033300 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION 1. Determine field conditions by actual measurement. 2. Notify the Architect not less than 24 hours in advance of placing concrete. Place

concrete only when the Architect is present, unless this requirement is specifically waived.

3.2 FORMWORK

A. Formwork to conform to ACI 347. 1. Erect in accordance with approved shop drawings. 2. Rustication or Accent strips: Place where shown and approved. 3. Ties: Ties permitted only below grade. Provide ties with plastic cones on

Architectural concrete surfaces. Provide with recessed plugs to seal tie holes; recess minimum 1/4 inch behind face of wall.

4. Flush Joints: Exposed flush joints (without rustication or accent strips) to be taped, caulked, or otherwise sealed in an approved manner to prevent leaks and subsequent discoloration. a. This type joint to be limited to the maximum extent possible. b. Locate joints at rustications, designated control and expansion joints to the

maximum extent possible. 5. Do not use chamfer strips. Edges and joints shall be tooled.

B. Walls: Form shear keys at all construction joints.

C. Maintain continual inspection of shores and forms during concrete placement in order to immediately correct any settlement or movement that may occur. Inspection shall continue until concrete has hardened (4.2.6).

D. Forms and shoring may be removed when concrete has reached a strength of 3,000 psi but not before 7 days from date of placement (4.5.1). Contractor is cautioned to consider affects of form removal timing on color of completed concrete.

E. Railing Sleeves: Set in accurate locations where indicated on drawings.

F. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

G. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

3.3 REINFORCEMENT AND INSERTS

A. Install reinforcing in accordance with drawings and approved shop drawings. 1. Provide minimum concrete cover as scheduled on structural drawings and ACI

301.

B. Placement of reinforcing shall be reviewed by the Architect's representative before any arrangements for delivery of concrete are made final.



CONCRETE

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033300 - 7

C. Expansion/Construction Joints: 1. Expansion joints: Reinforcing to be discontinuous at all expansion joints. 2. Construction joints: Continue reinforcing through construction joints.

3.4 WALL JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Install construction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of cast-in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement

across construction joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of cast-in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Preconditions: 1. Give due notice to the Architect, testing laboratory, and all Contractors affected

before placing concrete. Allow adequate time for revision or installation of forms, reinforcing, conduit, inserts, sleeves, etc.

2. Frames or other items shall be placed to the satisfaction of the Architect and all Contractors affected.

3. Review of reinforcing.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Concrete shall be discharged from the mixer within 1-1/2 hours after water has been added. This time may be reduced by the Architect if hot weather or other conditions causing quick setting occur (8.2.1).

D. In no case shall the concrete have a free fall sufficient to cause segregation of the aggregate. In general, the limit free fall shall be 2 feet (8.3.3).

E. Place concrete continuously between scheduled joints or other indicated stop. Where concrete cannot be placed continuously for item, stop at rustication or similar natural break. Concrete containing cold joints between planned joints to be removed to the next lower planned joint and replaced in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. Obtain approval of Architect for all breaks in continuous placement.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.



CONCRETE

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033300 - 8

3.6 EXPOSED FORMED FINISHES

A. Appearance: Uniform color and texture to match approved mock-up and comply with requirements of ACI 301 for Architectural Concrete.

B. Schedule of Finishes on Formed Surfaces: 1. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the

finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched.

2. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view. This is as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins or other projections removed. Seal tie holes with prefabricated plugs, or grout (Note: Below grade only). a. Vibrate concrete or employ other methods to reduce air-hole voids to a

minimum. b. While the surface is still workable, fill air-hole voids with a cement paste

matching color of concrete wall. c. Do not apply a sack finish. d. When concrete is stable and free standing, and the surface is still workable

remove forms; and provide steel trowel finish on exposed faces. Fill air-hole voids with a cement paste matching color of concrete wall to obtain a smooth steel troweled finish void of air holes, fins, and imperfections. 1) A retarder on the form work may be required to allow the surface to

be workable and concrete stable and free standing.

C. Form Re-Use: For smooth form finishes, forms shall not be reused if there is any evidence of surface wear and tear or defect which would impair the quality of the surface. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and properly coated before re-use. (Note: Requirements for form release agents are covered in Section 4.4.2).

D. Sandblast Finish: Typical for surfaces exposed to view, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. 1. Provide light sandblast finish to match the approved Mockup. Sample available

for inspection at Architect's office before bid (13.5.3.2.). 2. Provide sandblast finish on exposed portions of Architectural Site Concrete and

surfaces designated on drawings. 3. Prior to sandblasting, provide a steel troweled finish on horizontal and vertical

surfaces. 4. Perform sandblasting in as continuous operation as possible, utilizing the same

work crew to provide a finish matching the approved Mockup. 5. Use specified abrasive grit to expose the aggregate and surrounding matrix

surfaces to provide a uniform sandblast finish matching the approved Mockup. 6. Use same nozzle person, nozzle, nozzle pressure and blasting technique as

used for the approved Mockup. 7. Blast corners and edge of patterns carefully, using backup boards in order to

maintain a uniform corner or edge line. 8. Maintain control of abrasive grit and concrete dust in each area of blasting.



CONCRETE

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033300 - 9

9. Remove expended abrasive grit, concrete dust and debris at the end of each day of blasting operations.

10. Protect adjacent surfaces from being eroded, damaged, or discolored by the sandblasting.

3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. See "Temperature" under ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS in Part 1 above for thermal requirements to be maintained during cure period.

B. Cure Time and Sequence: 1. Curing Start: Begin immediately after disappearance of water sheen and

continue uninterrupted for the required cure period. 2. Cure Period: Not less than 7 days at required temperatures. 3. Early Form Removal: Where forms are removed before full cure period, apply

curing materials as specified below.

C. Curing Method: Concrete Walls: Use waterborne, membrane-forming curing compound.

D. Coat surfaces not in contact with forms with impervious membrane film consisting of approved liquid sealing compound applied in atomized form after surface water has entirely disappeared, but while surfaces are still moist. Coat formed surfaces if forms are removed before cure period. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Re-coat surfaces sandblasted before cure period.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. General: Comply with field quality-control requirements in Section 033000

"Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2. Field inspection and testing will be performed by a Testing Agency as specified

under Section 01452 - Testing and Inspection Services. 3. The minimum number of Technical Service full time inspection days is as follows:

a. Three days for projects of 2,000 square feet or less. Technical service representative shall be present for the following periods. 1) Field Sample: Immediately prior to and during its construction. 2) Installation: Immediately prior to and during the installation of one

complete area including application of curing compound. b. Increase days at a rate of one day for each additional 2,000 square feet.

3.9 REPAIRS, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING

A. General: 1. All voids, damaged places, fins, projections, honeycomb areas, and tie-rod holes

shall be removed down to sound concrete and shall be repaired immediately after form removed and after a concrete curing compound is applied.

2. If chipping is necessary, the edge shall be perpendicular to the surface and slightly undercut.



CONCRETE

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033300 - 10

3. At areas to be repaired, the surface shall be thoroughly flushed and scrubbed with water just before patching to remove all loose material.

4. The specified bonding agent shall be used for all patching and the specified epoxy adhesive and/or epoxy mortar shall be used for all structural concrete repairs.

5. All patching and repairs shall have prior approval of the Architect as to method and procedure.

6. Tie holes shall be thoroughly and liberally coated with a bonding agent and then thoroughly filled with a nonshrink patching mortar.

7. Acceptance: Repairs to be satisfactory to the Architect; redo repair work until accepted; repairs on exposed work may be rejected for aesthetic reasons. If acceptable repairs cannot be achieved, remove defective work and replace with new concrete until accepted.

B. Protect corners, edges, and surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete from damage; use guards and barricades.

C. Protect cast-in-place architectural concrete from staining, laitance, and contamination during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 033500INTERIOR CONCRETE POLISHING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033500 - 1

SECTION 033500 - INTERIOR CONCRETE POLISHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Grinding of the slab surface to receive clear reactive, penetrating liquid

hardener/densifier. 2. Application of clear reactive, penetrating liquid hardener. 3. Progressively polishing and burnishing of the slab surface to achieve Finish

Requirements. 4. Application of stain resistant surface treatment.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 033000- Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Section 079000- Joint Sealants.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Living Building Challenge (LBC) 2.0/2.1.

B. Scientific Certification System (SCS) Indoor Air Quality Gold Certification.

C. NSF International/Nonfood Compound Registration.

D. American National Standard Institute I National Floor Safety Institute ANSI/NSFI 8101.1- 2009 Test Method for Measuring Wet SCOF of Common Hard-Surface Floor Materials.

E. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM C1028- Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of

Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.

2. ASTM D523- Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss (60°}. 3. ASTM D1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on

Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. 4. ASTM D4541 -Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using

Portable Adhesion Testers. 5. ASTM E96/96M Method 8 (Water Method) - Standard Test Methods for Water

Vapor Transmission of Materials. 6. ASTM G154 -Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV) Lamp

Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033500 - 2

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products in accordance with: 1. Level Surfaces Not Subject To Wetting: SCOF of not less than 0.50 in

accordance with ANSI A1264.2 Section E11.2. 2. Level Surfaces Subject To Wetting: DCOF of not less than 0.42 in accordance

with ANSI A137.1.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. VOC Certification: Submit certification that products furnished comply with regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC).

C. Test Reports Provide test reports confirming compliance with specified performance criteria.


A. Penetrating Concrete Hardener/Densifier and Surface Protectant Treatment Installer Qualifications: 1. Provide letter of completion from chemical manufacturer stating that installer is

listed applicator of special concrete finishes, and has completed the necessary training programs at time of Bid and within submittal package.

2. Applicator shall be familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work of this section. Applicator must have availability of proper equipment to perform work within scope of this project on a timely basis. Applicator should have successfully performed a minimum of 5 projects of similar scope and complexity.

3. Certified Installers required for this system. a. Installers:

1) Armstrong Industrial Floors/ Precision Industrial Services. a) Contact Larry Jones,

Phone: (614) 745-7834 Fax: (614) 877-7362.

2) Installer approved by manufactured in writing.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Shall convene before the start of work on new concrete slabs, patching of existing concrete slabs and start of application of concrete finish system. 1. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section, including the 2. Owner and/or Owner's Representative, Contractor, Architect, concrete installer,

and applicator. Meeting should only convene when all parties are present. 3. Review the following:

a. Physical requirements of completed concrete slab and slab finish. b. Locations and time of test areas. c. Protection of surfaces not scheduled for finish application. d. Surface preparation. e. Application procedure.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033500 - 3

f. Quality control. g. Cleaning. h. Protection of concrete slab prior to and post finish system. i. Coordination with other work.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

2. Mock-up shall take place on site, prior to the start of the polished concrete finishing process. a. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section,

including the Contractor, Architect, applicator, manufacturer's representative, and Owner/Owner's Representative.

b. Contractor to notify the above parties one week in advance of date and time when mock-up will be completed.

3. Build mockups for polished concrete flooring including accessories. 4. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) of typical flooring condition at locations

directed by Architect. a. Treat half of the mockup with High Gloss Finish and other half with Medium

Gloss Finish. Do not burnish the medium gloss finish coat. Architect will select one of the two gloss levels for installed product at no change in cost.

5. Demonstrate the materials, equipment and application methods to be used for work specified herein in pre-approved.

6. Retain acceptable mock-up during construction as a standard for judging the completed work. Areas may remain as part of the completed work.

7. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer labels indicating brand name and directions for storage.

B. Store concrete hardener/densifier and surface protectant treatment in environment recommended on published manufacturer's product data sheets. 1. Store containers upright in a cool, dry, well-ventilated place, out of the sun with

temperature between 40 and 1oo degrees F (4 and 38 degrees C). 2. Protect from freezing. 3. Store away from all other chemicals and potential sources of contamination. 4. Keep lights, fire, sparks and heat away from containers. 5. Do not drop containers or slide across sharp objects. 6. Do not stack pallets more than three high. 7. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033500 - 4

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting performance and finishing requirements.

B. Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during installation.

C. Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application for time period recommended in writing by manufacturer.

D. Control and collect water and dust produced by grinding operations. Protect adjacent construction from detrimental effects of grinding operations.

E. The completed slab shall be protected to prevent damage by the other trades during floor completion.

F. Temperature Limitations: 1. Do not apply when surface and air temperature are below 40 degrees F (4

degrees C) or above 95 degrees F (35 degrees C) unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not apply when surface and air temperatures are not expected to remain above 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) for a minimum of 8 hours after application, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Do not apply under windy conditions such that the concrete surface treatment may be blown to surfaces not intended.

H. Do not apply earlier than 24 hours after rain or if rain is predicted for a period of 8 hours after application, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Temporary Heat: Ambient temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) minimum.

J. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation in confined or enclosed areas in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

K. Concrete Mix Designs: As specified in section 033000 - Cast in Place Concrete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS (CNT-1)

A. Pre-Densifier Concrete Cleaner: Shall remove dirt, oil, grease, and other stains from existing slab surface. 1. Consolideck Cleaner/Degreaser manufactured by PROSOCO, Inc., Lawrence,

KS, (800) 255-4255, www.prosoco.com, (NO SUBSTITUTE).



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033500 - 5

2. Auto Scrubber Machine: equipment used for cleaning operations, as required produce specified results.

B. Penetrating Concrete Hardener/Densifier: Uthium silicate hardener/densifier shall penetrate and react with concrete to produce insoluble calcium silicate hydrate within the concrete pores. The penetrating concrete hardener shall reduce dusting, increase abrasion resistance and not contribute to surface crazing/surface Alkali Silicate Reactions (ASR). 1. Consolideck LS, manufactured by PROSOCO, Inc., Lawrence, KS, (800)

255-4255, www.prosoco.com, (NO SUBSTITUTE). 2. Subject to compliance with the following requirements:

a. Living Building Challenge 2.0/2.1 Red List Compliant. b. Recipient of Scientific Certification System (SCS) Indoor Air Quality Gold

Certification. c. Comply with national, state and district AIM VOC regulations and be 50 g/L

or Jess. d. Registered as an approved NSF lnternational/Nonfood Compound

Registration. e. Abrasion Resistance: >50% improvement over untreated samples when

tested in accordance with ASTM C1353. f. Achieve 'High Traction Range' readings when tested in accordance with

ANSI B101.1. g. Coefficient of Friction: >0.60 dry, >0.60 wet when tested in accordance with

ASTM C1028. h. Adhesion: >10% increase In pull-off strength when compared to an

untreated sample when tested in accordance with ASTM 04541. i. Water Vapor Transmission: 100% retained when compared to untreated

samples when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/96M Method 8 (Water Method).

j. UV Stability: No degradation or yellowing of material when tested in accordance with ASTM G154.

C. Interior Concrete Protective Treatments: 1. High Gloss Finish: General Purpose high-gloss film forming premium sealer

shall contain lithium silicate hardener/densifier to improve the surface sheen, and surface hardness. a. Consolideck LSGuard, manufactured by PROSOCO, Inc., Lawrence, KS,

(800) 255-4255, www.prosoco.com, (NO SUBSTITUTE). b. Subject to compliance with the following requirements:

1) Living Building Challenge 2.0/2.1 Red List Compliant. 2) Recipient of Scientific Certification System (SCS) Indoor Air Quality

Gold Certification. 3) Comply with national, state and district AIM VOC regulations. 4) Registered as an approved NSF International/Nonfood Compound

Registration. 5) Achieve 'High Traction Range' readings when tested in accordance

with ANSIB101.1. 6) Coefficient of Friction: >0.60 dry,>0.60 wet when tested in

accordance with ASTM C1028.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033500 - 6

7) Adhesion: >10% increase in pull-off strength when compared to an untreated sample when tested in accordance with ASTM 04541.

8) UV Stability: No degradation or yellowing of material when tested in accordance with ASTM G154.

2. Medium Gloss Finish: General Purpose medium gloss, film forming sealer to treat surfaces to increase resistance damage from water, staining and abrasion. a. Consolideck Polish Guard, manufactured by PROSOCO, Inc., Lawrence,

KS, (800) 255-4255, www.prosoco.com, (NO SUBSTITUTE). b. Subject to compliance with the following requirements:

1) Living Building Challenge 2.0/2.1 Red List Compliant. 2) Recipient of Scientific Certification System (SCS) Indoor Air Quality

Gold Certification. 3) Comply with national, state and district AIM VOC regulations. 4) Achieve 'High Traction Range' readings when tested in accordance

with ANSI B101.1. 5) Coefficient of Friction: >0.60 dry, >0.60 wet when tested in

accordance with ASTM C1028. 6) Stain Resistance: Achieve limited or no adverse effects when tested

in accordance with ASTM 01038. 3. UV Stability: No degradation or yellowing of material when tested in accordance

with ASTM G154Joint Filler: a. EUCO QWIKJOINT 200 Polyurea Floor Joint Filler by The Euclid

Chemical Company 19218 Redwood Rd. Cleveland, OH, 44110 Phone: (216) 531-9222 Toll-free: (8OO) 321-7628 Fax: (216) 531-9596 or equal.

b. Complies with ACI 302 performance recommendations regarding control and construction joint fillers. 1) Color: Match Architect's sample.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Auto Scrubber Machine: Equipment used for cleaning operations, as required to produce specified results.

B. Hand Grinder for edge grinding/polishing.

C. Polishing Equipment: 1. Polishing machines shall be in full operating condition during the duration of the

work to achieve specified Finishing Requirements and must grind to within 1/8" of walls and edges.

2. Dry grinding/polishing machines must include a dust extraction system, including HEPA filtration vacuum.

D. Diamond Heads Types: 1. Metal Diamonds: 30, 50, 80 and 150.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033500 - 7

2. Hybrid Style Diamonds: 50 or 100. 3. Resin Bonded, Phenolic Diamonds: 100, 200, 400, BOO, 1500, and 3000 (if

necessary).

E. Burnishing Machine and Burnishing Pads shall be used to produce specified results. 1. Burnishing Machine: High speed burnisher, generating pad speeds of 1,500 RPM

or higher, as recommended by protective treatment manufacturer. Dust skirt must be installed at time of work.

2. Burnishing Pads: as recommended by protective treatment manufacturer. a. White Burnishing Pad, non-abrasive b. Consolideck Heat Pad manufactured by PROSOCO, Inc., Lawrence, KS,

(800) 255-4255, www.prosoco.com.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrate with installer present for conditions affecting performance of finish. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Surfaces that are in question or that will affect the execution or quality of work must be brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative before work may begin.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean dirt, dust, oil, grease and other contaminants that interfere with penetration or performance of specified product from surfaces. Use appropriate concrete cleaners approved by the concrete surface treatment manufacturer where necessary. Rinse thoroughly using pressure water spray to remove cleaner residues. Allow surfaces to dry completely before application of product.

B. Repair, patch and fill cracks, voids, defects and damaged areas in surface as approved by the Architect. Allow repair materials to cure completely before application of product.

C. Variations in substrate texture and color will affect final appearance and should be corrected prior to application of sealer/hardener system and the polishing steps.

D. Protect surrounding areas prior to application. If product is accidentally misapplied to adjacent surfaces, flush with water immediately before material dries.

E. Avoid contact in areas not to be treated. Avoid contact with metal, glass and painted surfaces.

F. Seal open joints in accordance with Section 079000 - Joint Sealants.

G. Apply specified sealants and caulking and allow complete curing before application of Penetrating Concrete Hardener/Densifier.

H. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033500 - 8

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs 1. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth. 2. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete in polishing

sequence and according to manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time between successive coats.

3. Continue polishing with progressively finer-grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level, to match approved mockup.

4. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations.

B. Concrete Floor Finish Class: 1. Class B, Fine Aggregate (Salt and Pepper) Finish: Remove not more than 1/16

inch of concrete surface by grinding and polishing resulting in majority of exposure displaying fine aggregate with no, or small amount of, medium aggregate at random locations.

C. Concrete Floor Finish Level: 1. Level 2, Medium Gloss Appearance:

a. Procedure: Not less than 5 step process with full refinement of each diamond pad up to 800 grit resin bonded pad with one application of densifier.

b. Gloss Reading: Not less than 55 according to ASTM E 430.

D. Dry and wet grinding/polishing is acceptable when industry standard polishing procedures are adhered to.

E. Between and after final polishing passes, thoroughly scrub and rinse slab surface with clean water and vacuum with auto-scrubber.

F. Sequential progression of diamond polishing steps shall be required and limited to no more than double the grit value of the previous diamonds used.

G. Overlap adjacent polishing passes by 25%.

H. Perform each pass perpendicular to the other pass north/south then east/west; multiple passes may be needed.

I. Include all work necessary to achieve specified Finish Requirements.

J. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces.

3.4 INTERIOR CONCRETE POLISHING

A. Factory Trained Applicator reserves the right to change grit starting level and all other aspects that will contribute to the specified gloss in the specifications and match approved mockups. The remaining process follows:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033500 - 9

B. Progressively grind and polish the slab surface utilizing approved diamond segments as necessary to produce Finishing Requirements while meeting the general requirements.

3.5 APPLICATION OF PENETRATING CONCRETE HARDENERIDENSIFIER

A. Apply hardener/densifier at the rate of 500-700 square feet per gallon with a low pressure sprayer fitted with a 0.5 gpm spray tip. (Typically after 200-grit and no later than 400 grit)

B. Apply sufficient material to keep concrete surface wet for 5-10 minute period, without producing puddles.

C. Allow treated surface to dry.

D. Continue progressively polishing floor with required resin diamonds as necessary to produce desired final finish.

3.6 APPLICATION OF INTERIOR CONCRETE PROTECTIVE TREATMENT

A. High Gloss Finish: Application of general purpose, high gloss protective treatment (LSGuard): 1. Apply per manufacturer's published recommendations to clean, dry slab at the

completion of mechanically polishing the slab surface. 2. Lightly wet a clean microfiber pad with LSGuard and wring out excess, leaving

the pad damp. 3. Working from one control joint to another, apply a light, fine spray of LSGuard

protective treatment to a small section of the floor using a clean, pump-up sprayer fitted with a 0.5 gpm spray tip, at an estimated coverage rate of 2000-3000 square feet per gallon.

4. Using the damp microfiber pad and firm downward pressure, immediately spread the protective treatment to produce a thin, even coating. Spread the product as far as possible while maintaining a wet edge. Properly applied, protective treatment dries quickly. Stop spreading once drying begins. Avoid overlapping.

5. Allow to dry tack free, typically 20-60 minutes. 6. Once dry, high- speed burnish slab surface fitted with Consolideck Heat pad to

increase gloss and to help the treatment fuse and bond with the concrete for increased durability and longevity. Surface temperatures immediately behind the burnisher must achieve 90.5°F. (Burnish between coats if multiple applications are desired.)

7. Repeat above steps 1-6, as necessary for addition at applications of LSGuard, to achieve desired final finish (Maximum 3 coats).

B. Medium Gloss Finish: Application of general purpose, medium gloss protective treatment, PolishGuard: 1. Apply per manufacturer's published recommendations to clean, dry slab at the

completion of mechanically polishing the slab surface. 2. Lightly wet a clean microfiber pad with PolishGuard and wring out excess,

leaving the pad damp.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033500 - 10

3. Spray-apply PolishGuard using a clean, pump-up sprayer fitted with a 0.5 gpm conical or fan spray tip at an estimated coverage rate of 400-800 square feet per gallon. Work from one control joint to another.

4. Spread with the damp microfiber pad. Maintain a thin, even coating and wet edge. Stop spreading once drying begins. Do not overlap. Repeat steps 1-Two coats are recommended for maximum protection.

5. To Increase gloss, wait at least 60 minutes after the final coat is applied, then use a high- speed burnisher fitted with a white polishing pad or diamond impregnated pad. Burnish at a fast walking pace.

3.7 SLAB PROTECTION

A. Protect finished floors to prevent damage including staining, gouges and scratching by construction traffic and activities until possession.

B. Do not drag or drop equipment or material across the slab which will scratch or chip it.

C. Tires shall be inspected for debris prior to use on slab. Remove embedded items which may cause damage to floor slab.

D. Clean up spills on slab immediately. Provide cleaning chemicals and absorptive materials. Coordinate with concrete finish material supplier for compatibility of cleaners to be used.

E. Develop a concrete protection procedure and coordinate with concrete floor finish manufacturers which addresses the following procedures: 1. Communication of protection plan to subcontractors and vendors. 2. Procedures for cleaning up slab spills, including use of and availability of

cleaning chemicals and absorptive materials at Site.

F. Provide a clean slab surface at all times, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.8 FINISHING REQUIREMENTS

A. Appearance: 1. Interior exposed finished slab areas must consist of the following:

a. Slab surface must meet the desired specified sheen, as discussed in Pre- Installation meeting and be consistent with Mock-up results.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 033503CONCRETE SLAB FINISHING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033503 - 1

SECTION 033503 - CONCRETE SLAB FINISHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Concrete finish requirements for unformed horizontal concrete surfaces and supplements requirements of Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete."

B. Related Sections: 1. 03 5411 - Floor Substrate Preparation: For unreinforced, self-leveling and

trowelable underlayment and traffic-bearing topping.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. Standards: Comply with the following documents, except where requirements of the contract documents are more stringent: 1. ACI 301.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (CNT-2)

2.1 CONCRETE SLAB SEALER

A. Concrete Floor Sealer/Finish: Liquid chemical hardener; siliconate type. Acceptable products include: 1. Curecrete Chemical, "Ashford Formula" (enhanced silicate, not siliconate). 2. L & M Chemical, "Seal Hard." 3. Euclid Chemical "Diamond Hard". 4. Dayton Superior "Day-Chem Sure Hard J-17".

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Contraction Joint Filler: 1. Sealant: As specified in Section 079200.

B. Concrete Cleaner: Liquid concentrate, biodegradable, heavy-duty cleaner-degreaser compound.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIRING SLAB SURFACES

A. Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows:


SECTION 033503CONCRETE SLAB FINISHING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 033503 - 2

1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days.

2. Low areas: Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the Architect.

3. Crazed or cracked areas: Cut out defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts. Dampen exposed concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix, place, compact, and finish patching concrete to match adjacent concrete.

4. Isolated cracks and holes: Groove top of cracks and cut out holes not over 1 inch in diameter. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound; place dry pack or proprietary repair compound acceptable to Architect while bonding compound is still active: a. Dry-pack mix: One part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate and

enough water as required for handling and placing. b. Install patching mixture and consolidate thoroughly, striking off level with

and matching surrounding surface. Do not allow patched areas to dry out prematurely.

B. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades after such work is in place. Place such fill-in concrete to blend with existing construction, using same mix and curing methods.

3.2 SEALED CONCRETE FLOORS (CNT-2)

A. Concrete Slab Sealer: 1. Apply sealer/finish following manufacturer's printed application instructions; apply

single saturation coat. 2. Remove surplus sealer/hardener and rinse according to manufacturer's

instructions. 3. Burnishing: Prior to completion, apply light second coat of chemical

sealer-hardener material and polish using mild abrasives or brushes in accordance with sealer/hardener manufacturer's recommendations. Buff to even satin sheen.

4. Location: At all interior, exposed slabs subject to pedestrian traffic, unless indicated otherwise.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Coordinate floor and slab flatness and levelness testing with Owner's testing

agency according to ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours of finishing.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 034900GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED

CONCRETE (GFRC)

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 034900 - 1

SECTION 034900 - GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glass-fiber-reinforced concrete (GFRC) panels consisting of GFRC panel frames, anchors, and connection hardware. 1. Molded treads with riser for Stair 3 with integral abrasive strips.

B. Related Sections: 1. 07 9200 Joint Sealants: For elastomeric joint sealants and sealant backings.


A. Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products in accordance with: 1. Level Surfaces Not Subject To Wetting: SCOF of not less than 0.50 in

accordance with ANSI A1264.2 Section E11.2. 2. Level Surfaces Subject To Wetting: DCOF of not less than 0.42 in accordance

with ANSI A137.1.

1.3 Description

A. Molded GFRC stair tread with riser units is the finish material at Stair 3. The steel treads and risers are the substrate for the GFRC units, see structural drawings. The structural strength for treads and risers is provided by the structural steel. Secure GFRC units to steel substrate. Construction Manager shall coordinate the required installed thickness for the GFRC units with the steel stairs so installed stair conforms to with 1009.4.4 of the Ohio Building Code for dimensional uniformity. Joint between GFRC units shall be a 1/4 inch wide joint, that is coplanar with face of rise; unless indicated otherwise. The profile of the finished faces of the stair tread and riser shall be as shown on drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include GFRC design mixes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for GFRC panels including the following: 1. Panel elevations, sections, and dimensions. 2. Finishes. 3. Joint and connection details. 4. Erection details. 5. Size, location, and details of flex, gravity, and seismic anchors for typical panels. 6. Other items sprayed into panels. 7. Erection sequence for special conditions. 8. Relationship to adjacent materials.



CONCRETE (GFRC)

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 034900 - 2

9. Description of loose, cast-in, and field hardware.

C. Samples: 1. GFRC: Representative of finished exposed face of GFRC showing the full

range of colors and textures specified, 8 inch length of molded stair tread and riser.

2. Sealant: Eight inch length of sealant, in color selected by Architect.

D. Source Quality-Control Program: For GFRC manufacturer.

E. Source Quality-Control Test Reports: For GFRC, inserts, and anchors.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain GFRC panels from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handle and transport GFRC panels to avoid damage. 1. Place nonstaining resilient spacers between panels. 2. Support panels on nonstaining material during shipment. 3. Protect panels from dirt and damage during handling and transport.

B. Store GFRC panels to protect from contact with soil, staining, and physical damage. 1. Store panels with nonstaining resilient supports in same positions as when

transported. 2. Store panels on firm, level, and smooth surfaces. 3. Place stored panels so identification marks are clearly visible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Concreteworks East,349 Dunhams Corner Rd East; Brunswick NJ 08816; t:

732.390.9944; f: 732.390.4343 2. Comparable manufacturer approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2.2 MOLD MATERIALS

A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, nonabsorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will provide continuous and true GFRC surfaces; nonreactive with GFRC and capable of producing required finish surfaces.



CONCRETE (GFRC)

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 034900 - 3

1. Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect GFRC surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of GFRC.

2.3 GFRC MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150; Type I, II, or III. 1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use gray of same type, brand,

and source throughout GFRC production.

B. Glass Fibers: Alkali resistant, with a minimum zirconia content of 16 percent, 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) long, specifically produced for use in GFRC, and complying with PCI MNL 130.

C. Sand: Washed and dried silica, complying with composition requirements in ASTM C 144; passing No. 20 (0.85-mm) sieve with a maximum of 2 percent passing No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve.

D. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, nonfading, and alkali resistant.

E. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of GFRC and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 130.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Abrasive Strips: 1. Basis-of design Product: AS-3 by Balco. 2. Solid, non-slip abrasive bars for recessed installation in concrete. 3. Static coefficient of friction:

a. Dry: 1.19 per ASTM D2047-11. b. Wet: 1.10 per ASTM D2047-11.

4. Materials: Two-part epoxy and aluminum oxide abrasive. 5. Color: AS selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Sealer: Slip- and stain-resistant, penetrating-type sealer that is chemically neutral; does not affect terrazzo color or physical properties; is recommended by sealer manufacturer; and complies with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for terrazzo type indicated. 1. Surface Friction: Not less than 0.6 according to ASTM D 2047. 2. Acid-Base Properties: With pH factor between 7 and 10. 3. Rustic Terrazzo: Use solvent acrylic-type sealer.

C. Securement Method: Adhesive or mortar as recommended by GFRC manufacturer for substrate and as follows: 1. Adhesive: As recommended by GFRC manufacturer. 2. Grout: As recommended by GFRC manufacturer.

D. Sealant: Urethane; Multicomponent Nonsag conforming to Section 079200 - Sealants.



CONCRETE (GFRC)

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 034900 - 4

1. Color: As approved by Architect to match color of GFRC.

E. Grout: 1. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.

a. Product: SpectraLOCK Pro Grout, by Laticrete. b. Color: As approved by Architect to match color of GFRC.

2.5 GFRC MIXES

A. Backing Mix: Proportion backing mix of portland cement, glass fibers, sand, and admixtures to comply with design requirements. Provide nominal glass-fiber content of not less than 5 percent by weight of total mix.

B. Face Mix: Proportion face mix of portland cement, sand, facing aggregates, and admixtures to comply with design requirements.

C. Mist Coat: Portland cement, sand slurry, and admixtures; of same proportions as backing mix without glass fibers.

D. Polymer-Curing Admixture: 6 to 7 percent by weight of polymer-curing admixture solids to dry portland cement.

E. Coloring Admixture: Not to exceed 10 percent of cement weight.

F. Color: Match Architect's sample.

G. Exposed Finish: Smooth to match troweled concrete finish.

H. Physical Properties (After 28 days). 1. Density: 110-130 (pcf). 2. Tensile Strength (ASTM D790): 1110 PSI. 3. Flexural Strength (ASTM D790): 700-2000. 4. Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 6000-9000. 5. Direct Tension: 600-1000 psi. 6. Shear (in plane): 600-1000 psi. 7. Coefficient of thermal expansion (77- 115 deg F.): 12x10 (6) in/in/deg F. 8. Thermal conductivity: 3.5 to 7.0 (Btu/in/hr/ft2/deg. F).

2.6 MOLD FABRICATION

A. Construct molds that will result in finished GFRC complying with profiles, dimensions, and tolerances indicated, without damaging GFRC during stripping. Construct molds to prevent water leakage and loss of cement paste. 1. Coat contact surfaces of molds with form-release agent.

2.7 GFRC FABRICATION

A. General:



CONCRETE (GFRC)

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 034900 - 5

1. Fabricate units straight, smooth, and true to size and shape, with exposed edges and corners precise and square unless otherwise indicated. Edges to be standard 1/4 eased unless otherwise specified and corners precise and square unless otherwise indicated. Edges to be standard 1/8 inch eased unless otherwise specified.

2. Fabricate units with smooth surface finish free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycomb; with uniform color and texture to match approved control sample.

3. Fill entrapped air voids or similar casting variations will be with a portland cement based colored filler, matching field color of GFRC.

B. Curing: Employ initial curing method that will ensure sufficient strength for removing units from mold. Comply with PCI MNL 130 procedures.

C. Sealer: As recommended by manufacturer and as follows: 1. Surface Friction: Not less than 0.6 according to ASTM D 2047 or not less than

0.50 according to ANSI A1264.2 Section E11.2.

D. Panel Identification: Mark each GFRC panel to correspond with identification mark on Shop Drawings. Mark each panel with its casting date.

E. Thickness: 1-1/4 inch, unless indicated otherwise.

2.8 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Manufacturing Tolerances: Manufacture GFRC panels so each finished unit complies with the following dimensional tolerances. 1. Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Adjacent to Mold: As

follows: a. Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

2. Warp (out of plane): 1/8 per 5 3. Thickness: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), minus 0 inch (0 mm). 4. Angular Variation of Plane of Side Mold: Plus or minus 1/32 inch per 3 inches

(0.8 mm per 75 mm) of depth or plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) total, whichever is greater.

5. Variation from Square or Designated Skew (Difference in Length of Two Diagonal Measurements): Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 72 inches (3 mm per 1800 mm) or plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) total, whichever is greater.

6. Bowing: Not to exceed L/240 unless unit meets erection tolerances using connection adjustments.

7. Length and Width of Block Outs and Openings within One Unit: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

8. Maximum Permissible Warpage of One Corner out of the Plane of the Other Three: 1/16 inch per 12 inches (1.5 mm per 305 mm) of distance from nearest adjacent corner.

B. Position Tolerances: Measured from datum line locations, as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1. Panel Frame and Track: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Blockouts: Plus or minus 3/8 inch (10 mm).



CONCRETE (GFRC)

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 034900 - 6

C. Panel Frame Tolerances: As follows: 1. Vertical and Horizontal Alignment: 1/4 inch per 10 feet (6 mm per 3 m). 2. Spacing of Framing Member: Plus or minus 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3. Squareness of Frame: Difference in length of diagonals of 3/8 inch (10 mm). 4. Overall Size of Frame: Plus or minus 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.9 FINISHES

A. Finish exposed-face surfaces of GFRC as follows to match approved Architect's sample. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, or other obvious defects. 1. As-Cast-Surface Finish: Provide free of sand streaks, honeycombs, and

excessive air voids, with uniform color and texture.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality-Control Testing: Establish and maintain a quality-control program for manufacturing GFRC panels according to PCI MNL 130. 1. Test materials and inspect production techniques. 2. Quality-control program shall monitor glass-fiber content, spray rate, unit weight,

product physical properties, anchor pull-off and shear strength, and curing period and conditions.

3. Prepare test specimens and test according to ASTM C 1228, PCI MNL 130, and PCI MNL 128 procedures.

4. Test GFRC inserts and anchors according to ASTM C 1230 to validate design values.

5. Produce test boards at a rate not less than one per work shift per operator for each spray machine and for each mix design. a. For each test board, determine glass-fiber content according to ASTM C

1229, and flexural yield and ultimate strength according to ASTM C 947.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine structure and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting GFRC panels to supporting members and backup materials.

B. Lift GFRC panels and install without damage.



CONCRETE (GFRC)

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 034900 - 7

C. Install GFRC panels level, plumb, square, and in alignment. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of panels until permanent connections are completed. 1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width. 2. Remove projecting hoisting devices.

D. Connect GFRC panels in position by bolting or welding, or both, as indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after connecting is completed.

E. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3 requirements for welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Protect GFRC panels from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and

provide noncombustible shields as required.

F. At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of nuts.

G. Prepare steel substrate per manufacturer's recommendations and adhere GFRC units to steel substrate.

H. Joints between Ends of GFRC Stair Tread and Riser, and Stair Stringer: 1. Grout joints in conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations, and tool to a

slight concave profile.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect GFRC panels to comply with the following noncumulative tolerances: 1. Plan Location from Building Grid Datum: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: As follows:

a. Exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. Non-exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). c. Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm). d. Non-exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

3. Support Elevation from Nominal Elevation: As follows: a. Maximum Low: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b. Maximum High: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Maximum Plumb Variation over the Lesser of Height of Structure or 100 Feet (30 m): 1 inch (25 mm).

5. Plumb in Any 10 Feet (3 m) of Element Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Edges: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 7. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Faces: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 8. Face Width of Joint: As follows (governs over joint taper):

a. Panel Dimension 20 Feet (6 m) or Less: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. Panel Dimension More Than 20 Feet (6 m): Plus or minus 5/16 inch (8

mm). 9. Maximum Joint Taper: 3/8 inch (10 mm). 10. Joint Taper in 10 Feet (3 m): 1/4 inch (6 mm). 11. Differential Bowing, as Erected, between Adjacent Members of Same Design:

1/4 inch (6 mm).



CONCRETE (GFRC)

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 034900 - 8

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Repairs will be permitted provided structural adequacy of GFRC panel and appearance are not impaired, as approved by Architect.

B. Mix patching materials and repair GFRC so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces.

C. Prepare and repair accessible damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780.

D. Wire brush, clean, and paint accessible weld areas on prime-painted components with same type of shop primer.

E. Remove and replace damaged GFRC panels when repairs do not comply with requirements.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to GFRC manufacturer's written instructions. Clean soiled GFRC surfaces with detergent and water, using soft fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Prevent damage to GFRC surfaces and staining of adjacent materials.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 035411FLOOR SUBSTRATE

PREPARATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 035411 - 1

SECTION 035411 - FLOOR SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling underlayment for interior finish

flooring as follows: a. Ramps and tapers as necessary to correct levels between dissimilar

finishes. b. Fill as necessary to correct slab depression levels. c. Repair of concrete that does not meet specified flatness and levelness

requirements. 2. Floor underlayment, grinding, sanding, etc. where concrete floors will not accept

finish flooring specified.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Sections: For flooring systems substrate requirements.


A. Floor flatness at substrate for finished floor provide by Section 093000 - Tiling as follows: 1. Substrate for Large Format Tiles: Level existing floor to a have a maximum

variation of 1/8 inch in ten feet when measured from high point to high point in the surface; and have a maximum variation of not more than 1/16 inch in 24 inches when measured from high point to high point in the surface. a. Definition of Large Format Tile: As defined in Section 093000 - Tiling

2. Substrate for Tiles Other than Large Format Tiles: Level existing floor to a have a maximum variation of 1/4 inch in ten feet from the required plane when measured from high point to high point in the surface; and have a maximum variation of not more than 1/16 inch in 12 inches from the required plane when measured from high point to high point in the surface.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for material required, including installation instructions.

B. Written approval from finish flooring installer stating that such material is compatible with flooring adhesives to be used.

C. Shop Drawings: Plans indicating substrates, locations, existing conditions which requires such repair material, and average depths of cement-based underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions.



PREPARATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 035411 - 2


A. Installer's Qualifications: Cementitious underpayment shall be installed by applicators approved by the manufacturer of the material.


A. Deliver materials in their original, unopened packages and protected from exposure to the elements. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the job site.

1.6 PROJECT CONDTIONS

A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance.

B. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Self-Leveling Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in uniform thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109. 2. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel or coarse sand as recommended by

underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required. 3. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F. 4. Provide one of the following:

a. K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete; Ardex, Inc. b. Levelex Underlayment; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. Ultraplan 1 Plus; Mapei Corporation. d. Self Leveling Underlayment "SLU"; Raeco, Inc.

B. Self-Leveling Traffic-Bearing Underlayment: Cement-based self-leveling, no troweling, Portland cement-based topping for fast track resurfacing, smoothing, or leveling of indoor concrete that can be installed from 1/4 inch to 2 inch in one operation and up to 5 inches with the addition of appropriate aggregate. 1. Compressive Strength: Not less than 6000 psi at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109. 2. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed 1/8 inch to ¼ inch pea gravel. 3. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F. 4. Provide one of the following:

a. SD-T Self-Leveling Self-Drying Concrete Topping; Ardex Inc. b. Or Approved Equal.



PREPARATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 035411 - 3

C. Trowelable Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, trowelable product that can be applied from a featheredge up to 1 inch, and up to three inches with addition of proper aggregate. 1. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109. 2. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed 1/8 inch to ¼ inch pea gravel. 3. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F. 4. Provide one of the following:

a. Ardex Inc. "SD-P" Fast-Setting Underlayment. b. Laticrete International, Inc. "Laticrete 220 Medium Bed Mortar mixed with

“Laticrete 3701 Latex Mortar Admix." c. Tamms Industries Co. "Thinpatch."

D. Accessories: Furnish primers, patching compounds, and sand fillers as recommended by the underlayment manufacturer for the conditions of the project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. With the exception of areas where leveling can be accomplished by use of latex underlayment, as specified in other sections, install cementitious underlayment to concrete slabs as indicated on the Drawings, and as necessary to level slabs or bring substrates to proper elevation. 1. Substrate for Finished Flooring by Section 093000 - Tiling: Meet or exceed

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS in PART 1 above. At edges of tile locations provide a smooth transition to existing floor level that does not exceed a slope greater than 1/16 inch per foot and provides a feathered edge where it transitions to the existing concrete floor.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Perform preparation to existing substrate and concrete surfaces to assure adhesion and to meet underlayment material and finish flooring material warranty requirements. 1. Clean and prime as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 2. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing

(reflecting) through underlayment according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Prepare floor substrates for underlayment at all locations where floor does not meet specified tolerance requirements.

C. Verify that all areas to be leveled are at or below final design elevation.

D. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.



PREPARATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 035411 - 4

E. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Application: Apply underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Consult underlayment manufacturer's directions for drying times and any other special requirements. 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum

underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion. 2. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same

width to continue through underlayment.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 1. Apply a final layer without aggregate if required to produce smooth surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

E. Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time period recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

F. Do not install topical vapor reducers over underlayment without written confirmation from underlayment manufacturer.

G. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

H. Set screeds, markers, and reference blocks. Set screeds at all construction and control joints to establish weakened plane joints in underlayment.

I. Finish to a smooth level surface within tolerances specified for concrete floors.

3.4 REMEDIAL WORK FOR CONCRETE FLOORS TO RECEIVE FLOORING MATERIALS

A. Repairing of minor holes, cracks, and transition areas is specified under respective finish flooring sections.

B. Grind ridges and other uneven surfaces smooth to prevent telegraphing, bulges or protrusions after resilient material or carpeting is laid.

C. Sand concrete floors with drum sander to remove scale, curing compounds, and other foreign materials which would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Remove lumps of paint, drywall joint compounds, and plaster.



PREPARATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 035411 - 5

3.5 CLEANING

A. As work proceeds, clean up excess materials, rubbish, and splash.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.

3.7 SCHEDULE

A. Self-Leveling Underlayment: Provide at all concrete slabs as necessary to correct slab flatness and levelness tolerances.

B. Self-Leveling Traffic-Bearing Topping: Provide at locations indicated to remain exposed and subject to traffic.

C. Trowelable Underlayment: Provide at locations such as transitions between dissimilar floor coverings, ramps, and other areas where slopes are indicated.

END OF SECTION



PREPARATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 035411 - 6

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


SECTION 042200CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 1

SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's). 2. Pre-faced concrete masonry units. 3. Steel reinforcing bars. 4. Flashing 5. Weeps 6. Masonry cleaning

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. "Decorative finish CMU", "Decorative CMU" and "Pre-faced CMU" are interchangeable terms for purposes of the Construction Documents.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Control Joints: 1. Locations and spacing for units with proper storage practice are specified. 2. Locations of control joints subject to Architect's approval. Architect reserves the

right to modify locations of control joints for aesthetic considerations. Modifications to be issued prior to beginning of portions of work in which joints are required.

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM

C 140 for compressive strength. 2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM

C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

3. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 2

C. Samples: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit and colored mortar.

D. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include data on material properties material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property

specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.


A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 60 inches

(1500 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 3

C. Masonry Units : 1. Units Exposed at Interior of Building: Provide natural colored CMU with smooth

face. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Spec-Finish by Oberfields, LLC. b. Finish: Tight and smooth finish that match Architect's sample. c. Percent Solid: Not less than 52 percent.

2. Units Exposed at Exterior of Project: Provide Pre-faced CMUs a. Start Pre-faced CMUs two courses below grade. b. Locations include all CMU shown on landscape, "L" series drawings.

3. Other Locations: Base bid on natural colored CMU with smooth face; and confirm type of CMU with Architect prior to starting work.

D. Mortar Color: 1. Interior Units: Natural 2. Exterior: Match color of Pre-faced CMUs and as approved by Architect.

E. Integral Water Repellent: 1. Interior: Not Required. 2. Exterior: Required in CMU and mortar.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength for exposed units. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block. d. Krete Industries Inc.; Krete BGP (NS).

C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 2000 psi. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight.

D. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 2800 psi (19.31 MPa).

E. Pre-faced CMUs: Concrete units complying with ASTM C 90, with manufacturer's standard smooth resinous facing complying with ASTM C 744. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Trendstone Plus® filled and polished masonry units or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Anchor Concrete Products (800) 233-1924,One Connelly Road, Emigsville,

PA 17318



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 4

b. Northfield Block Company (800) 358-3003,3400 E. Bungalow Road, Morris, IL 60450

c. Superlite Block (800) 331-9823, 4626 N. 42nd Avenue, Phoenix, AZ 85019. d. Columbus Builders Supply, 900 W 3rd Ave., Columbus, Ohio,

614-294-4991: Bay Block. 2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 2000 psi. 3. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral

water repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength for exposed units.

4. Size: a. Face Dimensions: 7-5/8" x 15-5/8" ± 1/8". b. Bed Depth Dimension: 7-9/16" ± 1/8", unless indicated otherwise on

drawings. 5. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's samples.

a. Basis of Design Color: Slate, as manufactured by Trendstone. 6. Finished Face: Grind face to expose the variegated colors of the natural

aggregates. Fill voids in ground face with cementitious grout and polished smooth in a multi-stage polishing process, and to match Architect’s sample. Provide with factory-applied heat-treated acrylic or water-based sealer finish.

7. Units shall conform to ASTM C1262 with respect to freezing and thawing. 8. Units shall be graffiti and stain resistance. 9. Locations:

a. CMU exposed at exterior of building and extending a minimum of 16 inches below grade at exterior exposed conditions.

2.3 MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide one of the following:

B. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than CMUs.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.

B. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 5

E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.; Richmortar. b. Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment. c. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Masonry Cement.

F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. c. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.

G. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Lafarge North America Inc.; Eaglebond Portland & Lime. 2) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime

Cement.

H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent

passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary

to produce required mortar color.

I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

J. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA. d. Krete Industries Inc.; Gard Mortar Mix.

K. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc for Mortar.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 6

b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar

Admixture. d. Krete Industries Inc.; Gard Mortar Mix.

2. Locations: Use in exterior mortar and grout in proportions recommended by manufacturer.

L. Water: Potable.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407

mm) o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and

tee units.

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A

153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial

Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-)

diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of

masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of

masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 7

D. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 24 inches (610 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (51 mm) or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated. 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, [Proportion] [Property] Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet

walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

4. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

C. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the

following units:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 8

a. Decorative CMUs.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)

that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi (14 MPa).

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength non-etching acid cleaner designed for use on polished block surfaces to removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

B. Basis of Design: The design is based on Burnished Custom Masonry Cleaner by ProSoCo, Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering comparable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following

a. ProSoCo, Inc. b. Others: As approved by Architect prior to bidding.

C. Powerwashing: Prohibited.

D. Muriatic Acid and Acid Base Cleaners: Prohibited.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2

inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus

or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than

plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more

than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do

not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 9

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus

1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). 2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus

3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus

or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 10

3.3 CONTROL JOINTS

A. General: Provide for exterior and interior masonry. Provide sash blocks with premolded shear key. Rake out mortar, if any, and form continuous vertical joints in masonry construction to receive sealant at the locations listed below. Verify locations with Architect. Sealant and backer rod specified elsewhere.

B. Locations: In accordance with NCMA-TEK Bulletins 10-1 and 10-2. 1. Changes in wall height or thickness. 2. Expansion joints in foundations, roof, and floors. 3. Abutments with other construction. 4. Within 1/2 normal design spacing or less of:

a. Corners. Provide on both legs of corners. b. Intersecting bonded walls.

5. Openings: Provide as follows: a. Openings Less than 6 Feet Wide: May use reinforcement as specified

elsewhere in lieu of control joint. b. Opening 6 Feet Wide or More: Provide control joints on both sides of

opening. 1) Above Openings: Offset to ends of lintel. 2) At Opening: Use vertical side of opening as part of joint. 3) Below Openings (Above Floor): Align with side of opening.

6. As indicated on drawings except not less than specified.

C. CMU, Straight Runs: Distance between joints shall not exceed the least of: 1. Length/ Height of wall ratio shall not exceed 1.5. 2. 25 feet, unless a greater distance can be substantiated with CMU with lower

linear shrinkage value than specified by calculations for Crack Control Coefficient in accordance with NCMA Tek 10-2A. a. Maximum spacing not to exceed 40 feet regardless of calculations.

3. As indicated on drawings

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed

joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course

on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting

course on footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 11

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls

and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall

openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide between masonry

and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

3.7 FLASHING

A. General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that

could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.

3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 12

4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

3.8 WEEPS AND VENTS

A. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at not more than 24" on center. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents. 1. Cores in CMU below weep locations shall be grouted solid, and the top 4' of

grout shall be a non-shrink grout; and grout shall be screeded level with top of CMU coarse. Weeps shall be placed in head joints slightly below the solid cores to promote drainage to the exterior.

2. Install a minimum of two weeps between reinforced cells in the CMU walls.

3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed

masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for

grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm). 3. CMU site masonry walls: Fill all voids and cells in CMU solid with grout.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Level 2 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of

site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of

grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 13

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned

for comparison purposes. 2. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A

applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3. Power Washing: Prohibited.

3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished

grade.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042200 - 14



SECTION 042613MASONRY VENEER

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 1

SECTION 042613 - VENEER MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Stone and Cast Stone veneer. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Ties and anchors. 4. Embedded flashing. 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. 044313 - Anchored Stone Masonry Veneer 2. 047200 - Cast Stone Masonry: For cast stone masonry units. 3. Section 051200 - Structural Steel Framing for furnishing lintels and shelf angles. 4. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for finish on exposed steel lintels and shelf

angles for stone masonry. 5. 076000 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: For sheet metal flashing and for furnishing

manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit

required. 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special

applications.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Special brick shapes. 3. Colored-aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar

ingredients to be used on Project. 4. Weep holes. 5. Accessories embedded in masonry. 6. Sample of flashing at head of punched openings. Sample to include end dams

at a side and back and inside end dam corner condition.

D. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 2

1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

E. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units.

a. Include data on material properties with material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances.

c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

F. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.

G. NFPA 285: Provide test reports that substantiate that the work of this Section conforms to NFPA 285 and Section 2603 of the Ohio Building Code.


A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockups for each type of exposed unit masonry construction exterior

corner in sizes approximately 72 inches long leg by 24 inch short leg by 36 inches 48 inches high, with an outside corner returning a minimum of 24 inch by full thickness, including accessories. a. Include an expansion joint in long leg with sealant-filled joint at least 16

inches high in each mockup. b. Include lower corner of window opening at upper corner of exterior wall

mockup. Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16 inches high.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 3

c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing).

d. Include metal studs, sheathing, air barrier, continuous cavity insulation, veneer anchors, flashing, cavity drainage material, and weep holes in mockup.

e. Show all special shape condition(s). Sawn or epoxy bonded units acceptable for this mock-up only.

3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;

relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities

specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.

6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover

securely in place.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 4

2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by

spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with

painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain

from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature

is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Intermediate Scale Multistory Fire Test: Each wall assemble that includes plastic insulation must pass NFPA 285 in conformance with requirements of Chapter 26 of the Ohio Building Code. Where are multiple wall assemblies on the project and it may require products by more than one manufacturer to meet the PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT

2.2 MASONRY VENEER, GENERAL


B. Provide shapes indicated with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 5

C. Special Shapes: Provide special molded shapes, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units. Do not cut brick to make special shapes. Color and texture to match typical unit. Bond to match wall pattern with no head joint at corner. Provide for the following conditions: 1. Corner conditions. 2. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise

expose unfinished surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

3. Rabbeted unit at steel shelf support angles; include handed corner units. 4. Offsets greater than 5/8 inches in single wythe veneer. Provide as follows at top

and bottom of all offsets: a. 100% solid units to assure cores not exposed to view nor collection points

for water. b. Special depth equal to sum of normal bed depth plus offset dimension.

This will maintain depth of bond equal to non-offset brick. c. Slope exposed portion of offset 1/8 inch or approximately 6 degrees from

horizontal. 5. Offsets greater than 5/8 inches in multiple wythe veneer. Provide as follows at

top and bottom of all offsets: a. 100% solid units to assure cores not exposed to view nor collection points

for water. b. Slope exposed portion of offset 1/8 inch or approximately 6 degrees from

horizontal. 6. Others: As shown or required.

2.3 CLAY BRICK VENEER (Base Bid)

A. Unglazed Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. 1. Face Brick - BR-1, Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide Ebonite Smooth as manufactured by Sioux City Brick: a. Sioux City Brick, 310 South Floyd Blvd., Sioux City, Iowa 51101; Ph:

712-202-1100 1) Distributed by Hamilton Parker Company

1865 Lenard Ave. Columbus, Ohio.

2. Grade: SW. 3. Type: FBX. 4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per

ASTM C 67. 5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and

is rated "not effloresced." 6. Surface Coating: Brick with colors or textures produced by application of

coatings shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet.

7. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.

8. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated. 9. Color and Texture: Match Architect's samples.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 6

2.4 CAST STONE BRICK VENEER - ST-02 (Alternate No. G-2)

A. Provide in conformance with Section 047200 - Cast Stone Masonry. 1. Alternate: See Section 012300 - Alternates. 2. Locations: Match locations of base bid brick, provide Anchored Stone Masonry

Veneer where indicated.

2.5 ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER - ST-01 (Alternate No. G-2)

A. Provide in conformance with Section 044313 - Anchored Stone Masonry Veneer. 1. Alternate: See Section 012300 - Alternates. 2. Locations: First three courses of brick above concrete brick ledge in foundation

wall.

2.6 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 and ASTM C270. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Cemex, Fairborn, Ohio; Richcolor. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of

colors.

B. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural

sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent

passing the No. 16 sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary



A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A

641M, Class 1 coating. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A

153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 3. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304. 4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc

coating. 5. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial

Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 6. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 7. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

B. Adjustable Masonry Anchors:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 7

1. Basis-of-Design Product Secured to Cold Formed Metal Framing: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Thermal 2-Seal Wing Nut Anchors by Hohmann and Barnard or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Hohmann and Barnard b. Comparable product approved by Architect prior to Bidding.

2. Basis-of-Design Product at Concrete Substrate: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Thermal Concrete 2-SealTMWing Nut Anchors by Hohmann and Barnard or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Hohmann and Barnard b. Comparable product approved by Architect prior to Bidding.

3. Thermal Concrete 2-Seal™ Wing Nut Anchor 4. Type: Thermally broken screw-attached, masonry-veneer anchor. 5. Unit consists of a wire hooks imbedded on mortar. Hooks supported by wings

and barrel. Barrel connected to substrate; and used to help secure rigid insulation boards to face of substrate.

6. Barrel: Dual diameter stainless steel barrels with factory installed EPDM washers to seal both the insulation face and the air/vapor barrier. Includes a 5/8 inch socket head for driving and a #12 screw to secure dual diameter barrel to sheet metal substrate. a. Length: As recommended by manufacturer for depth of insulation. b. Screw: Carbon Steel: ASTM A510 (Carbon Steel): ASTM C954

(1000-hour polymer coating). 7. Wing: Made from steel encapsulated in highly flame resistant plastic. The

Wings designed to accept the pintel, spin to easily orient pintles/hooks to masonry joints, and provide up to 1/2” of adjustability to account for variations in wall thickness. Plastic wing shaped with 2 eyes for vertical legs of pintle. a. Wings shall create a thermal break between pintels and face of thermal

insulation. b. Wings supported by Barrel.

8. Pintles at Face Brick: a. Basis-of -Design Product: 2X-Hook by Hohmann and Barnard. b. Material: 3/16”Ø round steel wire c. Legs: 3/16”Ø, compressed leg. d. Hook Finish: Hot Dipped Galvanized e. Designed to withstand over 200-lbf, in tension or compression. f. Length: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least

halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.

9. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch; and hold specified cavity insulation.

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a

polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 8

1) DuPont; Thru-Wall Flashing. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Flex-Flash. 3) Hyload, Inc.; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System.

b. Monolithic Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.040 inch thick. c. Self-Adhesive Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch thick,

with a 0.015-inch- thick coating of adhesive. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacture's full line of

colors. d. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes,

and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.

2.9 SEALANTS AT MASONRY VENEER UNIT JOINTS

A. Provide in conformance with Section 079200 - Joint Sealants. 1. Color as approved by Architect to match Mortar.

2.10 WEATHER BARRIER

A. Provide weather barrier within masonry cavity in conformance with Section 072500 - Weather Barriers and provide transition to adjacent weather barrier.

2.11 INSULATION

A. Provide insulation for masonry cavity wall insulation in conformance with Section 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION. 1. Insulation Type: Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation. 2. Install as Cavity-Wall Insulation under Article titled INSTALLATION OF

CONTINUOUS INSULATION.


A. Trim Unit Dowels: 1/2-inch- diameter, round bars, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.

B. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. 1. Thickness and depth to fill the joint as specified. 2. Closed Cell Neoprene: ASTM D1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1, B2F1. 3. Non-Combustible Type: ASTM C612, Class 5, 1800 degrees F.


D. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from

UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 9

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent.

b. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net; or comparable product approved by

Architect prior to bidding.


A. Masonry Veneer: Prosoco; Sure Klean-Vanatrol.

B. Anchored Stone Masonry Veneer: Prosoco; Sure Klean-Vanatrol.

C. Cast Stone Masonry: Prosoco; Sure Klean-Vanatrol.

2.14 MORTAR MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Antifreeze type admixture: Not permitted 4. In order of descending preference, use one of the following for each mortar color

required. a. Specified mortar using colored aggregates. b. Factory Packaged Mixes: Specified mortar with integral color using

synthetic oxides not exceeding 10 percent by weight of Portland cement nor 2 percent for carbon black.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide Type N unless another type is indicated.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by

weight. 3. Mix to match Architect's sample.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 10

4. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Face brick.

E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1. Mix to match Architect's sample. 2. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the

following units: a. Face brick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Weather Barriers within the masonry cavity and transitions to adjacent weather barriers shall be install before other masonry work begins, unless approved by Associate Architect. Review status of installation of weather barrier with weather barrier trade contractor before starting other masonry work.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

E. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 11

3.3 TOLERANCES


inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus

or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than

plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.


than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do

not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.


1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch; do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

2. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.

3. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.



B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 12

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.


E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.


A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed

joints. 2. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting

course on footings.


C. Set stone and trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes. 1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with

clear water. 2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch wide between masonry and structural

steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally.

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 13

1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through insulation, air barrier, and sheathing to wall framing and to concrete backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Insert slip-in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards.

3. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 1 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of insulation.

4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.

5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 256 sq. inches of wall area. Install additional anchors within 8 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter. At outside corners secure anchors for each face of brick to the cold formed framing that forms the corner; and space vertically at 16 inches on center. At inside corners provide anchor within 8 inches of inside corner for each face of brick; and at 16 inches on center vertically.

6. Patching: Where anchors have penetrated weather barrier and not left secured to cold formed metal framing or concrete substrate, remove anchor and patch the work as follows: a. Remove masonry tie and a 6 inch x 6 inch area of insulation centered

around where the masonry tie has been removed, taking care not to cut the air barrier, and then place a 4 inch x 4 inch transition membrane over abandoned opening in weather barrier. Transition membrane shall be a product approve by Weather Barrier manufacturer for patching penetrations in the installed Weather Barrier. Fill the void left by the removal of insulation with spray foam insulation that is acceptable to Weather Barrier manufacturer and insulation manufacturer. 1) Conform to instructions from Weather Barrier manufacturer on

installation of transition membrane.

3.8 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form expansion joints in masonry units as follows: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in

direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of veneer wythe and of width indicated, but not less

than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 14

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.9 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 TRIM UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Set trim units as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or

necessary to secure units in place. 2. Coordinate installation with installation of flashing specified in other Sections.

B. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar.

C. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set units with joints 3/8 to 1/2 inch wide unless otherwise indicated. 2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open

to receive sealant. 7. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant. 8. Reinforce masonry as detailed on structural drawings.


E. Provide sealant joints at copings and other horizontal surfaces, at expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints, and at locations indicated. 1. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Build in compressible foam-plastic joint fillers where indicated. 3. Form joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch. 4. Prime precast surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in

joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. 5. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with

applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.11 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 15

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that

could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge secured with stainless steel termination bar; and top edge of termination bar sealed with silicone sealants. a. Coordinate installation with requirements of section 072500 - Weather

Barriers. 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry

at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

4. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.

D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

F. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents. 1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated.

Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.




site-prepared mortar.

C. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042613 - 16


A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic

scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned

for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Clean masonry with specified masonry cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 042713SITE MASONRY WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 1

SECTION 042713 - SITE MASONRY WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Brick veneer. 2. Cast stone cap veneer. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Ties and anchors. 5. Embedded flashing. 6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Alternates: 012300 -Alternates. 2. 044313 - Anchored Stone Masonry Veneer 3. 047200 - Cast Stone Masonry: For cast stone masonry units.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit

required.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Special brick shapes. 3. Colored-aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar

ingredients to be used on Project. 4. Accessories embedded in masonry.

D. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup

constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

E. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 2

a. Include data on material properties with material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances.

c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

F. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

D. Mockup provided by Section 042613 - Veneer Masonry will establish required appearance for the work of this Section.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 3


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover

securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other

wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by

spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with

painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain

from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature

is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CORE WALLS FOR MASONRY VENEER / CONCRETE BACKUP

A. Concrete Core Walls: Provided by Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. CMU Core Walls: Provide in conformance with Section 042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry.

2.2 MASONRY VENEER, GENERAL




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 4

B. Provide shapes indicated with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units.

C. Special Shapes: Provide special molded shapes, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units. Do not cut brick to make special shapes. Color and texture to match typical unit. Bond to match wall pattern with no head joint at corner. Provide for the following conditions: 1. Corner conditions. 2. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise

expose unfinished surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

3. Others: As shown or required.

2.3 CLAY BRICK VENEER (Base Bid)

A. Unglazed Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. 1. Face Brick - BR-1, Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide Ebonite Smooth as manufactured by Sioux City Brick: a. Sioux City Brick, 310 South Floyd Blvd., Sioux City, Iowa 51101; Ph:

712-202-1100 1) Distributed by Hamilton Parker Company

1865 Lenard Ave. Columbus, Ohio.

2. Grade: SW. 3. Type: FBX. 4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per

ASTM C 67. 5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and

is rated "not effloresced." 6. Surface Coating: Brick with colors or textures produced by application of

coatings shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet [ or shall have a history of successful use in Project's area].

7. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.

8. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated. 9. Color and Texture: Match Architect's samples.

2.4 CAST STONE CAP

A. Provide cast stone cap by Arriscraft International.

B. Cap Shape: WC1 series

C. Exposed Surfaces: Fine-grained texture similar to natural stone, color as selected by Architect, free of cracks, chips or other defects that would affect the strength or serviceability of the unit or become exposed once installed and visible when viewed from a distance of not less than 15 feet under diffused light.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 5

2.5 CAST STONE BRICK VENEER - ST-02 (Alternate No. G-2)

A. Provide in conformance with Section 047200 - Cast Stone Masonry. 1. Alternate: See Section 012300 - Alternates. 2. Locations: Match locations of base bid brick, provide Anchored Stone Masonry

Veneer where indicated...

2.6 ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER - ST-01 (Alternate No. G-2)

A. Provide in conformance with Section 044313 - Anchored Stone Masonry Veneer. 1. Alternate: See Section 012300 - Alternates. 2. Locations: First three courses of brick above concrete brick ledge in foundation

wall.


A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 and ASTM C270. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Cemex, Fairborn, Ohio; Richcolor. 1) Color: Match color selected by Architect for masonry veneer mortar

at building.

B. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural

sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent

passing the No. 16 sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary


C. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.


A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A

641M, Class 1 coating. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A

153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 3. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304. 4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc

coating. 5. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial

Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 6. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 7. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 6

B. Adjustable Masonry Anchors: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

DW-10HS by Hohmann and Barnard or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Hohmann and Barnard b. Comparable product approved by Architect prior to Bidding. c. requirements, provide Thermal Concrete 2-SealTMWing Nut Anchors by

Hohmann and Barnard 2. W-10HS: 12 gage, by Hohmann & Barnard. Hot-dipped zinc-coated

(galvanized) device to accommodate positive and negative wind loading. 3/16 inch diameter wire vee tie with adjustable 5-1/2 inches long by 12 gage strap anchors (3-1/2inch adjustability), punched top and bottom for screw attachment to CMU and concrete. Screw attachment holes in anchor shall be larger than screw size and be formed before galvanizing. a. Wire Vee Tie Length: Length: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties

to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.

2.9 FASTENERS

A. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Concrete and CMU: Aggre-gator structural fasteners by Elco, a proprietary fastener consisting of 300 Series stainless-steel shank with fused and hardened stainless steel head and; tapping threads and gimlet point Fastener coated with Stalgard GB, corrosion resistant finish. Size/lengths suitable for application; minimum #10. .No substitution. 1. Head: Hex washer.


A. Accessories: 1. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a

polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following]

[provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1) DuPont; Thru-Wall Flashing. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Flex-Flash. 3) Hyload, Inc.; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System.

b. Monolithic Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.040 inch thick. c. Self-Adhesive Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch thick,

with a 0.015-inch- thick coating of adhesive. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacture's full line of

colors. d. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes,

and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.

B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 7

2.11 SEALANTS AT MASONRY VENEER UNIT JOINTS

A. Provide in conformance with Section 079200 - Joint Sealants. 1. Color as approved by Architect to match Mortar.


A. Trim Unit Dowels: 1/2-inch- diameter, round bars, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.

B. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. 1. Thickness and depth to fill the joint as specified. 2. Closed Cell Neoprene: ASTM D1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1, B2F1. 3. Non-Combustible Type: ASTM C612, Class 5, 1800 degrees F.


D. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from

UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following]

[provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. 4) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. 5) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. 6) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

b. Colors: 1) Color at Brick Type 1: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's

full range of colors. 2) Color at Brick Type 2: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's

full range of colors.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net; or comparable product approved by

Architect.


A. Masonry Veneer: Prosoco; Sure Klean-Vanatrol.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 8

B. Anchored Stone Masonry Veneer: Prosoco; Sure Klean-Vanatrol.

C. Cast Stone Masonry: Prosoco; Sure Klean-Vanatrol.

2.14 MORTAR MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Antifreeze type admixture: Not permitted 4. In order of descending preference, use one of the following for each mortar color

required. a. Specified mortar using colored aggregates. b. Factory Packaged Mixes: Specified mortar with integral color using

synthetic oxides not exceeding 10 percent by weight of Portland cement nor 2 percent for carbon black.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide Type N unless another type is indicated.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by

weight. 3. Mix to match Architect's sample. 4. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following

units: a. Face brick.

E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1. Mix to match Architect's sample. 2. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the

following units: a. Face brick.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 9

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Weather Barriers within the masonry cavity and transitions to adjacent weather barriers shall be install before other masonry work begins, unless approved by Associate Architect. Review status of installation of weather barrier with weather barrier trade contractor before starting other masonry work.



A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

C. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

D. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES


inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus

or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than

plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.


than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do

not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 10

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.


1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch; do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

2. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.

3. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.



B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.


E. Fill space between core wall and masonry veneer solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.


A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed

joints.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 11

2. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings.


C. Set stone and trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes. 1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with

clear water. 2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.


3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten screw-attached anchors to concrete backup with metal fasteners of type

indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 3/4 inches of air

space between back of masonry veneer and face of insulation. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties

up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16

inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 256 sq. inches of wall area. Install additional anchors within 8 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter.

3.7 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form expansion joints in masonry units as follows: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in

direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of veneer wythe and of width indicated, but not less

than [3/8 inch] [1/2 inch] <Insert minimum width> for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 12

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting

masonry.

3.8 TRIM UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Set trim units as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or

necessary to secure units in place. 2. Coordinate installation with installation of flashing specified in other Sections.

B. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar.

C. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set units with joints 3/8 to 1/2 inch wide unless otherwise indicated. 2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open

to receive sealant. 7. Reinforce masonry as detailed on drawings.


E. Provide sealant joints at copings and other horizontal surfaces, at expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints, and at locations indicated. 1. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Build in compressible foam-plastic joint fillers where indicated. 3. Form joint of width indicated, but not less than [3/8 inch] [1/2 inch] <Insert

dimension>. 4. Prime precast surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in

joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. 5. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with

applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.9 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 13

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge secured with stainless steel termination bar; and top edge of termination bar sealed with silicone sealants.

3. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.




site-prepared mortar.

C. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.


A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 042713 - 14

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic

scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Clean masonry with specified masonry cleaner applied according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 047200CAST STONE MASONRY

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 047200 - 1

SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cast Stone designated as ST-01 on drawings. 2. Cast stone masonry units. 3. Cast stone lintel. 4. Cast stone parapets.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 051200 - Structural Steel Framing for furnishing lintels and shelf angles. 2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for finish on exposed steel lintels and shelf

angles for stone masonry. 3. Section 042613 - Veneer Masonry: Materials specified in this Section provided

by Section 042613.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include unit profiles in section, dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces.

C. Samples: 1. For each color and texture of cast stone required. 2. For colored mortar.

D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

E. Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing according to ASTM C 1364, including test for resistance to freezing and thawing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CAST STONE BRICK MANUFACTURERS (ST-01):

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide UL22 Dusk by Arriscraft International or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Arriscraft International. 2. Comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding. 3. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by random

lengths long.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 047200 - 2


A. Mortar Materials: Conform to requirements specified in Section 042613 - Veneer Masonry.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

2.3 GENERAL

A. Comply with article titled MASONRY VENEER, GENERAL in Section 042613 - Masonry Veneer.

2.4 VENEER ANCHORS

A. Veneer Anchors: Conform to requirements specified in Section 042613 - Masonry Veneer.


A. Embedded Flashing: Conform to requirements specified in Section 042613 - Masonry Veneer.


A. Cementitious Dampproofing for Limestone: Cementitious formulation recommended by ILI and nonstaining to stone, compatible with joint sealants, and noncorrosive to veneer anchors and attachments.

B. Asphalt Dampproofing: Cut-back asphalt complying with ASTM D 4479, Type I or asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1227, Type III or Type IV.

C. Weep/Vent Products: Conform to requirements specified in Section 042613 - Masonry Veneer.

D. Cavity Drainage Material: Conform to requirements specified in Section 042613 - Masonry Veneer.

E. Stain Resistant Silicone Sealant: Provide as specified in Section 079200 - Joint Sealants. 1. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2. Type: Sanded sealant Joint: Use sand aggregate mix that closely matches

color of approved mortar for stone type.

2.7 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Cavity-Wall Insulation: Conform to requirements specified in Section 042613 - Masonry Veneer.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 047200 - 3


A. Masonry Cleaners: Conform to requirements specified in Section 042613 - Masonry Veneer.


A. Test compressive strength and absorption from specimens selected at random from plant production.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weather-resistant sheathing paper before beginning stone installation.

B. Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt dampproofing.

3.2 CAVITY WALL INSULATION

A. Install in conformance with Section 072100 - Thermal Insulation.

3.3 SETTING OF CAST STONE MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Sort cast stone before it is placed in wall to remove cast stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use.

B. Arrange cast stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance.

C. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different cast stone sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 3/8 inch at narrowest points or more than 1/2 inch at widest points.

D. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Sealing joints is specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. At stud-framed walls, extend flashing through cast stone masonry, up sheathing

face at least 12 inches, and over AWB. At top of flashing install continuous AWB transition membrane over flashing shingle style and seal top of flashing pear AWB manufacturer's recommendations.

2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing full length of angles but not less than 6 inches into masonry at each end.

3. At sills, extend flashing not less than 4 inches at ends.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 047200 - 4

4. At ends of head and sill flashing, turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

5. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch beyond masonry face at exterior, and turn flashing down to form a drip.

3.4 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR

A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."

B. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 2. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 3. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 4. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open

to receive sealant. 5. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant.

C. Typical: Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 3/4 inch before setting mortar has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides.

D. Parapet Cap: Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 3/4 inch before filling with stain resistant silicone sealant. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides.

E. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.

F. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

G. At parapets fill raked joint with stain resistant silicone sealant and form a concave profile in sealant to closely match other mortar joints with a sand joint finish as follows: 1. Joint Sanding: Sand sealant joints at masonry joints between masonry units.

a. Immediately after tooling and prior to skinning over of sealant, broadcast sand onto surface of sealant.

b. Retool by rolling a dowel over the joint to achieve sufficient embedment. c. Maintain uniform appearance.

3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 047200 - 5

C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch, except where variation is due to warpage of units within tolerances specified.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.

B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. 1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone to comply with requirements in Section 044313 - Anchored Stone Masonry Veneer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 050513SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR

METAL

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 050513 - 1

SECTION 050513 - SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Heat-cured coating systems on metal substrates.

B. Related Sections: 1. 099713 - Exterior Steel Coatings: For shop and field applied air-cured coatings

over steel substrates.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of coating specified.

B. Samples for Verification: For each color and substrate.

C. Qualification Data: For applicator.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Coating manufacturer's approved applicator equipped and trained for application of coatings, and approved to provide warranty specified.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Deliver, unload, and store coated items so that they remain free of damage and deformation. Package and protect items during shipping and handling. Protect stored items from water. Keep coated items out of contact with materials that may adversely affect the coating.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate substrates and shop-applied coating systems. Where items are indicated to match coatings selected for other items, adjust formulations as required to achieve match.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Coating Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which coatings do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



METAL

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 050513 - 2

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOSETTING ACRYLIC COATINGS (ACR)

A. Fluoropolymer Aluminum Extrusion Coatings, AAMA 2603: Thermosetting acrylic resin. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG Industries, Inc., Duracron. 2. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: H, minimum. 3. Dry Film Thickness, ASTM D 1400: Single color coat, 0.8 mil minimum

thickness. 4. Locations: Interior exposed aluminum extrusions used for glazed aluminum

framing systems. 5. Colors: Match Architect's samples..

2.2 FLUOROPOLYMER COATINGS (FP)

A. Manufacturers, Licensees, Applicators: 1. Resin Manufacturer’s: Provide conforming products from one of the following:

a. Elf Atochem North America, Inc. b. Ausimont USA.

2. Licensees: Licensed by resin manufacturer. Provide conforming products from one of the following: a. Akzo Nobel. b. PPG. c. Valspar.

3. Applicators: Approved by licensee by written documentation and under quality control program directed or approved by licensee.

B. Fluoropolymer Coatings, General: Factory applied, multicoat thermo-cured polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) coating, composed of a primer specially formulated for aluminum and fluorocarbon topcoats as follows: 1. PVDF Resin Content:

a. Doors: 50 percent. b. All Other Components: 70 percent.

C. Fluoropolymer Aluminum Extrusion Coatings, AAMA 2605: Minimum 70 percent PVDF resin, by weight, in color coat. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG Industries, Inc., Duranar Sunstorm. 2. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: F, minimum. 3. Dry Film Thickness, ASTM D 1400: 0.20 mil primer coat plus 1.0 mil color coat,

minimum thicknesses. 4. Locations: Exposed aluminum extrusions, unless indicated otherwise.



METAL

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 050513 - 3

5. Colors: Match Architect's samples..

D. Fluoropolymer Aluminum Sheet Coil Coatings, AAMA 2605: 70 percent PVDF resin, by weight, in color coat. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG Industries, Inc., Duranar Sunstorm. 2. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: HB - H. 3. Salt Spray Resistance, ASTM B 117: 1,000 hours. 4. Humidity Resistance, ASTM D 2247: 1,000 hours. 5. Dry Film Thickness, ASTM D 1400: 0.20 mil primer coat plus 0.70 mil barrier

coat, 0.70 mil color coat, minimum thicknesses. 6. Colors: Match Architect's samples..

E. Touch-Up Material: Air-dried system recommended by coating manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Pretreatment: Mechanically clean and chemically pretreat fabricated items in accordance with coating manufacturer's requirements and AAMA requirements for finish indicated.

3.2 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply primer and finish coats in accordance with coating manufacturer's requirements for finish indicated.

B. Thermally cure coating immediately following application.

C. Process coil coatings in one production run for metallic coatings.

D. Surface Appearance: Cured coating must be visibly free from flowlines, streaks, blisters and other surface imperfections on exposed surfaces. 1. Surfaces shall have no signs of mill finish aluminum or galvanized material

showing. 2. No rack or gripper marks caused by the finishing process on exposed aluminum

surfaces will be permitted.



METAL

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 050513 - 4

3.4 REPAIR AND TOUCH-UP

A. Repair with coating manufacturer's recommended products or system.

END OF SECTION

Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch SECTION 05 12 00 Construction Documents STRUCTURAL STEEL Issue 2 - 27 October 2017 SECTION 05 12 00 – STRUCTURAL STEEL



A. Section Includes: All labor and materials required to furnish and install the structural steel shown on the Drawings and required by these Specifications, including that shown on mechanical or electrical Drawings, or required in their Specification Sections.

B. The Engineer has designed a project which will be safe after full completion. The Engineer


C. Related Sections: Carefully examine all other Sections and all Drawings for related work,

which includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 03 30 00, "Cast-in-Place Concrete" 2. Section 05 20 00, "Steel Joists" 3. Section 05 30 00, "Metal Decking" 4. Section 05 30 00, "Shear Connectors for Composite Beams" 5. Division 9, "Finish Painting"

D. Work Furnished but Installed Under Other Sections: Anchor bolts, loose bearing and base plates, and loose lintels.

E. Work Affected by Others: Framing, loads, openings, and structure in any way related to

plumbing, HVAC, or electrical requirements is shown for bidding purposes only. Responsibility for coordinating the work of this Section with these requirements is solely that of the Contractor. Contractor's review of shop Drawings will be taken to indicate that this coordination has been accomplished.

F. Inspection and testing required by this Section to be at the Owner's expense.


A. Reference Standards: 1. By the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

a. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (March 9, 2005). b. Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts (June 30,

2004). c. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (March 18, 2005).

2. By the American Welding Society (AWS): a. Structural Welding Code – Steel AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2010, Paragraph 6.6.5

specifically excluded.

Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch SECTION 05 12 00 Construction Documents STRUCTURAL STEEL Issue 2 - 27 October 2017


b. Symbols for Welding and Non-Destructive Testing AWS A2.4:2012. B. Fabricator's Qualifications:

1. Minimum five (5) years' continuous experience in the fabrication of steel for projects of similar quality and scope.

2. Certification Standard for Steel Building Structures (STD) in accordance with the American Institute of Steel Construction.

C. Erector's Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years' continuous experience in similar steel

erection. D. Welders' Qualifications: Personnel and procedures are to be qualified in accordance with

AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2010. E. Inspection Agency's Qualifications: Minimum three (3) years' experience in similar steel

inspection, and approval of the Architect.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Certification of Experience: Submit, on request only, written summary of personnel, projects, and equipment which document the experience and qualifications required of the fabricator, inspection agency, erector, and welders.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate all shop and erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, holes, threaded fasteners, and welds. Include layout plan of all items to be embedded into concrete.

2. Indicate material specifications and finishes. 3. Indicate shop and field welds with symbols per AWS A2.4:2012. 4. Notwithstanding any other requirements specified elsewhere in these Specifications,

one (1) set of electronic shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. The electronic set will be returned to the Contractor, who will make and distribute as many copies as needed. Only prints with the approval stamp printed on them shall be permitted on the site.

C. Proof of Compliance for Materials: Submit the following upon request only:

1. Mill reports for properly identified material for: a. Structural steel shapes. b. High strength threaded fasteners.

D. Inspection Reports: Submit reports for the inspection specified. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Delivery: 1. Comply with A6/A6M-13a. Non-compliance will be cause for rejection. 2. Deliver anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or

masonry prior to the start of that work. Provide setting drawings, templates, or instructions required for the installation of such items.



B. Storage: 1. Store steel at site above ground on platforms, skids or other supports. 2. Protect steel from damage.


A. Structural Steel Wide Flange Shapes: 1. Fy=50 ksi Steel: ASTM A572/A572M-13a or ASTM A992/A992M-11.

B. Structural Steel Channels, Angles, Plates, Bars, Etc.: 1. Fy=36 ksi Steel: ASTM A36/A36M-12.

C. Structural Steel Tubing: 1. Fy=35 ksi Round Tubing: ASTM A501-07, or ASTM A53/A53M-12, Grade B. 2. Fy=46 ksi Square and Rectangular Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M-13, Grade B.

D. Anchor Bolts, Standard Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307-12, or ASTM A36/A36M-12. Provide washers and heavy nuts for anchor bolts (both ends).

E. High Strength Threaded Fasteners:

1. Bolts: ASTM A325-10e1, A325M-13, A490-12 or A490M-12. All bolts are to be cold-forged with rolled threads.

2. Nuts: ASTM A194/A194M-13, Type 2 or 2H, or ASTM A563-07a or A563M-07 (2013), Type C, C3, D, DH, D3 or DH3. No other nuts are acceptable; nuts must show manufacturer's name and the 2H symbol.

3. Washers: ASTM F436-11 or F436M-11.

F. Welding Electrodes: 1. For Carbon Steels: Conform to requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2010, using Series

E70 electrodes, appropriate for the materials being welded. G. Shop Paint Primer:

1. For bare steel, use modified alkyd or alkyd-oil primers, equal in quality to 10-99 Tnemec Primer, 10-99W Tnemec Primer, or 4-55 Versare Primer by Tnemec Company, Inc.

2. For galvanized steel to be painted, use epoxy primer, equal in quality to Series 27 F.C. Typoxy by Tnemec Company, Inc.

3. Primer to be compatible with finish paint. H. Grating: All steel, 1 1/2 inches deep, with 3/16 inch bearing bars. May be welded,

pressure-locked or riveted. The following are acceptable: 1. Types GW or GAA by McNichols. 2. Type W/B or B by Borden Metal Products Company 3. Type W by Hansco Industrial IKG. Attachment may be by tack welding or saddle clips.



I. Headed Studs: ASTM A108-13, Grades 1010 through 1020, inclusive, either semi-killed or killed deoxidization.

J. Masonry Anchors: 11 gauge channel slots or 3/16 inch diameter wires, shop welded to

structural steel. K. Deformed Bar Anchors: Flux-filled deformed bar anchors to be welded to structural steel.

Material shall conform to ASTM A496/A496M-07; Acceptable products include Nelson D2L by Nelson Stud Welding.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Conform to applicable provisions of the reference standards listed in Part 1 of this Section, as modified herein.

B. Connection Design:

1. Select connections per AISC standards for forces and moments given on the Drawings. Where none are given, select connection for the full uniform load capacity of the member and for composite beams select connection for 1.5 x full uniform load capacity of the steel member.

2. Connections of beams framing into a girder from one side only, such as at spandrel girders, shall be made with double angle connections. Unless indicated otherwise, all other connections may be double angle connections or single plate shear connections.

3. Connections of horizontal HSS members to columns not exposed to view shall be end plates or double angles (oriented vertically) with bolts selected by the fabricator to develop the full uniform load capacity of the member for the member’s strong axis or forces shown on plans. Connections of horizontal HSS members to HSS columns exposed to view shall be field welded all around with AISC minimum fillet welds (or flare-bevel grove welds at HSS corners) with all welds grounded smooth per AESS requirements.

4. Connection details on the Drawings are to illustrate location, type, and general arrangement only, and to establish minimum requirements.

5. Shop connections may be welded or bolted, unless noted otherwise. 6. Field connections shall be bolted, unless noted otherwise. 7. Standard bolts and nuts are permitted only for connections of secondary members,

unless noted otherwise. High strength threaded fasteners are required for all other bolted connections.

C. Camber: Fabricator shall provide camber as noted on the drawings. D. Sweep: Fabricate exterior spandrel beams with natural sweep toward the interior of the

building. E. Finishing: Ends of members in direct contact bearing, such as columns at their bases and

splices, are to be "finished," as defined in the Code of Standard Practice. F. Bearing and Base Plates: Column base plates are to be shop attached. Beam bearing plates

may be attached or loose.



G. Holes: Drill or punch holes in members as required for passage of conduit and piping, and attachment of joists, nailers, etc. Burning such holes is not permitted. If opening is not shown on structural Drawings, obtain prior approval.

H. Cleaning:

1. Remove oil, dirt, loose mill scale, or other material which would impair welding, performance of slip critical connections, or adherence of concrete.

2. For steel that is to be painted, cleaning techniques are to be as required by the appropriate SSPC paint Specification listed below.

I. Shop Painting:

1. Shop-paint steel exposed to view in the finished structure, except that to be galvanized, with primer as follows: a. Prepare surface by commercial blast cleaning (SSPC - SP6) and apply one (1) coat

of primer. b. Minimum dry film thickness shall be 2.0 mils. The primer shall be applied in a

manner to assure no runs or sags in the coating and an overall uniform application. c. Do not paint surfaces to be encased in concrete, or contact surfaces in slip-critical

connections, or surfaces to be field welded. 2. Steel not exposed to view in the finished structure need not be painted, except columns

and portions of beams other than lintels embedded in or built within exterior walls or soffits, which shall be painted with two (2) coats of primer per the requirements in #1 above, for a total dry film thickness of 4.0 mils.

3. Paint all lintels in interior walls with one (1) coat of primer per the requirements in #1 above.

J. Galvanizing:

1. Galvanizing is to conform to ASTM A123/A123M-13, Grade 100, or ASTM A153/A153M-09, Class C. Follow all recommendations of the American Galvanizers Association.

2. Except for bolts, nuts, washers, and anchors, perform all galvanizing after fabrication. 3. Prior to galvanizing, clean steel of foreign substances per ASTM A385/A385M-11. 4. Do not treat galvanized finish with a stain-inhibiting chromate treatment. 5. After final erection, touch-up all abrasions with a cold galvanizing compound, Z.R.C.

Cold Galvanizing Compound or Z.R.C Galuilite Galvanizing Repair by Z.R.C Worldwide, or equal.

6. Galvanize all lintels in exterior walls, all exterior steel exposed to the elements, and all items indicated on the Drawings as "galvanized."

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Prior to beginning work of this Section, verify that the installed work of other trades is complete and correct to the extent necessary for the proper execution of the work of this Section. This includes locations of anchor bolts, and lines and grades of bearing areas.

B. In the event of discrepancies, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with work

affected by the discrepancies until they have been resolved.



3.02 ERECTION

A. Conform to the applicable provisions of the reference standards listed in Part 1 of this Section, as modified herein.

B. This structure is designed to be self-supporting and stable after the building is fully

completed. It is solely the Contractor's responsibility to determine erection procedures and sequence, and to ensure the stability of the building and its component parts, and the adequacy of temporary or incomplete connections, during erection. This includes the addition of any shoring, sheeting, temporary guys, bracing or tie-downs that might be necessary. Such material is not shown on the Drawings. If applied, they shall be removed as conditions permit, and shall remain the Contractor's property.

C. Safety: It is solely the Contractor's responsibility to follow all applicable safety codes and

regulations governing this work. D. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces in permanent contact, prior to assembly. E. Splices are permitted only where indicated.

F. Field corrections of fabrication errors by gas cutting is not permitted in structural members

without prior approval of the Architect. G. The use of leveling plates or leveling nuts at column bases is prohibited. Grout below

column base plates is to be installed only after the steel is plumbed. H. Welds which are exposed to view in the finished structure are to be ground smooth and

flush with adjacent surfaces. I. Touch-up Painting: After erection, touch-up field connections and abrasions in the shop

coat with same paint used for shop coat. Do not paint welds until they have been cleaned in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2010.

J. Remove galvanizing prior to welding. Touch-up with ZRC cold galvanizing compound by

ZRC Products Company.


A. Inspection agency shall perform the following: 1. Review qualifications of welders, operators, and welding procedures submitted by the

Contractor. 2. Review materials' proofs of compliance. Identify markings of structural steel shapes to

conform to ASTM standards specified. Review structural steel shapes certificates of compliance.

3. Inspect bolted connections, per the requirements of the AISC Specification for Structural Joints. Periodically identify markings of bolts to conform to ASTM standards specified. Periodically inspect bearing type bolts. Continuously inspect slip-critical connections. Review bolt manufacturer’s certificates of compliance.



4. Inspect welded connections per the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2010, Chapter 6. Identify markings of weld filler materials to conform to AWS specifications specified. Review weld filler materials certificates of compliance. Continuously inspect and test complete and partial penetration groove welds by other than visual methods. Continuously inspect and test multipass fillet welds using other than visual methods. Periodically inspect and test single pass fillet welds by visual methods.

5. Inspect installation of stud welding, per the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2010, Articles 7.7 and 7.8.

6. Periodically inspect bracing and stiffening details of the steel frame for compliance with the construction documents.

7. Periodically inspect member locations of the steel frame. 8. Inspect the application of joint details at each connection for compliance with the

construction documents.

B. Inspection agency shall be directly responsible to the Architect. 3.04 ADDITIONAL TESTING

A. The Owner reserves the right to perform non-destructive testing other than visual on any shop or field weld. The Owner shall be responsible for all associated costs including handling, surface preparation and non-destructive testing if welds are found to be acceptable, per AWS D1.1, Section 6, Part C. If the welds are not found to be acceptable the Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of discontinuities and all associated costs including those listed above.

END OF SECTION


Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch SECTION 05 20 00 Construction Documents STEEL JOISTS Issue 2 - 27 October 2017 SECTION 05 20 00 – STEEL JOISTS



A. Section Includes: All labor and materials required to furnish and install the steel joists shown on the Drawings and required by these Specifications. Include all bridging, ceiling extensions, anchors, extended ends, bearing plates and other accessories required for a complete installation.




which includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 05 12 00, "Structural Steel" 2. Section 05 30 00, "Metal Decking"

D. Inspection Agency shall be the same agency retained under Section 05 12 00, "Structural Steel."


A. Reference standards, by the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) and the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series (adopted November 4,

1985; revised to May 18, 2010). 2. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders (adopted April 7, 1931;

revised to May 18, 2010).

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Membership in the Steel Joist Institute. C. Welders' Qualifications: Personnel and procedures are to be qualified per the requirements

of the American Welding Society, as given in AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2010. D. Tolerances:

1. Sweep: Maximum 1/480 of joist length. 2. Spacing: Maximum 1 inch variation, throughout full joist length. 3. Plumbness: 1/4 inch per foot of joist depth.

Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch SECTION 05 20 00 Construction Documents STEEL JOISTS Issue 2 - 27 October 2017


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate mark, number, type and location of all joists. 2. Indicate all bridging, including size, attachment to the joists, and anchorage of the ends

of each line. 3. Indicate connection details and handling instructions. 4. Indicate paint type, and all accessories required for proper installation of joists. 5. Indicate capacity for non-uniform loads, if applicable. 6. Notwithstanding any other requirements specified elsewhere in these Specifications,

one (1) set of electronic shop Drawings shall be submitted for approval. The electronic set will be returned to the Contractor, who will make and distribute as many copies as needed. Only prints with the approval stamp printed on them shall be permitted on the site.

B. Certification: Submit, on request only, the following:

1. Certified copies of mill test reports. 2. Inspection reports for field connections.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver anchor bolts, bearing plates and other items to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry prior to the start of that work. Provide setting drawings, templates, or instructions for the installation of such items.

B. Provide tags on joists for ready identification. C. Store joists off ground, in upright position. Keep free of dirt and other detrimental

substances. D. Store and handle so as to avoid damage to the joists. Repair or replace damaged joists.


A. Joists: per SJI requirements. B. Bearing Plates, Bridging, Accessories: ASTM A36/A36M-12, Fy=36 ksi. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307-12, or ASTM A36/A36M-12. D. Paint: Manufacturer's standard, except that black asphalt is not permitted.

2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Round bar chords are not permitted. B. Extended ends are to be designed for loads indicated on the Drawings. If none are given,

design for the same load (lbs./lin. ft.) as the joist.

Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch SECTION 05 20 00 Construction Documents STEEL JOISTS Issue 2 - 27 October 2017


C. Provide ceiling extensions in areas scheduled to receive contact or suspended ceilings. D. Bridging:

1. For K-Series, use horizontal bridging, except where diagonal bridging is specifically shown on the Drawings or required by SJI. Connections to joists and to each other at points of intersection to be welded for horizontal bridging and bolted for diagonal bridging.

E. Non-Uniform Loads: Note special loading cases identified on the Drawings.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Prior to painting the joists exposed to view, remove all weld slag. Kinks or other irregularities in these joists will not be permitted.

B. Note that pitched top chords or sloping joists may require a pitch or slope exceeding that

listed as "standard" by SJI. The manufacturer is to design for the same capacity (lbs./foot) as the "standard" joist.


A. Prior to beginning work of this Section, verify that the installed work of other trades is complete and correct to the extent necessary for the proper execution of the work of this Section.



3.02 ERECTION

A. General: Per requirements of SJI. B. Concentrated Loads: Provide reinforcing for chords or webs as required at points of

concentrated load. C. Touch-Up Painting: After installation, touch up unpainted areas, connections, and

abrasions in the shop coat, with the same paint used for the shop coat. D. Hung Loads: Do not hang any loads from bridging, under any circumstances.


A. Inspection to include visual examination of joists and their connections.

END OF SECTION


Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch SECTION 05 30 00 Construction Documents METAL DECKING Issue 2 - 27 October 2017 SECTION 05 30 00 – METAL DECKING



A. Section Includes: All labor and materials required to furnish and install metal decking and accessories including closures, edge filler plates, sump pans, ridge and valley plates and end closure angles, where shown on the Drawings and/or required for a complete installation.




which includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 03 30 00, "Cast-In-Place Concrete" 2. Section 05 12 00, "Structural Steel" 3. Division 9, "Finish Painting"

D. Inspection Agency shall be the same agency retained under Section 05 12 00, "Structural Steel."


A. Reference Standards: 1. North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members, 2007 Edition, by the American Iron and Steel Institute. 2. Floor Deck Design Manual First Edition (FDDM), March 2014, by the Steel Deck

Institute. 3. Diaphragm Design Manual, Third Edition (DDM03) September 2004, by the Steel

Deck Institute.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Regularly engaged in the manufacture of similar decking. C. Erector's Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years' experience in installation of similar

decking. D. Welder's Qualifications: Personnel and procedures are to be qualified per the requirements

of the American Welding Society, as given in AWS D1.3/D1.3M-2008.

Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch SECTION 05 30 00 Construction Documents METAL DECKING Issue 2 - 27 October 2017


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Certification of Experience: Submit, on request only, written summary of personnel, projects, and equipment which document the experience and qualifications required of the manufacturer, erector, and welders.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate mark, number, type, finish, and location of all deck units. 2. Indicate method of connection to supporting members. Provide literature from the

fastener and/or deck manufacturers verifying compliance with the minimum required diaphragm shear strengths and stiffnesses.

3. Indicate details and installation instructions for all accessories. 4. Indicate sequence of installation, where critical. 5. Notwithstanding any other requirements specified elsewhere in these Specifications, an

electronic set of shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. The electronic set will be returned to the Contractor, who will make and distribute as many copies as needed. Only prints with the approval stamp printed on them shall be permitted on the site.

C. Manufacturer's Certification:

1. Certify compliance with structural criteria. Published load tables and literature are usually acceptable. Provide design calculations on request only.

2. Certify compliance with finish criteria, with test reports as required. 3. Submit, on request only, mill test reports and certificates of compliance for shear

connectors. 4. Submit mill test reports. Submittals shall include documentation for the recycled

content of the metal deck material and provide a breakdown of post-consumer and post-industrial recycled content.


A. Prevent damage to deck or finish during handling and storage. B. Store on blocking or platforms, off the ground, with one end elevated for drainage. C. Protect from rusting with waterproof covering, or storage under roof.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Typical Roof Deck: 1. Type: 1 1/2 inches deep, 20 gauge minimum, wide rib. 2. Finish: Galvanized. 3. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to:

a. B by New Millennium b. B-Dek by Consolidated Systems, Inc. c. 1.5B by Vulcraft Division of Nucor Corp. d. 1.5B by Cordeck Building Solutions.



B. Acoustical Roof Deck: 1. Type: 1 1/2 inches deep, 20 gauge minimum, wide rib. Holes to be 1/8 inch minimum

on 3/8 inch centers, staggered pattern. 2. Finish: Galvanized (plus prime painted). 3. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to:

a. B-Dek Acoustical by Consolidated Systems, Inc. b. 1.5 BA by Vulcraft Division of Nucor Corp. c. BA by New Millennium d. 1.5 B Acoustical by Cordeck Building Solutions.

C. Composite Floor Deck:

1. Type: 2 inches deep, 20 gauge minimum. 2. Finish: Galvanized. 3. Structural Criteria:

a. Bare deck is to support wet load of concrete (including excess due to deflection of deck and beams) plus 20 psf. Maximum deflection under this load is not to exceed L/180. Increase gage of deck where this would be exceeded.

b. Composite slab is to support the live load shown on the Drawings, plus a superimposed dead load of 15 psf. Maximum deflection under this load is not to exceed L/360. Increase gage of deck where this would be exceeded.

4. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. 2.0 SB by Wheeling Corrugating Company. b. CFD-2 by Consolidated Systems, Inc. c. 2 VLI by Vulcraft. d. 2 inch Composite Floor Deck by Cordeck Building Solutions.

5. Other: Number of headed stud shear connectors shown on the Drawings is based on the capacity available using deck with a 6 inch average rib width 12 inches on center. All manufacturers not meeting this criteria must adjust the number of studs as required to provide an equivalent capacity. All costs for additional studs, and their design, are to be borne by the Contractor.

2.02 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Materials: Steel sheet conforming to ASTM A653/A653M-11. Metal deck material as specified herein or on the drawings shall contain a minimum of 70 % post-consumer recycled content.

B. Finishes:

1. Galvanized: Conform to ASTM A653/A653M-11, G60. 2. Galvanized plus Prime Painted: Clean units of film after galvanization process and

apply coat of prime paint compatible with finish paint specified in Division 9.

C. Accessories: Same material and finish as deck units, except that interior closures may be of compressible material.

D. Hangers: Provide a system of hangers with composite floor deck, as follows: 1. Hangers may consist of sidelap lip hangers, integral tabs, dovetail slots and hangers,

slots and pigtail wires, or other devices. 2. Allowable working load to be 60 lbs. per hanger, minimum. 3. Maximum spacing is to be 24 inches in either direction.



E. Sound Insulation: Glass fiber type. Required in areas with acoustical roof deck. F. Field Touch-Up Paint:

1. For painted deck, use air-drying paint similar to shop coat. 2. For galvanized deck, use zinc chromate paint.

G. Shear Connectors: Headed studs conforming to ASTM A108-13, Grades 1010 through

1020, inclusive, either semi-killed or killed deoxidation. H. Welding Electrodes: Conform to requirements of AWS D1.3/D1.3M-2008 using Series

E60 electrodes, appropriate for the materials being welded, with welding washers as required.

I. Driven Fasteners: Manufactured from AISI 1061, 1062 or 1065 steel austempered to a

minimum core hardness of 50-56 RC, and zinc-plated in accordance with ASTM B633-11 or ASTM B695-04(2009) to a minimum thickness of 0.0002 inches. Acceptable manufacturers include, but are not limited to: 1. Hilti Fastening Systems 2. ITW Buildex 3. Pneutek, Inc.

J. Self-drilling Fasteners: Heat-treated and zinc-plated with fluted drill point. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: 1. Traxx screws by ITW Buildex. 2. Kwik-Pro by Hilti Fastening Systems.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Units are to be continuous over at least three (3) spans, where possible. Where units are single or double span, use heavier gage if required for stress or deflection control. End laps (2 inches minimum) are to occur over supports. (End laps not required for composite floor deck.)

B. Units are to have nested side laps. C. Decking shall be finished such that field paint can be applied without further preparation.


A. Prior to beginning work of this Section, verify that the installed work of other trades is complete and correct to the extent necessary for the proper execution of the work of this Section.





3.02 ERECTION

A. Install decking in accordance with approved placing Drawings. B. Tolerance: Align adjacent units within 1/4 inch in 40 feet. C. Connection to Supporting Members: Connect to supports from top side only. Welds which

burn holes in decking or supporting members will be rejected. Erector shall select the method of connecting the deck to the supports, including the connector type and spacing, and also the method of sidelap fastening, including the connector type and spacing, to provide the following minimum diaphragm shear strengths and stiffnesses, in accordance with the SDI Diaphragm Design Manual. However, nested acoustical roof deck shall be welded.

Deck Type Shear Strength (plf) Stiffness (k/in) 1 1/2 inch roof deck 250 18

Composite floor deck (including concrete fill) 1600 2400

Submit for approval the proposed method of connecting the deck and information verifying compliance with the above requirements. Additional minimum requirements for connections are as follows: 1. Roof Deck: Attach to resist a gross uplift of 45 lbs. per square foot in eave overhang

areas, 30 lbs. per square foot in all other areas. Connections shall occur at every other rib for 1 1/2 inch roof deck (12 inch spacing), except all side laps shall be connected to supports.

2. Composite Floor Deck: Connections may include thru-welded shear connectors. Connections shall occur at all ribs (12 inch spacing).

3. Miscellaneous: Connection spacing shall be the same for all supports (both interior and end lap supports).

D. Sidelap Fastening: Spacing shall not exceed 3 feet. E. Closures: Install in deck flutes over supports or other construction at building perimeter

and at perimeters of interior rooms. Set in a true even line, flush with construction below, eliminating any shelf or pocket. Closures are to be accurately shaped and installed, to provide a tight fit.

F. Openings: Field cut small openings, bevels, miters, etc., as required. Provide reinforcing

for openings which interrupt ribs. G. Hanging Loads: Do not hang items from the underside of metal roof decks, unless

specifically approved by the Architect. H. Construction Loads: Do not use deck as storage or working platform until it has been

permanently attached to supports. Assure that construction loads do not exceed the carrying capacity of the deck.



I. Repair and Touch-Up: 1. Where deck will be exposed to view, remove and replace any units with damage or

defects which cannot be concealed by painting. 2. Where deck will not be exposed to view, repair any cuts and holes with plate of same

gage as deck. 3. Touch up all damaged areas of finish, on both top and bottom sides of deck.


A. Inspection shall include visual examination of deck and its attachment to the supporting structure, including quantity of connectors and/or fusion welds and the quality of the connections to the supporting structure.

B. Inspect installation of welded stud shear connectors for composite beams per the

requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2010, Articles 7.7 and 7.8.

END OF SECTION

Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch SECTION 05 40 00 Construction Documents COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Issue 2 - 27 October 2017 SECTION 05 40 00 – COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING



A. Section Includes: All labor and materials required to furnish and install light gauge steel studs and tracks (in all exterior walls and soffits), and bridging and related accessories, where shown on the Drawings and/or required for a complete installation.

B. Related Sections: Carefully examine all other Sections and all Drawings for related work,

which includes but is not limited to: 1. Division 04, Masonry Anchors 2. Division 07, Insulating Sheathing 3. Division 09, Gypsum Drywall 4. Division 09, Other Light Gage Framing


A. Reference Standards: 1. North American specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members, 2007 Edition, by the American Iron and Steel Institute. 2. Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel (AWS D1.3/D1.3M-2008) by the American

Welding Society.

B. Welders' Qualifications: Personnel and procedures are to be qualified, per the requirements of the American Welding Society, for the type of welding being performed.


A. Manufacturer to confirm size and gage of materials suitable for application shown and loaded as follows: 1. Dead Load, vertical: Attached materials. 2. Lateral Load, horizontal load perpendicular to wall in either direction.

a. Interior Partitions: 5 psf. b. Exterior Walls: Per Component and Cladding Wind Load Schedule on S001.

3. Deflection: a. At exterior brick veneer applications: Not to exceed L/600. b. At exterior applications with non-rigid facing: Not to exceed L/360.

4. All exterior studs which act as backup for brick veneer or metal panel shall be 16 gauge (minimum).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show detail, length and location of all light gage materials, including any subassemblies to be shop fabricated. Show all welds whether shop or field and indicate all connections to steel frame, concrete and masonry portions of the work.

Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch SECTION 05 40 00 Construction Documents COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Issue 2 - 27 October 2017


1. Show schematic framing elevations indicating stud spacing, stud gage, double or multiple studs, slip joints, bracing and bridging.

2. Indicate number and size of fasteners and/or size and length of weld. 3. Include color code identification for gage of members. 4. For prefabricated framing (if any), show individual panel drawings for each condition

including configuration, dimensions, materials, attachments and panel locations. 5. Notwithstanding any other requirements specified elsewhere in these Specifications, a

set of electronic shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. The electronic set will be returned to the Contractor, who will make and distribute as many copies as needed. Only prints with the approval stamp printed on them shall be permitted on the site.

B. Manufacturer's Certification:

1. Certify compliance with structural criteria. Published load tables and literature are usually acceptable. Provide design calculations on request only.

C. Mill Certificates: Submittals shall include documentation for the recycled content of the

cold formed metal framing material and provide a breakdown of post-consumer and post-industrial recycled content.


A. Prevent damage to material or finish during handling and storage. B. Store on blocking or platforms, off the ground. C. Protect from rusting with waterproof covering, or storage under roof.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide materials manufactured by one of the following: 1. Clark/Dietrich Building Systems 2. Marino-Ware 3. Steel Network.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cold formed metal framing material as specified herein or on the drawings shall contain a minimum of 30 % post-consumer recycled content.

B. General:

1. Provide the light gage steel materials conforming with requirements of AISI Specifications. a. Exterior Framing: Galvanized finish. b. Interior Framing: Painted or galvanized finish.

2. Galvanized Members: G60 galvanized coating on steel members conforming to ASTM A653/A653M-11 in the following grades: a. 16 gauge and heavier: Grade 50 (Class 1 or 2), minimum Fy = 50,000 psi.



b. 18 gauge and lighter: Grade 33, minimum Fy = 33,000 psi. 3. Painted members: Prime painted with rust-inhibitive paint. Manufacturer's standard

coating on steel members conforming to the following: a. 16 gauge and heavier: ASTM A1011/A1011M-12, Grade 50, minimum Fy =

50,000 psi. b. 18 gauge and lighter: ASTM A1008/A1008M-12, Grade C, Type 1 or 2, minimum

Fy = 33,000 psi.

C. Studs: Provide punched members in types, depths and gages as shown or scheduled; "C" studs, minimum 1 5/8 inch flange with return typical unless otherwise specified.

1. Exterior "C" studs for exterior walls and parapets: Members to meet or exceed the

physical properties scheduled below: 6" depth typical.

Depth

Gage

Ix (Net Moment of Inertia) Mr (Allowable Resisting

Moment)

6 inch 16 2.80 in.4 29.7 in -kips

2. Exterior Soffit Framing: "C" studs. Members to meet or exceed the physical

properties scheduled below:

Depth

Gage

Ix (Net Moment of Inertia) Mr (Allowable Resisting

Moment)

6 inch 18 2.32 in.4 16.7 in –kips

3-5/8 inch 18 0.71 in.4 8.5 in –kips

D. Tracks: Unpunched steel to match stud quality and finish.

1. Deep leg, 1 5/16 inch minimum, 16 gauge. 2. "Deflection Track" Special deep leg, 2 inch minimum, 12 gauge; use where studs

"float" in track to accommodate vertical deflection of structure. 3. No attachments shall be made to "Slip Tracks" which would impair their ability to

permit unrestrained vertical movement of the building structure.

E. Miscellaneous 1. Stud Wall Bridging: Cold rolled channel, 1 5/16 inch minimum x 16 gauge. 2. Provide two full height studs (one each side) at masonry control joints. Coordinate

locations with architectural drawings. 3. Clip Angles: 14 gauge minimum galvanized LB by the Steel Network, Frame Rite UA

by Marino Ware or Easy Clip E-Series by Clark Dietrich. 4. Side Vertical Slide Clips: 14 gauge galvanized steel SLB by the Steel Network, Frame

Rite WSU-1000 by Marino Ware or Fast Clip by Clark Dietrich Industries or similar device to secure studs to structure and permit vertical movement of the structure without loading the stud.

5. Top Vertical Slide Clips: 14 gauge galvanized steel SL by Steel Network, Frame Rite DEFLEX CLIP by Marino Ware, Fast Top Clip by Clark Dietrich Industries.

6. Touch-up paint: Krylon Contractor Galvanizing Primer Aerosol by Sherwin Williams or approved equal.



7. Screw Fasteners: Size suitable for the conditions; subject to approval by Structural Engineer. Cadmium plated meeting requirements of Federal Specification QQ-P 416A, Type II, Class #1; 0.0005 inch thick. Minimum size of screw fasteners shall be #10-16.

F. Identification: All members to receive painted identification stripe (nominal 1 inch wide)

at approximately 1/3 points on both flanges. Provide separate and distinct color for each gauge member delivered to job. All identification marking to be done at the mill.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate all components of framing systems in strict accordance with standard Specifications; cut to accurate sizes and lengths as required for satisfactory erection as shown on Drawings.

B. Studs:

1. Provide full bearing against inside track webs, before attaching stud to track. 2. Do not splice studs. 3. Bridging shall be solidly connected to each stud in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.

C. Prefabricated Panels (may be used at the Contractor's option): 1. Attach components so as to prevent racking. 2. Insure that panels are square. 3. Cut framing members squarely for attachment of perpendicular members, or as

required for an angular fit against abutting members. 4. Hold members positively in place until properly fastened. 5. In double jambs and double headers which would be inaccessible after panel assembly,

provide and install insulation equivalent to that specified elsewhere for the same assembly.

D. Welding equipment and welder's qualifications to meet the requirements of AWS

D1.3/D1.3M-2008. Qualify all welders. Evidence of questionable weld quality will be cause to reject all welding and require certification of all welds by an independent testing laboratory. Cost of testing to be borne by Contractor.

2.04 SPECIAL FEATURES

A. Cripple Studs: Provide studs between bottom track and window sills, between lintels or headers and top track, and elsewhere as required for support of attached materials and equipment.

B. Blocking: Provide blocking in framing for all wall-mounted items, including door stops,

equipment or casework.


A. Prior to beginning work of this Section, verify that the installed work of other trades is complete and correct to the extent necessary for the proper execution of this Section.





3.02 ERECTION

A. Walls: 1. Erect framing and panels level, plumb, and square. 2. Handle members and panels so as to avoid distortion. 3. Securely anchor track to the supporting structure. Attach to concrete or masonry with

1/2 inch diameter anchor bolts at 4 feet c/c or approved equal. 4. At track butt joints, securely anchor both pieces to a common supporting element, or

butt weld or splice track pieces together. 5. Plumb and align studs and securely attach to the flange or webs of both upper and

lower tracks. 6. Install cripple studs below window sills, above door and window heads, at freestanding

stair rails, and elsewhere as required. 7. Install bridging as required to prevent stud rotation. Use the manufacturer's

recommendations for spacing, except that the maximum spacing is to be 3 feet 4 inches for bearing walls and 5 feet for all other walls, in the absence of supporting data. Provide an additional row of bridging within 12 inches of all "deflection track" applications.

8. Provide headers and supporting studs at all wall openings. 9. Provide temporary bracing until erection is completed. 10. Stud spacing shall be 16 inch c/c unless otherwise shown on structural Drawings. 11. Heads of openings shall consist of stud or joist sections sufficient to carry the weight of

the wall above. Jamb sections shall consist of heavier gage studs, multiple studs, or both as required to resist the wind load form the adjacent door or window. Multiple jamb studs shall be connected together at 12" o.c.

B. Deflection: Install "Vertical Slide Clips" or "Deflection Tracks" at all attachments to

structure subject to live load deflection in accordance with the manufacturer's standard details. Wall panels in "Deflection Track" condition shall stop 3/4 inch below the underside of the structure above to allow for vertical movement and not be rigidly attached to "Deflection Track." Wall panels must engage "Deflection Track" a minimum of 1 inch. Structures subject to live load deflection include supported roof and floor systems.

C. All field abrasions and welds to be coated/touched up with cold applied zinc primer

specified in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Connections:

1. All metal-to-metal connections shall be screwed or welded. 2. Welded connections to be as specified under "Fabrication." Attach metal studs to steel

frame of building with 2 inches of 1/8 inch fillet weld at each stud or equivalent capacity.

3. Track: Attach to concrete or masonry with 1/2 inch diameter anchor bolts at 4 feet c/c or approved equal.

4. Detail all connections on shop drawings.



E. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from

plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 055000METAL FABRICATIONS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Miscellaneous metal items indicated and specified, or otherwise necessary for completion of the work. Work of this section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Ferrous and non-ferrous metalwork detailed on the drawings as a component

part of other assemblies, but not specified elsewhere. 2. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports including:

a. Overhead doors. b. Mechanical and electrical equipment. c. Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other

Sections. 3. Steel lintel. 4. Shelf angles. 5. Metal ladders. 6. Metal ladders. 7. Ships Ladder. 8. Metal bollards. 9. Loose bearing and leveling plates.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts

indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.

C. Related Sections: 1. 051200 - Structural Steel Framing: Divider beams. 2. 055213 - Pipe and Tube Railings. 3. 099100 - Painting: For primers and topcoats. 4. 099713 - Exterior Steel Coatings: Shop priming of galvanized steel.


A. Delegated Design: Design metal fabrications, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1. Structural Performance of Ladders: Ladders shall withstand the effects of

gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. a. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. b. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. c. Uniform equipment loads, and concentrated loads need not be assumed to

act concurrently.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055000 - 2

d. Shops Ladder Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above.

e. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less.

f. Structural Performance of Railings: Conform to requirements of Section 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings.

g. Meet requirements of OSHA 1910.23. 2. Structural Performance: Design metal fabrications to withstand the effects of

gravity loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 3. Structural Performance of Ship Ladders: ladders shall withstand the effects of

loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. 4. Structural Performance of Slotted Channel Framing: Slotted Channel Framing

shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses applied by equipment indicated to support.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their

connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055000 - 3

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

D. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.

E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm). 2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B;

0.0966-inch (2.5-mm) minimum thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel.

H. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M.

2.3 NONFERROUS METALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

B. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

C. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

D. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055000 - 4

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply

with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

D. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 Section "Painting" and Division 09 Section "Exterior Steel Coatings."

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

F. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055000 - 5

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and

blended.

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

C. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 SHELF ANGLES

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Hole diameter or slot width not to exceed bolt diameter plus 1/16 inch.

B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055000 - 6

C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls. Galvanize and shop paint shelf angles exposed to view. 1. Colors: As selected by Architect to match color of masonry supported by shelf

angles.

D. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATED ITEMS

A. Elevator Sump Pit Cover: Provide custom steel plate cover, minimum 1/4 inch thick; cut into two pieces with holes for pipe which allow removal. Provide suitable steel frame or other device to maintain placement of cover over pit. Provide with galvanized finish.

2.10 METAL LADDERS

A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails 16 inches (406 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated.

a. Rail separation above roof parapet: Rails extending above roof for entry onto roof or platform shall be to 23 to 26 inches apart.

2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch (12.7-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges.

3. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip abrasive surfaces on top of each rung. 6. Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fasteners. 7. Locations: Ladders at interior of building.

C. Aluminum Ladders: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: a. ACL Industries, Inc. b. Alco-Lite Industrial Products. c. Halliday Products. d. O'Keeffe's Inc. e. Precision Ladders, LLC. f. Royalite Manufacturing, Inc. g. Thompson Fabricating, LLC.

2. Space siderails 16 inches (406 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated. Rails extending above roof for entry onto roof or platform shall be to 23 to 26 inches apart.

3. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick.

4. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep and not less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with ribbed tread surfaces.

5. Locations: Ladders at exterior of building.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055000 - 7

2.11 METAL SHIPS' LADDERS

A. Provide metal ships' ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open-type construction with channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for installation. 1. Fabricate ships' ladders, including railings from steel. 2. Fabricate treads from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating. Limit

openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) in least dimension. 3. Comply with applicable railing requirements in Division 05 Section "Pipe and

Tube Railings." 4. Roof Tube Supports: Steel tubes with sold steel plate at top of tube. Weld

plate to top of tubes so connection is water tight. Tubes shall extend a minimum of 8-1/2 inches above roof membrane. Support ships ladder on top of tubes or support from roof tube supports in a manner that allows roof membrane to extend up tube 8 inches without interference with ships ladder. Offset roof supports to the outside of the stringers if needed to meet height requirement of roof tube support. Connect supports directly to structural steel under roof deck. a. Quantity: Provide two roof supports per ladder.

5. Steel Finish: Hot dipped galvanized.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.

2.13 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate. 2. Diameter: 6-inches unless otherwise shown. 3. Height: 42-inches above finished grade for exterior and 42 inches above

finished floor at interior conditions; unless otherwise shown.

B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve.

C. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) less than ID of bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 3/4 inch (19 mm) steel machine bolt.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055000 - 8

D. Finish: Hot dip galvanized after fabrication, and factory prime paint bollard in conformance with Section 099713. 1. Finish: Powder coated.

2.14 ELEVATOR PIT

A. Elevator Pit Cover: Provide custom steel plate cover, minimum ¼ thick; cut into two pieces with holes for pipe which allow removal. Provide suitable steel frame or other device to maintain placement of cover over pit. Provide with hot-dipped galvanized finish.

2.15 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

2.16 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Galvanize loose steel lintels. 1. Paint steel lintels.

a. Color: As selected by Architect to match color of masonry supported by lintel.

C. FINISHES, GENERAL

D. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

E. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.17 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize steel items exposed to weather or moisture, items located in exterior walls, items supporting exterior masonry including backup, or as indicated on drawings. Hot-dip galvanize items to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items after Galvanizing: 1. Preparation : SSPC SP1 Solvent Cleaning followed by Abrasive Blast Cleaning

per SSPC-SP16 Surface Preparation of Galvanize by abrasive blast cleaning to create a uniform 1.5 mil angular profile. a. Following cleaning, surfaces should be blown down with clean, compressed

air. b. Steel shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 5 degrees above dew

point. c. Prime paint steel within 60 minutes of cleaning steel.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055000 - 9

1) Primer: As specified in Section 099713 - Exterior Steel Coatings. 2. Locations:

a. Lintels. b. Shelf Angles. c. Bollards. d. Items exposed to public view. e. Others: As indicated.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces using methods recommended in writing by coating manufacturer, but not less than the following: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,

"Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Division 09 Section "Exterior

Steel Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055000 - 10

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Verification of Site Conditions: Examine site and verify that conditions are suitable to receive Work and that no defects or errors are present which would cause defective installation of products or cause latent defects in workmanship and function.

3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing.

B. Bollards in Soil: Install bollards in drilled shaft not less than 12 inches larger than diameter of bollard x depth specified or shown. Center in shaft, plumb, and fill shaft with concrete; slope top surface to drain. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Unless top has welded cap, fill bollard solid with concrete and shape top to a dome shape.

C. Bollards at Concrete Pavement: Anchor bollards in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Foundation for Pipe sleeve to be not less than 12 inches larger than diameter of pipe sleeve x depth specified or shown (but not less than 36 inches deep). Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. After bollards have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between bollard and sleeve solid with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions.

D. Unless top has welded cap, fill bollard solid with concrete and shape top to a dome shape.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055000 - 11

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 Section "Painting" and Division 09 Section "Exterior Steel Coatings."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055000 - 12

PAGE LEFT INTETIONALLY BLANK


SECTION 055100METAL STAIRS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055100 - 1

SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 2. Industrial-type stairs with steel grating treads. 3. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. 4. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 5. Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.

B. Related Sections: 1. 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: For concrete fill for stair treads and platforms. 2. 033503 - Concrete Slab Finishing: Sealed Concrete. 3. 055213 - Pipe and Tube Railings: For pipe and tube railings not attached to

metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.


A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Fire Sprinkler System Loads: In accordance with NFPA 13. 4. Uniform equipment loads, and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act

concurrently. 5. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in

addition to loads specified above. 6. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch,

whichever is less.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055100 - 2

C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For metal stairs.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

E. Welding certificates.


A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class. 2. Industrial-Type Stairs: Industrial class.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry and installed on gypsum partition assemblies. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055100 - 3

C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

F. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510.

G. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.

H. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads.

I. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating, structural steel, Grade 33, unless another grade is required by design loads.

J. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.

K. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055100 - 4

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs

indicated to be galvanized.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply

with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy

Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.


A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 Section "Painting."

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Nonslip-Aggregate Concrete Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made from fused, aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials.

H. Special Non-Slip Finish: 1. Provide for exterior bar grating stairs and landings. 2. "Slip-Not" by W. S. Molnar Co., Detroit, MI (800-754-7668). . A proprietary

fired-on process of steel particles bonded to the substrate. For exterior exposure, provide galvanized finish as referenced above.


A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055100 - 5

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces

slope to drain.

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work.

E. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's

"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.5 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers, unless indicated otherwise; and

miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements.

3. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board or shaft-wall assemblies, provide

hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. 5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts

designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.

B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.067 inch. 1. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled

with reinforced concrete during fabrication. 2. Locations:

a. Typical interior stair.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055100 - 6

2.6 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Rails: 1-5/8-inch- diameter. 2. Posts: 1-1/2-inch- square 3. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- round pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear.

B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for

Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed.

C. Form changes in direction of railings by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding.

G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. 1. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings,

brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction.

2. Spacing: Do not exceed 7 feet center to center.

H. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

I. Exit Discharge Gates: 1. Manufacturer's standard non-latching gate assembly to prevent persons from

bypassing exit where stair discharges from both below and above exit level. 2. Include the following:

a. Gate: Rail frame and infill to match typical railing.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055100 - 7

2.7 FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Provide hot-dipped galvanizing for metal items exposed to weather or moisture, items located in exterior walls, and where noted. Hot-dip galvanize items to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Locations: Stairs at exterior and stairs in mechanical rooms.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: 1. Steel Substrates for Shop Priming (Without-Hot Dipped Galvanized Finish):

Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: a. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

1) After blast cleaning remove blast residue from steel surfaces. 2) Keep steel dry and dust free, and maintained at a temperature of at

least 5 degrees above dew point until prime painted is complete. 3) Prime steel with in time recommended by manufacturer after surface

preparation; or within 24 hours after blast cleaning, whichever is less. b. Locations:

1) Typical at interior spaces. 2) Where indicated on drawings.

2. Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel Substrate with Shop Primer: a. Locations: Where paint finish is indicated for steel required to have a hot

dipped galvanized steel coating. b. General:

1) Primer: Provide primer in conformance with Section 099713 - Exterior Steel Coatings.

2) Comply with requirements of ASTM D 6386. 3) Zinc high spots, such as a metal drip line, should be removed by

cleaning with hand or power tools as described in SSPC Surface Preparation Specification 2 or 3.

4) The zinc should be removed until it is level with the surrounding area, taking care that the base coating is not removed by the cleaning methods.

5) After cleaning, the surface shall be inspected for conformance to the required zinc thickness in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M or A 153/A 153M utilizing a magnetic-field-type thickness instrument in accordance with ASTM E 376. Any item falling below the required zinc thickness, before or after removal of any high spots, shall be repaired in accordance with ASTM A 780; except “Paints Containing Zinc Dust” not acceptable. Minimum thickness requirements for the repair are those described in ASTM A 123 Section 6.2 “Finish”.

c. Preparation: SSPC SP1 Solvent Cleaning followed by Abrasive Blast Cleaning per SSPC-SP16 Surface Preparation of Galvanize by abrasive blast cleaning to create a uniform 1.5 mil angular profile. 1) After blast cleaning remove blast residue from steel surfaces. 2) Steel shall be kept dry and maintained at a temperature of at least 5

degrees above dew point.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055100 - 8

3) Prime steel with in time recommended by manufacturer after surface preparation; or within 8 hours of blast cleaning steel, whichever is less.

d. Locations: 1) Exterior locations indicated to be painted. 2) Others: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

D. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Curing Method: Conform to requirements specified in Section 033000 -

Cast-In-Place Concrete.

F. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements. 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and

hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For steel-framed partitions use one of the following:

a. Self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements.

b. Toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055100 - 9


A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055100 - 10



SECTION 055213PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055213 - 1

SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Steel tube railings. 2. Aluminum tube railings. 3. Stainless-steel tube railings.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 055112 "Metal Pan Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal

pan stairs. 2. Section 057300 - Decorative Metal Railings for stainless steel handrails, glass

mounted and wall mounted handrails, at glass supported handrail locations.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.


C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: a. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. b. Braun, J. G., Company. c. Kee Industrial Products, Inc. d. Moultrie Manufacturing Company. e. Sterling Dula Architectural Products, Inc; Div. of Kane Manufacturing.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055213 - 2

f. Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. g. Thompson Fabricating, LLC. h. Tri Tech, Inc. i. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. j. Tuttle Railing Systems. k. Wagner, R & B, Inc. l. Others: As approved by Architect prior to bidding.

B. Stainless-Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

the following: a. C.R. Laurence Co. b. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. c. Stainless Fabricators, Inc. d. Sterling Dula Architectural Products, Inc.; Div. of Kane Manufacturing. e. Tri Tech, Inc. f. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. g. Wagner, R & B, Inc. h. Others: As approved by Architect prior to bidding.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1

sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage and that

provides 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

2.4 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055213 - 3

B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Locations: 1. Where indicated.

F. Perforated Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, or hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel Type B, 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) t minimum thickness. 1. Type of Perforation Pattern and Openness: As indicated on drawings.

2.5 ALUMINUM

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.

B. Extruded Bars and Tubing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5/T52.

C. Extruded Structural Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.

D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210 (ASTM B 210M), Alloy 6063-T832.

E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

F. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 6061-T6.

G. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.

H. Handrail Bracket: 1. Basis-of-design Product: Model 477 by Julius Blum.

2.6 STAINLESS STEEL

A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

B. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following: 1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B

633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055213 - 4

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.

3. Aluminum Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. a. Exposed fasteners: Paint to match finish of aluminum material being

secured.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply

with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).



B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055213 - 5

D. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

E. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

F. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

G. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

H. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

I. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

J. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide

crush-resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication.

B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: In conformance with Section 099713 - Exterior Steel Coatings.

D. Finish: Finish in conformance with Section 099713 - Exterior Steel Coatings. 1. Color: Match Architect's sample.

2.11 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055213 - 6

1. Location: Interior.

C. Black Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A44.

2.12 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or

finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from

parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m).

B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that

are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.

3.2 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members.

3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and

hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055213 - 7

4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.

5. 6.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 055213 - 8



SECTION 057300DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 057300 - 1

SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Stainless-steel decorative railings


A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1

sq. ft. (0.093 sq.m). b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.



D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 057300 - 2

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

G. Preconstruction test reports.


A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail,

infill area, and anchorage system components.

1.5 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation with adjacent finishes to prevent damage to railing components.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not suit structural performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Decorative Railings:

a. Architectural Metal Works. b. Architectural Railings & Grilles, Inc. c. Atlantis Rail Systems; Division of Suncor Stainless. d. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. e. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh. f. CraneVeyor Corp. g. Livers Bronze Co. h. Newman Brothers, Inc. i. P & P Artec. j. Pisor Industries, Inc. k. Platers Polishing Company; a division of Rippel Architectural Metals. l. Tri Tech, Inc.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 057300 - 3

m. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. n. Wylie Systems.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STAINLESS STEEL


B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304.

C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.

D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

E. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. a. 4mm 7 by7 rope, type 316 acceptable. b. Metal: Type 316.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners, unless

otherwise indicated.

B. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.



B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 057300 - 4

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Preassemble metal fabrications in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

C. Support joints of thin metal with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment.

D. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. 1. All edges to be worked smooth and corners rounded, free of burrs and sharp

edges. 2. Mill exposed joints to hairline fit; cope or miter corner joints. Where exposed to

weather, form to exclude water.

E. Welded Connections: All construction welded per AWS D1. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's

"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.

2. Locations: Typical.

F. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. 1. Locations: Where indicated

G. Form changes in direction by bending.

H. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

I. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

J. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

K. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.





NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 057300 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1m). 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from

parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3m).

B. Anchor posts to metal surfaces and concrete as indicated using fittings designed and engineered for this purpose.

C. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with brackets on underside of rails connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.


A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.

B. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed railing assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and conditions in the completed Work. Railings will be tested according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for compliance with performance requirements.

C. Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Architect and will comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 057300 - 6



SECTION 057313GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 057313 - 1

SECTION 057313 - GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Glass- supported railings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

G. Preconstruction test reports.

H. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Taper-Loc®Dry Glaze Glass Railing System by C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 2. Comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except

with Architect's approval.



RAILINGS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 057313 - 2


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

B. System designed for use at interior locations and allow replacement of broken glazing from one side of railing without any type of scaffolding or power lifts.

C. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

3. Safety Factor for Glazing: 4.

D. System shall allow installation of glazing from occupied side of glazed railing system, without access to other side.

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 ALUMINUM

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below.

B. Extruded Bars and Shapes, Including Extruded Tubing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.

C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.

D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210, Alloy 6063-T832.

E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 5005-H32.

F. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, Alloy 6061-T6.

G. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.

H. Mounting Materials for Standard Continuous Base Railing:



RAILINGS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 057313 - 3

1. Base for Field Installed Glass: a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide Taper-Loc® "XA" System (a Dry Glaze Glass Railing) by C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. (CRL) or a comparable product by one of the listed Approved Manufacturers.

b. System shall include a method to weep water towards the exterior side of the building, see drawings.

2.5 STAINLESS STEEL


B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304.

C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.

D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

E. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

2.6 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Safety Glazing: Glazing shall comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

B. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, Condition A (uncoated), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3 with two plies of glass and polyvinyl butyral interlayer not less than 0.060 inch thick. 1. Kind: LHS (laminated heat strengthened). 2. Glass Color: Clear. 3. Interlayer Material: Ionoplast.

a. Basis -of-Design Material: Kuraray's/SentryGlas® interlayer (formerly DuPont/SentryGlas® interlayer) as manufactured by Kuraray.

b. Thickness: 1.52mm. c. Color: Clear. d. Interlayer Physical Properties:

1) Young’s Modulus: 43 kpsi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D5026

2) Tensile Strength: 5.0 kpsi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638.

3) Elongation: 400%, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638 4) Flex Modulus: 50 kpsi, when tested in accordance with D790. 5) Heat Deflection Temperature at 0.46 MPa: 110 deg F, when tested in

accordance with D648. 4. Exposed Edges: Fabricate edges in accordance with requirements of Section

088000 – Glazing and radius per manufacturer's recommendation. a. Sealant: Clear silicone sealant as specified in Section 079200 - Joint

Sealants, similar to DOW 790. 1) Movement Capability: 50 % in compression and 100% in extension. 2) Locations: Between adjacent exposed edges of glass. 3) Color: Clear.



RAILINGS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 057313 - 4

5. Comply with Section 088000 - Glazing.

C. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

D. Glazing Cement and Accessories for Structural Glazing: Glazing cement, setting blocks, shims, and related accessories as recommended by railing manufacturer for installing structural glazing in metal subrails at exterior locations.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Aluminum Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply

with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy

Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.


A. Guardrail Cap: Extruded heavy-duty solid aluminum construction, 1-3/8" square shape with recess for top of glass mounting. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Blumcraft #324. 2. Finish: Satin anodized. 3. Location: Top of glass.

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard, and include gaskets for pre-applying before glass installation at exterior side of glazing.

F. Accessories: 1. As needed for a complete installation. 2. Safety-Seals, as manufactured by C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.



RAILINGS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 057313 - 5

3. Glass setting strips. 4. Base Cladding: Sheet metal cladding added to exposed shoe base sections.

Adhere with double-sided tape and/or silicone adhesive a. Material: 304 stainless steel.

5. End caps. a. Material: 304 stainless steel.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

C. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

D. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

E. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work where indicated.

2.10 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION

A. Structural Balusters: Provide laminated, heat-strengthened glass panels.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install handrails in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for exterior locations.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

C. Seal joints between base pieces. Install receiver into base and set in sealant. Seal



RAILINGS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 057313 - 6

joints between r adjacent receivers

D. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from

parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete,

masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

F. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members.

G. Glass-Supported Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 061053MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH

CARPENTRY

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Wood furring and grounds. 4. Plywood backing panels.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Certified Wood: Lumber and plywood shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade

stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless otherwise indicated.



CARPENTRY

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 061053 - 2

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and

containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified

above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curb bases. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds.



CARPENTRY

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 061053 - 3

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 or better grade lumber of any species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 2. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 3. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: 1. Interior Locations: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw

manufacturer for material being fastened. 2. Exterior Locations: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw

manufacturer for material being fastened.

D. Roof Construction: 300 Series stainless steel.


A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.

B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.



CARPENTRY

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 061053 - 4

C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

H. Blocking, Grounds, and Nailers: 1. Provide wood blocking and nailers as shown on drawings, described in

specifications, or as required; verify requirements. Metal blocking where shown, provided under Division 9. Include blocking and nailers as required by the following: a. Membrane roofing and flashing work; provide wood cants and nailers where

shown; fiber cants provided by roofer. b. Wall mounted equipment shown requiring wood blocking.

2. Install in accurate locations and elevations for attachment of materials indicated on drawings and specified elsewhere.

3. Roof-Mounted Equipment Curbs: Install all curbing for roof mounted equipment and hatches. Prefabricated curbing furnished under Section 077200 - Roof Accessories and Division 23; wood curbing, where shown, provided under this Section.

4. Verify all deck openings suitably framed; metal framing provided under Division 5.

5. Install curbing level and plumb at locations shown; see approved HVAC shop drawings for mechanical equipment and Architectural drawings for hatches. a. Secure to structural framing. b. Add blocking, shims and nailers as required. c. Sub-curbing: Install wood sub-curbing for prefabricated curbs. Build

sub-curb from structural deck to roof membrane level. Coordinate with Mechanical trades to provide sub-curbs structurally adequate, accurately sized, and furnishing full continuous support for prefabricated metal curbs.

6. All wood used for installation of curbing and sub-curbing to be fire treated and nominal 2 inches thick.

7. Coordinate requirements of roof insulation, flashing and membrane before starting work.

8. Wood Blocking for edge of Roof Flashing. Comply with requirements of SPRI ES-1, See Section 075323 for applicable wind loads. a. Safety Factor: 4.5, but not less than 200 lbf/Ft.



CARPENTRY

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 061053 - 5

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

END OF SECTION



CARPENTRY

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 061053 - 6



SECTION 061643GYPSUM SHEATHING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 061643 - 1

SECTION 061643- GYPSUM SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior wall sheathing.

B. Related Sections: 1. 072500 - Weather Barriers: For water-resistive barrier applied over wall

sheathing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. Include installation requirements and recommended maximum permissible time which materials can be exposed to weather without detrimental effect; see "Detrimental Effect"


A. Stack panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM SHEATHING

A. Gypsum Wall Sheathing: Provide one of the following: 1. Cellulose Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M,

gypsum sheathing. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Fiberock

Sheathing with Aqua-Tough" by United States Gypsum Co. b. Type and Thickness: Provide the following, as indicated on drawings:

1) Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corporation. 2) “Glas-Roc” by BPB America, Inc. 3) “Securock” by United States Gypsum Co.

b. Type and Thickness: Provide the following, as indicated on drawings: 1) Type X, 5/8 inch thick.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 061643 - 2

B. Gypsum Parapet Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, Type X, 5/8 inch (16 mm)] thick, factory primed. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens Deck Prime" by G-P

Gypsum Corporation.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.


A. Sheathing Joint Tape: Self-adhesive rubberized asphalt with polyethylene film backing, minimum 25 mils thick. 1. Acceptable products:

a. "Perm-A-Barrier Wall Seam Tape"; W.R. Grace & Co. b. "Blueskin SA"; Henry Company. c. “FortiFlash 25”; Fortifiber Building Systems Group. d. “JT-30” Polyguard Products, Inc.

2. Minimum width: 4 inches.

B. Sheathing Joint Tape Primer: Solvent-base primer by tape manufacturer. For application at temperatures between 25 and 40 degrees F, use manufacturer's recommended low-temperature formulation.

C. Sealant for Fastener Heads: Acrylic latex meeting ASTM C 834.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

D. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 061643 - 3

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts

structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials

that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing, in compliance with ASTM C 954.

C. Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch

from edges and ends of boards.

3.3 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT

A. Seal sheathing joints and penetrations with joint tape according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Prime substrates as recommended by tape manufacturer. 2. Apply sheathing tape to joints and beneath items penetrating sheathing. Apply

at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing. 3. Roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that tape is completely

adhered to substrates.

B. Expansion/Control Joints: 1. Verify double studs in place, back to back, spaced at approximately 1/2 inch

apart unless otherwise detailed. 2. Locations:

a. Joints at Vertical Applications: Provide joints where indicated on drawings, but provide control joints at not less than 30 feet on center.

b. Joints at Horizontal Applications: Provide joints where indicated on drawings, but provide control joints at not less than 50 feet on center.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 061643 - 4



SECTION 064000ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 064000 - 1

SECTION 064000 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 3. Wood Cabinets. 4. Solid-surfacing-material countertops. 5. Upholstered Seating 6. Closet and utility shelving.

B. Related Sections: 1. 061053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: For wood furring, blocking, shims,

and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.


A. The configuration of work of this Section is shown on drawings.

B. The detailing and design required to provide rigid, solid and structurally adequate architectural woodwork which is level, flat, and free of warp or distortion is the responsibility of the fabricator; all within parameters of AWI specifications and as approved by Architect.

C. Countertops and supporting bases to be capable of supporting a uniform load of 50 lb./sq. ft. plus a concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied at any point on countertop. The following conditions require special attention: 1. Casework or countertops exceeding 42" in width between supports. 2. Countertops exceeding 24" in depth unsupported. 3. Sink and/or equipment cut-outs or supports.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including

concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets and

other items installed in architectural woodwork.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 064000 - 2

4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.

5. Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Shop-applied opaque finishes. 3. Plastic laminates. 4. Edgebanding material. 5. Thermoset decorative panels. 6. Solid-surfacing materials.

D. Samples for Verification: 1. Panel with or for transparent finish, not less than 48" x 48" 2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for

transparent-finished woodwork. 3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches (200

by 250 mm), for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.

4. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.

5. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches (150 mm) square. 6. Corner pieces as follows:

a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) deep.

b. Miter joints for standing trim. 7. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.

E. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWS Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers and wood doors with face veneers that are sequence matched with woodwork and transparent-finished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 064000 - 3

D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels indicating that woodwork,

including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.

F. Mockups: Build mockup to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork

by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 064000 - 4

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS

A. Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering interior architectural woodwork that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural woodwork by one of the following:

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWS's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: 1. WD-1: Provide wood type as described on Finish Legend.

a. Species: Maple. b. Cut: Rift. c. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip match. d. Match Architect's sample. e. Fire Rating: Class B per ASTM E 84.

2. WD-2: Provide wood type as described on Finish Legend. a. Species: Maple. b. Cut: Rift. c. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip match. d. Match Architect's sample. e. Fire Rating: Class B per ASTM E 84.

3. WD-3: Provide wood type as described on Finish Legend. a. Cut: Rift. b. Species: Maple. c. Cut: Rift. d. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip match. e. Match Architect's sample. f. Fire Rating: Class B per ASTM E 84.

4. WD-4: Provide wood type as described on Finish Legend. a. Cut: Rift.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 064000 - 5

b. Species: Maple. c. Cut: Rift. d. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip match. e. Match Architect's sample.

5. WD-5: Provide wood type as described on Finish Legend. a. Cut: Rift. b. Species: Maple. c. Cut: Rift. d. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip match. e. Match Architect's sample. f. Fire Rating: Class B per ASTM E 84.

C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.

D. Wood Products: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder

containing no urea formaldehyde. 3. Moisture-Resistant Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 155,

made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. a. Product: Sierra Pine; "Medex".

4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with

adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.

E. Thermoset Decorative Panels: : Medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate (PLAM): NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

G. Chemical-Resistant, High-Pressure Decorative Laminate (CPLAM): NEMA LD 3, Grade HGP, and as follows: 1. Laminate has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according

to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.9.5: a. Nitric Acid (30 Percent): Moderate effect. b. Sulfuric Acid (77 Percent): Moderate effect. c. Hydrochloric Acid (37 Percent): Moderate effect. d. Phosphoric Acid (75 Percent): No effect. e. Acetic Acid (98 Percent): No effect. f. Formaldehyde: No effect. g. Ethyl Acetate: No effect. h. Ethyl Ether: No effect. i. Phenol (85 Percent): Moderate effect. j. Benzene: No effect. k. Xylene: No effect. l. Butyl Alcohol: No effect. m. Furfural: No effect. n. Methyl Ethyl Ketone: No effect.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 064000 - 6

o. Sodium Hydroxide (25 Percent): No effect. p. Sodium Sulfide (15 Percent): No effect. q. Ammonium Hydroxide (28 Percent): No effect. r. Zinc Chloride: No effect. s. Gentian Violet: No effect. t. Methyl Red: No effect.

H. Solid-Surfacing Material (SSM): Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2.

I. Upholstered Seating: Provide in conformance with Section 125219 - Upholstered Seating.

J. PGL-1: Provide product indicated on Finish Legend.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this Article, which are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified. 1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced

woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise

adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use Exterior Type or Interior Type A. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Kiln-dry material after treatment.

C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.

D. Solid Surface Materials: Provide in Conformance with Section 123600 - Countertops.

2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural woodwork, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."

B. Hinges:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 064000 - 7

1. Typical: Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, nominal 170 degrees of opening, self-closing with integral sound damping.

2. Others as indicated on drawings.

C. Pulls: 1. Typical: DP-3A by Doug Mocket, with 26D finish. 2. Others: As indicated on drawings.

D. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Typical: Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted;

full-overtravel-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 2. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2; for drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm)

high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide.

E. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "OG series" by Doug

Mockett & Company, Inc. 2. Color as selected by Architect from full range.

F. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.


A. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

B. Coat Rods: Chrome plated steel with escutcheons; provide for clear span conditions as follows: 1. 4 Feet: 20 gage; 1-1/16 inch outside diameter. 2. 7 Feet: Knape & Vogt No. 770, wall thickness 0.120 inch; 1-1/16 inch outside

diameter. 3. Over 7 Feet to 10 Feet: 1 inch NPS (1.31" O.D.) ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 steel

pipe. 4. Over 10 Feet: Provide suitable intermediate supports.

C. Clothes Hangers: “Rigid Rak” Item 967 by Datum Filing Systems, Inc., 89 Church Road, Emigsville, PA 17318, 800 828-8018 phone, 717 718-8387 phone, 717 801-4707 fax, www.datumfiling.com & www.rei-rigidrak.com; distributed by Commercial Door & Hardware, 513 326-2330, or Clothes Hangers, Inc., 800 565-9503, www.hotel-hangers.com (Item 777177). 1. Description: Anti-Theft type, 17 inches long by 3/16 inch diameter; polished

steel. Provide four hangers for each linear foot and fraction thereof of each coat rod.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 064000 - 8

D. Glass: Provide in conformance with Section 088000 - Glazing and as follows: 1. Glass shall be a form of safety glazing, tempered or laminated glass. 2. Exposed Edges: Pencil polished.

E. Plastic Glazing (PGL-1): Provide product indicated on Finish Legend. 1. Fire Rating: Class B, ASTM E-84.

F. Book Flap: Black Rubber Flap provided by Owner.

G. Countertop Supports: 1. Surface-Mounted Counter Brackets:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Rakks; Series EH. b. Size: As recommended by manufacturer. c. Finish: Primed for field painting.

2. Flush-Mounted Counter Brackets: Configuration installed directly to stud prior to application of gypsum board, hiding vertical support. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Rakks; Series EH-FM. b. Size: As recommended by manufacturer. c. Finish: Manufacturer's standard off-white powder coat, unless indicated

otherwise. d. Locations: Typical.

3. Fish Tank: Black rubber flap, which is provided by Owner.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium grade

interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. 2. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality

standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

3. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: a. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch

(19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). b. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and

Rails: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). 4. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to

maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

B. Interior Standing and Running Trim: 1. For transparent-finished trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered

construction. Do not glue for width. 2. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat

members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 064000 - 9

3. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly.

C. Wood Cabinets for Transparent Finish: 1. Construction Type: Type A, Frameless. 2. Cabinet and Door Interface Style: Style 1, overlay. 3. Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay. 4. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 5. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 6. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 7. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match. 8. Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative

panels. 9. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood lumber. 10. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. 11. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above

compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

D. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: 1. Construction Type: Type A, Frameless. 2. Cabinet and Door Interface Style: Style 1, overlay. 3. Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay. 4. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as

follows: a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGL. b. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. c. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.

5. Edge Banding: Plastic laminate . 6. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies and Doors:

High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. 7. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 8. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. 9. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Match sample. 10. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above

compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

E. Solid-Surfacing-Material (SSM-1): 1. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness:

a. Horizontal: 1/2 inch (13 mm) b. Vertical: 3/4 inch (19 mm).

2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on Finish Legend . 3. . Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations

for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 4. Blocking for Work Station Countertops: Veneer plywood. 5. Accessories: All materials and devices required for complete installation and

approved by solid polymer (surface) material manufacturer. a. Sealant: Silicone rubber, as recommended by solid polymer manufacturer

for sealing joints in their products. b. Adhesive: Neoprene-based adhesive for making permanent joints in solid

polymer products. Color to match solid polymer fabrications.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 064000 - 10

c. Miscellaneous: As required. d. Plumbers Putty: As specified under Division 22.

6. Solid Surface Countertops: Provided ion conformance with Section 129300 - Countertops.

7. Chair Rail (CG-2): Provide char rails designated as CG-2 on drawings. a. Ease exposed edges.

F. Closet and Utility Shelving: 1. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch (19-mm) PLAM-faced panel product with veneer edge

banding .

G. Edge Banding (EGB): 1. Plastic Laminate Grade VGS

2.7 SHOP FINISHING

A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling.

C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish System: AWS System 5, Conversion varnish. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.

a. Type: Bright Analine. 4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a wash-coat sealer to woodwork made

from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 5. Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 6. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM

D 523.

D. Opaque Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish System: AWS System 5, Conversion varnish. 3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 4. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM

D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 064000 - 11

B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Shim as required with concealed shims.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 16 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand

smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. 2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than

1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

G. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not use face fastening, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch (1.5 mm in

2400-mm) vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) horizontal variation from a true plane.

H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag,

bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more

than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply

with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 064000 - 12

3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and to walls with adhesive.

4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

J. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 070544COMPOSITE FRAMING

SUPPORT - CLIP SYSTEM WITH THERMAL INSULATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 070544 - 1

SECTION 070544 - COMPOSITE FRAMING SUPPORT - CLIP SYSTEM WITH THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Composite framing support (CFS) system with in-fill insulation for support of exterior cladding. 1. Substrate: Exterior sheathing over metal stud framing.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Complete thermal isolated cladding systems with continuous insulation designed to support the exterior cladding system. System creates a cavity wall between substrate for the cladding system and the exterior cladding.

B. Rigid insulation is installed within the cavity, as continuous insulation, in sequence with the thermally isolated 'z-clip" system. The thermally isolated 'z-clip" system, CFS, is designed to support the exterior cladding and insulation without metal fasteners extending through the insulation.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design composite framing support (CFS) system.

B. Structural Performance: Provide systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 330: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits:

a. Non Rigid Wall Cladding: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span.

b. Masonry Wall Cladding: For wind loads, no greater than 1/600 of the span.

4. Factor of Safety: Not less than 1.5 times maximum load.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. System Thermal Design: Ensure installed insulation and CFS clip system, sub-framing, clips and cladding attachment does not have thermal bridging of fasteners or framing that creates a continuous metal path from exterior surface of insulation to interior face of insulation.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 070544 - 2

1. Energy Performance: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 2010 energy standard for minimum R-value or maximum U-value. a. Provide computer modeling thermal analysis or guarded hot-box test

(ASTM C1363-11) and determine calculated U-values of the wall assembly to comply with IECC Chapter 4. 1) Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): U-0.064 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F].

E. The Drawings show aesthetic design intent. Products provided must conform to design intent shown and performance levels specified.

F. Fire-Resistance Ratings: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: In compliance with ASTM E84, for foam

insulation, fiber reinforced polymer (FRP) and interior surfaces as follows: a. Flame Spread Index (FSI): 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less.

2. Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from

the listings of another qualified testing agency. 3. Intermediate Scale Multistory Fire Test: Each wall assemble that includes

plastic insulation must pass NFPA 285 in conformance with requirements of Section 2603 of the Ohio Building Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation layouts.

C. Test and Inspection Reports: Submit test and inspection reports on each type of wall cladding/veneer system based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by nationally recognized testing agency that is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with at least three years of documented experience.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 070544 - 3

C. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section and the following: 1. Install system in strict compliance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 2. Have not less than three years of documented experience. 3. Factory trained and approved by CFS system manufacturer.

D. Design Engineer's Qualifications: Design structural supports and anchorages under direct supervision of a licensed Structural Engineer experienced in design for this type of Work and licensed in State that Project is located.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of this Work in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions and warranty requirements.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. CFS System Warranty: Provide written warranty by manufacturer agreeing to correct defects in manufacturing within five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SMARTci GreenGirt Clips Composite Framing Support (CFS) System as manufactured by Advanced Architectural Products or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Advanced Architectural Products (A2P).

a. Address: 959 Industrial Drive, Allegan, Michigan 49010. b. Phone: (269) 355-1818; Fax: (866) 858-5568 c. Website: www.smartcisystems.com

B. Comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2.2 COMPOSITE FRAMING SUPPORT (CFS) CLIP

A. CFS Clip: Provide CFS Clip consisting of polyester and vinyl ester bioresin matrix (FRP) with recycled materials, fire retardant additives and integral continuous metal inserts the length of clip profile. Reinforce CFS clip with glass strand rovings used internally for longitudinal (lengthwise) strength and continuous strand glass mats or stitched reinforcements used internally for transverse (crosswise) strength. 1. Length of Clip; GreenGirt: Continuous 2. Depth of Clip; GreenGirt: Match thickness of insulation. 3. Grid spacing: As required to meet PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS, but not

more than 24 inches on center.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 070544 - 4

4. Provide continuous non-corrosive steel insert for engagement of fasteners, at

least 16 gage, 0.0598 inch thick with G90 galvanized coating designation in compliance with ASTM A653/A653M. a. Fully engage steel insert with adjacent CFS at ends. b. Anchor sub-girts and other wall cladding support accessories to steel insert

set into and part of CFS. c. Provide screw pullout testing that meets required load with a safety factor

of not less than 4. 5. Provide integral 3-point compression seal in CFS sections to ensure insulation

panel will not dislodge and to eliminate air and water movement throughout system.

6. Provide integral compression seal in CFS sections to ensure insulation will not dislodge.

7. Provide integral anti-siphon grooves on exterior and interior flanges of CFS. 8. Provide force distribution zones integrally designed into profile of CFS. 9. Self-Extinguishing: Comply with ASTM D635. 10. Profile Visual Requirements: Comply with ASTM D4385. 11. Tensile Stress: Provide engineered lengthwise and crosswise tensile stress in

compliance with performance loading criteria and specified safety factors, in accordance with ASTM D638.

12. Compressive Stress: Provide engineered lengthwise and crosswise compressive stress in compliance with performance loading criteria and specified safety factors, in accordance with ASTM D695.

13. Flexural Stress: Provide engineered lengthwise and crosswise flexural stress in compliance with performance loading criteria and specified safety factors, in accordance with ASTM D790.

14. Modulus of Elasticity: Engineered to meet performance loading criteria and specified safety factors.

15. Barcol Hardness: 45, in accordance with ASTM D2583. 16. Water Absorption: Less than 0.46 percent by weight, within 24 hours, tested in

accordance with ASTM D570. 17. Density: Within range of 0.062 to 0.070 lbs/cubic inch, in accordance with

ASTM D792. 18. Lengthwise Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 7.0 x 10ˉ6 inch/inch/degrees F, in

accordance with ASTM D696. 19. Notched Izod Impact, Lengthwise: 24 ft lbs/inch, in accordance with ASTM

D256 within temperature range indicated. 20. Notched Izod Impact, Crosswise: 4 ft lbs/inch, in accordance with ASTM D256

within temperature range indicated.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 070544 - 5

2.3 INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate Panel Insulation: Rigid closed cell foam, complying with ASTM C1289; Type I with impermeable aluminum foil facing on both sides; Class 1 with non-reinforced foam core. 1. Insulation Panel Edges: Provide factory formed edges on insulation panels that

interlock with CFS system components. a. Spline: Provide manufacturer’s standard spline for adjacent insulation

units into profile of CFS. 1) Length: Continuous. 2) Location: Full length of vertical butt joints between panels of

insulation that do not engage into the CFS Clip secured to structure. 2. Design R-Value: R-5 per inch of thickness. 3. Comply with fire-resistance requirements, as indicated on drawings, and as part

of an exterior non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.

4. Compressive Strength: Grade 1, 16 psi; tested in compliance with ASTM D1621.

5. Dimensional Stability: Less than 2 percent linear change after 7 days; ASTM D2126.

6. Moisture Vapor Permeance: Less than 0.05 perm; ASTM E96/E96M. 7. Water Absorption: Less than 0.05 percent by volume; ASTM C209. 8. Service Temperature: Range of minus 100 degrees F to 250 degrees F. 9. Acceptable Products:

a. Basis of Design (BOD): Hunter Panels, LLC; Product Xci Class A (www.hunterxci.com) or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2.4 ASSEMBLY

A. Assemble CFS clip system using manufacturer’s standard procedures and processes identical to tested units and as necessary to comply with performance requirements indicated. 1. Comply with CFS clip system and dimensional and structural requirements as

indicated on drawings. 2. Erect CFS clip system in established sequence in accordance with

manufacturer’s standard installation procedures. 3. Provide spray foam sealant on backside of cantilevered fasteners that completely

puncture insulation layer.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant (zinc plated or equivalent), self-tapping and self-drilling screws, bolts, nuts, and other fasteners as recommended by CFS clip system manufacturer for project application. 1. Cladding to CFS Clip System: Use standard self-tapping metal screws. 2. CFS System to Metal Stud Wall Framing: Use standard self-tapping metal




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 070544 - 6

screws. 3. CFS System to Concrete/CMU: Use standard masonry or concrete screw

anchors in predrilled hole. 4. CFS System to Wood Framing: Use standard wood screw anchors. 5. DO NOT USE powder, air, or gas actuated fasteners or actuated fastener tools.

DO NOT USE impact wrenches when fastening to or from the CFS.

B. Weather Resistant Barrier (WRB): Refer to Section 072500 for requirements.

C. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 for sealant information.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas of this work, and project conditions with installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrates, CFS system conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of this Work.

B. Examine structural wall framing to ensure that angles, channels, studs, and other structural support members have been installed within alignment tolerances required by CFS system manufacturer.

C. Examine rough-in for components and systems penetrating CFS system to coordinate actual locations of penetrations relative to CFS systems joint locations prior to installation.

D. Verify that mechanical and electrical services for exterior walls have been installed and tested and, if appropriate, verify that adjacent materials and finishes are dry and ready to receive insulation.

E. Verify Polyisocyanurate panel insulation has factory formed edges on insulation panels that interlock with CFS system components. Field fabricating edges is not permitted, unless approved by Architect in writing.

F. Proceed with installation only after wall substrate surfaces have been properly prepared and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by CFS manufacturer for achieving best result for substrate under project conditions.

C. Prepare sub-framing, base angles, sills, furring, and other CFS system members and provide anchorage in accordance with ASTM C754 for substrate type and wall




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 070544 - 7

cladding type in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install CFS clip system in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install system to fill-in exterior spaces without gaps or voids, and do not compress insulation panels.

C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces, and insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.

D. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of Mechanical/Electrical services within plane of insulation.

E. Rigid Insulation: Install per manufacturers instruction. Install with all butt joints tight and spline installed full height between vertical joints in insulation. Spline fits into factory cut reveal. All joints should butt tight to adjacent surface, except deflection joints. Any voids shall be filled with foam.

F. Exposed insulation must be protected from open flame.

G. Exterior wall insulation is not intended to be left exposed for extended periods of time without adequate protection.

H. Install CFS clip system in compliance with system orientation, sizes, and locations as indicated on drawings.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Shim and align CFS system within installed tolerances of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-cumulative, level, plumb, and on location lines as indicated.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Ensure that insulation panels are not exposed to moisture. 1. Remove wet insulation panels or allow them to completely dry prior to installation

of CFS system.

C. Replace damaged insulation prior to Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 070544 - 8

NTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


SECTION 070553FIRE AND SMOKE ASSEMBLY

IDENTIFICATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 070553 - 1

SECTION 070553 - FIRE AND SMOKE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Marking and identification at fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers

and smoke partitions.

B. Related Sections: 1. 078413 - Penetration Firestopping: For penetration firestopping identification

requirements. 2. 078500 - Fire-Resistant Joint Systems: For fire-resistant joint systems

identification requirements.


A. Effectively and permanently identify fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers and smoke partitions in accordance with Building Code requirements and Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show proposed locations of stenciling paint and paint color. 2. Show text, typestyles, and layout for each stencil.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 degC).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 degC) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Provide paint materials in accordance with Division 09 Section "Painting."


SECTION 070553FIRE AND SMOKE ASSEMBLY

IDENTIFICATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 070553 - 2

2.2 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers and smoke partitions with preprinted labels, signs, or field-applied stenciled text. Unless otherwise required by the jurisdiction having authority, include the following wording, not less than 3 inches in height, repeated at intervals not more than 30 feet measured horizontally along the wall or partition: 1. "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, verify that surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Paint: Apply in accordance with requirements specified in Division 09 Section "Painting."

B. Apply labels, signs, or field-applied stenciling in accessible, concealed locations.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 071326SELF-ADHERING SHEET

WATERPROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 071326 - 1

SECTION 071326 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Section Includes: 1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing, fabric reinforced. 2. Bonded HDPE or polyethylene sheet waterproofing. 3. Waterproofing envelope of elevator pit. 4. Foundation walls.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate

condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and

performance properties of waterproofing. 2. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating

substrate.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, including the following products: 1. 8-by-8-inch square of waterproofing and flashing sheet. 2. 8-by-8-inch square of insulation. 3. 4-by-4-inch square of drainage panel.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer.



WATERPROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 071326 - 2

1.6 [ pavers and]FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist. 2. Do not waterproof until items penetrating the concrete substrate receiving

waterproofing are installed.

B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: : Manufacturer's standard materials-only warranty in which manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing material for waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Installer's Special Warranty: Specified form, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years. 1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels,

insulation, pedestals, and pavers on plaza decks.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course, molded-sheet drainage panels from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING

A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Minimum 60-mil nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- thick, polyethylene-film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM75. b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861. c. Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Bituthene 3000/Low Temperature or Bituthene

4000. d. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 650.

2. Physical Properties: a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C,

modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970.



WATERPROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 071326 - 3

d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836.

e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. f. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour

immersion at 70 deg F; ASTM D 570. g. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M,

Water Method. h. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 200 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385.

3. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing.

B. Locations: 1. Foundation walls, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Acceptable for application at vertical walls of elevator pits, if construction permits

installation after pouring of elevator pit walls. 3. Others: As indicated.

2.3 BONDED HDPE OR POLYETHYLENE SHEET WATERPROOFING

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Vertical Applications:

a. Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Preprufe 160R with Preprufe Tie-Back Covers.

b. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Underseal Blindside Membrane. 2. Horizontal Applications:

a. Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Preprufe 300R. b. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Underseal Underslab Membrane.

B. Bonded HDPE Sheet for Vertical Applications: Uniform, flexible, multilayered-composite sheet membrane consisting of either a HDPE film coated with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and protective release liner, total 32-mil thickness, or an HDPE film coated with a modified asphalt layer and a nonwoven geotextile-fabric final layer, total 73-mil thickness; with the following physical properties: 1. Tensile Strength, Film: 4000 psi minimum; ASTM D 412. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 10 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 3. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in. minimum; ASTM D 903, modified. 4. Lap Adhesion: 2.5 lbf/in. minimum; ASTM D 1876, modified. 5. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 231 feet1; ASTM D 5385, modified. 6. Puncture Resistance: 100 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. 7. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.01 perms maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water

Method. 8. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent maximum; ASTM D 570.

C. Bonded HDPE or Polyethylene Sheet for Horizontal Applications: Uniform, flexible, multilayered-composite sheet membrane consisting of either an HDPE film coated with pressure-sensitive adhesive and protective release liner, total 46-mil thickness, or a cross-laminated film of low- and medium-density polyethylene, coated with a modified asphalt layer and a nonwoven geotextile-fabric final layer, total 95-mil thickness; with the following physical properties: 1. Tensile Strength, Film: 20001500 psi minimum; ASTM D 412.



WATERPROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 071326 - 4

2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 10 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 3. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in. minimum; ASTM D 903, modified. 4. Lap Adhesion: 2.5 lbf/in. minimum; ASTM D 1876, modified. 5. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 231 feet; ASTM D 5385, modified. 6. Puncture Resistance: 200 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. 7. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.019 perms maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water

Method. 8. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent maximum; ASTM D 570.

D. Mastic, Adhesives, and Detail Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

E. Locations: 1. Continuous envelope around the exterior walls and floor of the elevator pits.

Terminate waterproofing to underside slab on grade above the elevator pit. a. The continuous envelop includes waterproofing under the footings, on the

sides of footings, on top of the footings; and similar structures required to create a complete waterproof envelope.

2. Others: Where indicated.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer.

C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer.

D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, of trowel grade or low viscosity.

E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, modified asphalt coating.

F. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch centers.

G. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch, nominal,

elsewhere. 2. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing

manufacturer for protection course type. 3. Locations:



WATERPROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 071326 - 5

a. Elevator pits.

2.5 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS

A. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 sieve laminated to one side of the core; and with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft.. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; Hydrodrain 700. b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRAIN 9000. c. Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Hydroduct 225. d. Hydrodrain by Hydrotech.

2. Locations: a. Horizontal surfaces. b. Vertical Surfaces.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer.

2.6 INSULATION

A. Insulation, General: Comply with Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

B. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, shiplap edged. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

the following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The). b. Owens Corning Insulating Systems LLC. c. Pactiv Building Products.

2. Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength. a. Locations: Typical

C. R-Value: Continuous insulation with R-Value of R-8.4 or more.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the waterproofing. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended

in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in

writing by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.



WATERPROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 071326 - 6

B. Do not proceed until all piping, conduit, vents, ducts and other projections through the substrate have been installed and within manufacturer's tolerances.


3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Prepare concrete substrate surfaces in accordance with ACI 515.1R and ACI 301. Include the following: 1. Remove or grout projections higher than 1.5mm, i.e., fins. 2. Grout tie-wire holes, minor honeycombs, and minor voids larger than 19MM in

diameter and deeper than 6mm. 3. Grout minor cracks 3mm wide or wider. 4. Remove latencies, spatters, dirt, etc., by scraping surfaces to be waterproofed.

Do not grind. 5. Scrape off knife-like edges of exterior corners and grout to a continuous smooth

surface all interior and exterior corners. 6. Remove dirt and debris. 7. Provide ventilation for confined areas. 8. Surface dry only.

E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258, and manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Install sheet strips of width according to manufacturer's written instructions and

center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch.

F. Bridge and cover isolation joints, expansion joints, discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-to-deck joints with overlapping sheet strips of widths according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second

sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate.

G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.

H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.



WATERPROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 071326 - 7

3.3 GENERAL

A. Provide waterproofing for locations and types specified regardless whether or not scheduled or shown on Drawings.

B. Exterior Waterproofing: Provide for the following conditions: 1. System: Provide waterproofing for designated elements below grade inside

building footprint. The analogy is that of a “boat” for typical applications and that of a “submarine” for tunnels

2. Concealed: Semi-liquid or sheet membrane. Provide for the following: a. Vertical Surfaces: All vertical walls below grade where adjacent floor slab

is also below grade. 1) Foundation walls. 2) Pits: Elevator

3. Structures: Waterproof vertical walls and horizontal slabs; tie horizontal waterproofing to vertical waterproofing. a. Pits: Elevator.

1) Provide mudslab for installation of horizontal membrane below concrete structure.

2) Remove water prior to installation. 4. All other exterior applications normally required by waterproofing to prevent

entrance of water into building.

3.4 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F,

install self-adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F.

D. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low to high points of decks to ensure that laps shed water.

E. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.

F. Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing terminations with mastic.

G. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.



WATERPROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 071326 - 8

H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

I. Immediately install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane. 1. Board insulation may be used in place of a separate protection course to vertical

applications when approved by waterproofing manufacturer and installed immediately.

3.5 BONDED HDPE OR POLYETHYLENE SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Install bonded HDPE or polyethylene sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels over substrate. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity.

C. Vertical Applications: Install sheet with HDPE face against substrate. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by membrane manufacturer. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger and tape end laps to ensure watertight installation. Mechanically fasten to substrate. 1. Securely fasten top termination of membrane with continuous metal termination

bar anchored into substrate and cover with detailing tape.

D. Horizontal Applications: Install sheet with HDPE or polyethylene face against substrate. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by membrane manufacturer. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger and tape end laps to ensure watertight installation.

E. Corners: Seal lapped terminations and cut edges of sheet waterproofing at inside and outside corners with detail tape.

F. Seal penetrations through sheet waterproofing to provide watertight seal with detail tape patches or wraps and a liquid-membrane troweling.

G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Tape perimeter of damaged or nonconforming area extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions. Apply a patch of sheet waterproofing and firmly secure with detail tape.

3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE-PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or other methods that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For horizontal and vertical applications, install board insulation before installing

drainage panels. 2. Locations:



WATERPROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 071326 - 9

a. Vertical: Full height of waterproofing. b. Others: As indicated on drawings.

3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch of projections and penetrations.

B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive or tape applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

D. Foundation Walls: Install insulation to form continuous insulation, in conformance with ASHRAE 90.1, at foundation walls.

E. Locations: 1. Vertical: Full height of waterproofing. 2. Slab on Grade Floors: 24 inches horizontal. Installation to conform to

requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007. a. R-Value: R-15.

3. Others: As indicated on drawings.

F. Penetrations in insulation: Fill void created by materials that penetrating through the insulation with patching foam.

3.8 PROTECTION, REPAIR, AND CLEANING

A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.

B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

C. Protect installed board insulation and from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

D. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

E. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION



WATERPROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 071326 - 10



SECTION 072100THERMAL INSULATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Board insulation. 2. Continuous insulation at masonry walls.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Sections: For insulation specified as part of roofing and horizontal

waterproofing assemblies. 2. 078500 - Fire-Resistant Joint Systems: For insulation installed as part of a

perimeter fire-resistant joint system. 3. 098100 - Acoustic Insulation: For sound attenuation insulation. 4. Division 22 and 23 Sections: For pipe and duct insulation.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design securement of exterior board insulation to cold formed metal framing and concrete foundations.

B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Wind Loading Requirements:

a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. b. Importance Factor: 1.15. c. Exposure: B.

C. Accommodate substructure tolerances.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product test reports.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072100 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BOARD INSULATION

A. Provide manufacturer's standard preformed insulation units, sized for proper fit in indicated applications.

B. Foil-Faced, Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 2, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core in thicknesses up to 4 inches 1. Thermal Resistance Design Value: 5.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F. 2. Foil Face: Embossed Aluminum.

a. Exterior Face Thickness: not less than4 mil. b. Interior Face Thickness: Not less than 1 mils

3. Locations: Where indicated

C. Mineral-Wool Board, Types IA and IB, Unfaced: ASTM C 612, Types IA and IB; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft..

D. Mineral-Wool Board, Types IA and IB, Faced: ASTM C 612, Types IA and IB; faced on one side with foil-scrim or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, per ASTM E 84. Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft..

E. Fasteners: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc. b. Gemco. c. DOW Chemical Company.

2. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place. a. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm)

thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square. b. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67

mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated. 3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-

(0.41-mm-) thick galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in diameter.

4. Dome Caps: Designed to protect ends of insulation-retaining washers in locations where exposed to view or human contact.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072100 - 3

2.2 CONTINUOUS INSULATION AT WALLS WITH METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS.

A. Specified in Section 070544 - Composite Framing Support - Clip System with Thermal Insulation.

2.3 CONTINUOUS INSULATION AT MASONRY VENEER WALLS.

A. Foil-Faced, Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 2, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core in thicknesses up to 4 inches 1. Thermal Resistance Design Value: 5.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.

a. Required R-Value: As indicated on drawings. 2. Foil Face: Embossed Aluminum.

a. Exterior Face Thickness: not less than4 mil. b. Interior Face Thickness: Not less than 1 mils

3. Locations: a. Typical insulation in masonry cavity wall.

4. Manufacturers: Use one of the following a. Dow Chemical Company. b. Hunter Panels c. Rmax, Greer, South Carolina.

5. Fasteners: a. As specified above. b. Adjustable Masonry Anchors specified in Section 042013 - Veneer Masonry

may be used as fasteners at masonry cavity wall construction. Coordinate exact locations of masonry anchors with Section 042013 - Veneer Masonry.

c. Certainteed; MemBrain.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Flexible Aerogel Insulation: ASTM C1728, Types I or II; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5 and 10, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Thermal resistivity of 9.8 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. 2. Compressive Strength: 10 psi per ASTM C 165. 3. Locations: Where indicated. 4. Product: Dow Corning Corporation; HPI-1000 Building Insulation Blanket.

B. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. 1. Interior adhesive shall have a VOC content of not more than 70 g/L when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072100 - 4

PART 3 - .EXECUTION


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

E. Provide attachment/support as required and recommended by manufacturer to assure insulating materials maintain their proper location and perform their intended function, all subject to review by Architect. 1. Provide wire or strapping retainers at stud walls without board covering to

maintain insulation in place. Install retainers on open side of wall at 16 inch centers.

2. Provide wire or strapping retainers at stud walls where insulation is not full depth of wall and conditions where bottom of insulation is not supported by metal framing.

F. Foil-Faced Insulation: Orient foil-faced materials with foil toward warm side of installation

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BOARD INSULATION

A. Below Grade Slabs: On horizontal surfaces under slabs, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) in

from exterior walls.

B. Suspended Slabs: Install insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive

according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated.

2. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072100 - 5

3. Where insulation will be exposed to view or human contact, apply dome caps to tips of spindles.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONTINUOUS INSULATION

A. Cavity-Wall Insulation: 1. Metal Stud Walls: Install insulation with mechanical fasteners of type, number,

and spacing as recommended by manufacturer. a. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with

edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.

2. Concrete and Masonry Walls: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. a. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with

edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.

b. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."

B. Subframing and Bracket Assemblies: Install assemblies with mechanical fasteners directly to sheathing as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Fit courses of insulation to be butted tightly in both directions. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by thermal isolation brackets to produce a

friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining brackets.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CURTAIN WALL INSULATION

A. Install board insulation in curtain wall construction where indicated on Drawings in accordance with curtain wall manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets

within window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between insulation and glass.

2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to prevent insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-containment system.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF BLANKET INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing

members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072100 - 6

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of

construction.

C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 072119FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072119 - 1

SECTION 072119 - FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sprayed polyurethane foam insulation (SPF).

B. Related Sections: 1. 072500 - Weather Barriers. 2. 077600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: For transition, penetration, and

through-wall flashings.


A. Material Compatibility: Provide polyurethane foam, flashings, and miscellaneous materials that are compatible with one another and able to bond to substrate under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Assembly shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air barrier material of adjacent assemblies, allowing for the relative movement of assemblies due to thermal and moisture variations and creep, and anticipated seismic movement.

C. Moisture Permeability: 1.0 perm or less when installed on the winter warm side of building envelope enclosing conditioned space.

D. Blowing Agent: Tested and listed by the Environmental Protection Agency as a zero ozone depleting blowing agent.

E. VOC Regulations: Provide products which comply with applicable regulations controlling the use of volatile organic compounds.

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide foam plastic continuous insulation assemblies with the following fire-test-response characteristics, as determined by testing identical panels and system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Intermediate-Scale Multistory Fire Test: Tested mockup, representative of

completed wall assembly of which foam plastic continuous insulation is a part, complies with NFPA 285 for test method and required fire-test-response characteristics of exterior non-load-bearing wall assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072119 - 2

1. Include copies of tests and other product data verifying conformance with NFPA 285 for exterior wall assemblies with SPF Insulation.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing locations and extent of air/vapor barrier and details of all typical conditions, intersections with other envelope systems and materials, and membrane transition strips, Show and detail the following at not less than 3” = 1’-0”: 1. All joints in substrate. 2. Changes in substrate. 3. Terminations of air/vapor barrier to adjacent substrate including frames. 4. Penetrations through air/vapor barrier and at protrusions such as conduits, pipes

electric boxes and how they are sealed. 5. Details showing method used to bridge joints in the construction.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified installer.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

E. Installation Instructions: Instructions fully describing spray insulation and air barrier products and application. This shop drawing is for information only and will not be approved or returned.

F. Bid Requirements: 1. Submit with the bid evidence of current accreditation of the trade contractor and

certification of the installers under the Air Barrier Association of America’s (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program. Submit accreditation number of trade contractor and certification number of installers.

2. For each wall types that include SPF insulation, submit documentation with bid showing the SPF insulation meets NFPA 285 for its intended use.

G. Compatibility: Submit letter from manufacturer stating that materials proposed for use are permanently chemically compatible and adhesively compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. Submit letter from manufacturer stating that cleaning materials used during installation are chemically compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use.

H. Certificate: Certify exterior wall assemblies, with SPF insulation, have been installed in compliance with requirements of a tested assemble meeting NFPA 285. 1. Meet or exceed the requirements of "Fire-Test-Response Characteristics",

included in PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS.

I. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics

J. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

K. Qualification Data: For qualified installer.

L. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072119 - 3


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer for installation of manufacturer's product over substrates indicated.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide all materials and products supplied and tested by a single manufacturer as a total system.

C. Installer Qualifications: 1. A qualified installer who is approved, authorized, licensed by manufacturer for

installation of manufacturer's product over substrates indicated. 2. Licensed and certified under the ABAA Quality Assurance Program. 3. Experienced in performing application of SPF materials on not less than three

projects with similar quantities of sprayed insulation materials. 4. Each worker who is installing air barriers must be either a Certified Applicator or

an installer who is registered with ABAA. 5. Each Lead Certified Applicator can supervise a maximum of five registered

installers. The Certified Applicator shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the installation of air barriers of the types being applied. Lead Certified Applicators shall perform or directly supervise all air/vapor barrier work on the project.

6. Air/vapor barrier installers must be trained and certified by ABAA/NECA (National Energy Conservation Association) and PSDI (Professional Skills Development Institute for energy conservation) in accordance with the training requirements outlined in the ULC S705.2 Installation Standard.

D. Sample Panel: A representative surface of not less than 100 sq. ft. shall be sprayed and approved before proceeding with spray insulation work. Include joint treatment between precast panels and precast panel and curtain wall frame. Architect shall select location.

E. Field Quality Assurance: Implement the ABAA Quality Assurance Program requirements. Cooperate with ABAA inspectors and independent testing and inspection agencies engaged by the Owner. Do not cover air barrier until it has been inspected, tested and accepted.

F. Materials utilized in the insulation and air barrier system shall comply with State and Local regulations controlling the used of volatile organic compounds (VOC’s).

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Temperature: Install air barrier within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by SPF manufacturer. Do not apply SPF to a damp or wet substrate.

B. Field Conditions: Do not install air barrier in snow, rain, fog, or mist.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072119 - 4

1.6 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. All trades making connections to members receiving spray insulation to install clips, hangers, and devices as required prior to installation of spray insulation.

B. Other trades to delay installing work which would prohibit application of spray insulation material until insulation application is completed.

C. Fireproofing of steel in the vicinity of sprayed insulation application must be complete prior to installation of SPF.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace insulation that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain airtight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturers standard form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of 2 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION

A. Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, foamed-in-place polyurethane produced by the catalyzed chemical reaction of polyisocyanates with polyhydroxyls, with stabilizers, fire retardants, and blowing agents added. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed

indexes of 25 and 450, respectively; ASTM E 84. 2. Density: Minimum 1.9 lb/cu. ft.; ASTM D 1622. 3. Compressive strength: 20 lbs/in2. 4. Thermal Resistivity Design Value: 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F;

ASTM C 518. a. Use above value regardless of manufacture's literature showing a higher

value. 5. Moisture Permeability: Not greater than 0.42 perm per inch, per procedure A

Desiccant Method at 73.4_F (23_C)] of ASTM E-96, when installed on the winter warm side of building envelope enclosing conditioned space.

6. Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57 psf), ASTM E 2178.

7. Closed Cell Content: Minimum 90 percent; ASTM D 6226.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Walltite by BASF Corporation, Wyandotte, MI, or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. BASF; Walltite US. 2. Bayer MaterialScience; EcoBay CC. 3. Demilec (USA) LLC; Heatlok Soya 200.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072119 - 5

4. Icynene Inc.; MD-C-200.


A. Primers: Manufacturer's standard factory-formulated primer.

B. Membrane at Transitions in Substrate and Connections to Adjacent Elements: Provide one of the following: 1. CCW-705 TWF by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing. 2. Perm-A-Barrier Flashing by Grace Construction Products. 3. Blueskin SA by Henry. 4. ExoAir 110 by Tremco, Inc. 5. Air-Shield by W. R. Meadows, Inc.

C. Transition Membrane between Air Barrier Membrane and Roofing and Other Adjacent Materials: Comply with both air barrier manufacturer’s recommendations and roofing material manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Flashing: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 304, soft annealed, with No. 2D finish;

minimum, 0.0156 inch thick.

E. Counterflashing: Provide one of the following: 1. CCW-705 TWF by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing. 2. Perm-A-Barrier Flashing by Grace Construction Products. 3. Blueskin TWF by Henry. 4. Poly-Wall Crack Guard by Protective Coatings Technology, Inc. 5. ExoAir TWF by Tremco, Inc. 6. Air-Shield by W. R. Meadows, Inc. 7. Hyload S/A Through Wall Flashing by Hyload, Inc. 8. Detail Strip by W. R. Meadows, Inc.

F. Accessories: As needed for complete installation and as recommended by air/vapor barrier manufacturer.

G. Thermal Barrier: For interior application, provide a spray-applied thermal barrier over foam plastic insulation that meets or exceeds the requirements of Code for separation of foam plastic from the building interior. See Thermal Barrier under Ohio Building Code (OBC) Chapter 26. Product must be acceptable to the sprayed polyurethane foam insulation manufacturer as suitable protective cover for the foam plastic 1. Cementitious Thermal Barrier: Provide one of the following:

a. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco TB-415; Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum.

b. W.R. Grace Co.; Monokote Z-3306; Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum. c. Location of Cementitious Thermal Barrier:

1) Typical, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Intumescent Thermal Barrier: Provide one of the following:

a. Demilec (USA) LLC; BlazeLok TBX. b. Thermal Product Research; Fire Shell TB. c. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco TB-15



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072119 - 6

d. Locations: Intumescent Thermal Barrier acceptable instead of cementitious thermal barrier under the following conditions: 1) Concealed from view conditions where sufficient room is available for

full expansion of the intumescent thermal barrier, as tested. 3. Bonding Agent: Manufacturers standard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements affecting performance of work. s 1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other

structural support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required for cladding system attachment.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is in accordance with requirements.

3. Verify that flashings and weather barrier have been installed in accordance with requirements.



A. Prime substrate if recommended by manufacturer.

B. Fill, cover, or tape joints and cracks in substrate that exceed a width of 1/4 inch. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks before applying polyurethane foam.

C. Install vapor retarder according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Wipe down metal surfaces to remove release agents or other non-compatible coatings using clean sponges or with a material chemically compatible with the primary air material.

3.3 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION

A. Transition Strip Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the following (unless manufacturer requires other procedures in writing based on project conditions or particular requirements of their recommended materials): 1. General: Transition membranes in contact with sealants visible from the exterior

of the building shall not change the color of the visible sealant. 2. Apply primer for transition membrane at rate recommended by material

manufacturer. Allow primer to dry completely before membrane application. Apply as many coats as necessary for proper adhesion.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072119 - 7

3. Position subsequent sheets of membrane applied above so that it overlaps the membrane sheet below by a minimum of 2.0 inches (50 mm), unless greater overlap is recommended by material manufacturer. Roll into place with roller ensuring all transition membranes are free of fish-mouths, wrinkles, delaminations, bubbles and voids.

4. Overlap horizontally adjacent pieces of membrane a minimum of 2.0 inches (50 mm), unless greater overlap is recommended by material manufacturer. Roll all areas of membrane including seams with roller.

5. Seal around all penetrations with termination mastic, extruded silicone sealant, membrane counter-flashing or other procedure in accordance with material Manufacturer’s recommendations.

6. Seal joints between concrete panels with transition membrane, terminate membrane to not cover fire-resistant joint system specified in Section 078500.

7. Connect air barrier in exterior wall assembly continuously to the air barrier of the roof, to concrete below-grade structures, to windows, curtain wall, storefront, louvers, exterior doors and other intersection conditions and perform sealing of penetrations, using accessory materials and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

8. To bridge gaps >1/8” (3 mm) in wall construction at changes in substrate plane or changes in adjoining materials, provide transition membranes or other material recommended by spray polyurethane foam material manufacturer.

9. Provide transition membrane, sealant, mastic, membrane counter-flashing or other material recommended by spray polyurethane foam manufacturer at 90 degree inside or outside corners. Follow spray polyurethane foam manufacturer’s instructions for instructions on how to treat interlocked CMU or structurally-attached 90 degree cast-in place concrete corners.

10. Provide mechanically fastened non-corrosive metal sheet to span gaps greater than 1.0 inch (25 mm) in substrate plane and to make a smooth transition from one plane to the other. Membrane shall be continuously supported by substrate.

11. At deflection and control joints, provide backup for the membrane to accommodate anticipated movement.

12. Apply a bead or trowel coat of mastic along membrane seams at reverse lapped seams, rough cuts, and as recommended by the manufacturer when membrane will be exposed to the elements.

13. At end of each working day, seal top edge of self-adhered membrane to substrate with termination mastic if exposed.

14. Do not allow materials to come in contact with chemically incompatible materials. 15. Do not expose membrane to sunlight longer than as recommended by the

manufacturer. 16. Ensure that membranes at terminations have a pull adhesive of 16 psi or greater. 17. Inspect installation prior to enclosing assembly and repair damaged areas with

closed cell, medium density spray polyurethane foam as recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Foamed-In-Place Insulation: Apply foamed-in-place insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply in consecutive passes to achieve thicknesses indicated. Passes shall be

not less than 1/2 inch and not greater than 2 inches.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072119 - 8

2. Install within tolerance of minus 1/4 inch to plus 1/2 inch. 3. Trim excess thickness of cured foam that might interfere with the application of

cladding assembly. 4. Finished surface of foam insulation to be free of voids and embedded foreign

objects. 5. Complete connections to other air barrier components and repair any gaps, holes

or other damage using material in a manner approved by primary air barrier material manufacturer.

B. Thermal Barrier: Cover the spray polyurethane foam with a thermal barrier when installed on the interior of the building where foam is not separated from the interior space by an envelope of 1/2 inch or thicker gypsum board.

1. Apply bonding agent over spray insulation according to manufacturer’s

recommendations. 2. Install thermal barrier to meet or exceed article "2603.4 Thermal Barrier" of the

Ohio Building Code.

3.5 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect insulation from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Clean overspray from adjacent work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 072500WEATHER BARRIERS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072500 - 1

SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fluid-applied weather barriers.

B. Related Sections:

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. "Weather Barrier", "AWB", "Air Barrier", and "Air Weather Barrier" are interchangeable terms for purposes of this contract.

B. Weather Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air, water, and vapor.

C. Weather -Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the weather barrier that provides continuity.

D. Weather -Barrier Assembly: The collection of weather-barrier materials and accessories applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air, water, and vapor movement through the wall.


A. Provide a weather barrier assembly that performs as a continuous barrier to water, air, and vapor and serves as a drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior any incidental condensation or water penetration. System shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, and thermally induced movement without failure.

B. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through weather barrier, at exterior wall

envelope, when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., under the following conditions: a. Test Exposure Duration: 2 hours, minimum. b. Exterior wall shall include at least one open control joint, one wall/eave

interface, and one sill. All tested openings and penetrations shall be representative of the intend end-use configuration; and demonstrate water tightness of weather barrier at intersecting dissimilar materials.

c. Exterior wall assemble shall be at least 4 feet by 8 feet in size. d. Weather Barrier shall not be cover with any material to protect it from wind

driven rain. e. Comply with Section 1403.2, Exception 2 of OBC (2011 Edition.)

C. Fire:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072500 - 2

1. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved wall assembly. There are multiple wall assemblies on the project and it may require products by more than one manufacturer to meet this PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT.

2. Weather Barrier System, including joint treatments and transition membranes, shall meet following requirement: a. Smoke Developed Index: Less than 450 per ASTM E84. b. Flame Spread Index: Less than 25 per ASTM E84.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Provide 1-1/2” scale drawings (or larger) showing relationship of weather barrier to: 1. Framing or blocking members. 2. Thermal Insulation. 3. Sheathing. 4. All exterior cladding and corner conditions. 5. Door or window frames. 6. Through-wall metal flashing. 7. Pipe, conduit and duct penetrations.

C. Manufacturer’s Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized field service representative, indicating observation of weather barrier assembly installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIERS

A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Retarding Membrane Weather Barrier: Synthetic polymer membrane. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Enershield-I by BASF, or a comparable product by one of the following: a. BASF; Enershield-I.

1) Required minimum thickness: 26 mils (wet). b. PROSOCO; R-GUARD®VB

1) Required minimum thickness: Two uniform coats at 15 wet mils. c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; Fire Resist Barritech NP.

1) Required minimum thickness: 40 mils (dry). d. Sto Corporation; StoGuard Vapor Seal.

1) Required minimum thickness: 26 mils (dry). 2. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm x sq. ft. of surface area at

1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. 3. Membrane Vapor Permeance: Not to exceed 1.0 perms; ASTM E 96 (the

desiccant method – unmodified). 4. Provide System approved and tested by Air Barrier Association of America

(ABAA). 5. Meet one of the following:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072500 - 3

a. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 500 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C. b. Meet or exceed the requirements of ICC-ES AC 212.


A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by weather barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with weather barrier. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Fabric Reinforcement: Sheathing fabric to be saturated with BASF Fluid-Applied Membrane for use at sheathing joints, penetrations and window rough openings.

C. Flashing and Transition Membrane/Strip: TF Membrane / WS Flash polyester-faced 30-mil self-adhesive membrane or TF Wrap / WS Wrap polyethylene-faced 20-mil self-adhesive membrane.

D. Mastics: As recommended by manufacturer.

E. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of weather barrier material.

F. Weather Barrier Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in weather barrier.

G. Transition Strip: Vapor-retarding, 40-mil- thick, smooth-surfaced, self-adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick polyethylene film with release liner backing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or

other contaminants. 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended

by manufacturer. 3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. 4. Ensure that penetrating work by other trades is in place and complete. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.


A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for weather barrier application.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072500 - 4

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by weather barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove contaminants which will affect adhesion of the fluid-applied membrane

D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

E. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.

F. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.

G. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates.

H. Bridge and cover isolation joints, expansion joints, and, discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-to-deck joints with overlapping transition membrane, double layered. 1. Create double layered joint cover with 4-inch wide transition strip, centered over

joint, and adhered to surface of cover strip to create bond break by facing polyethylene film of 4 inch strip toward joint.

I. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

J. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for weather barrier.


A. Install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by weather barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed

to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

C. Apply treatment to exterior gypsum joints and screw heads as per weather barrier material manufacturer.

D. Position subsequent sheets of transition material so that membrane overlaps the membrane sheet below by a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm), unless greater overlap is recommended by the material manufacturer. Ensure transition membrane is securely sealed onto substrate with roller.

E. Overlap horizontally adjacent pieces of transition material a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm), unless greater overlap is recommended by the material manufacturer. Roll all areas of transition strip including seams with roller.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072500 - 5

F. Provide transition material at changes in substrate plane (with bead of sealant/mastic, membrane counter-flashing or other material recommended by material manufacturer) under membrane to eliminate all sharp 90 degree inside corners and to make a smooth transition from one plane to another.

G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135. 1. Install transition strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch

fillets of termination mastic on horizontal inside corners.

H. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over weather barrier and adjacent substrates. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact. Create end dams to promote drainage of water to exterior. 1. Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.

I. Seal top of through-wall flashings to weather barrier sheet with an additional 6-inch- wide, modified bituminous strip.

J. Seal exposed edges of transition strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.

K. Install sheets and auxiliary materials to form a continuous seal with adjacent construction and to maintain a continuous barrier.

L. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of weather barrier membrane.

M. Apply joint sealants forming part of weather barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

N. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in weather barrier. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with weather barrier sheet extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

O. Do not cover weather barrier until it has been inspected by manufacturer's representative and Owner’s testing agency.

P. Correct deficiencies in or remove weather barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply weather barrier components.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072500 - 6

3.4 FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Fluid Applied Membrane Weather Barrier: Install weather barrier accessories and fluid-applied membrane weather barrier material to provide continuity throughout the building envelope in a shingle fashion. Install materials in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions and the following (unless manufacturer recommends other procedures in writing based on project conditions or particular requirements of their recommended materials):

B. Apply membrane to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous barrier according to weather barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Apply within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.

D. Install fluid-applied membrane using equipment and methods recommended by manufacturer, to achieve a dry film thickness as required by the material manufacturer.

E. Apply strip and transition strip a minimum of 1 inch onto cured membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Inspections: Weather barrier materials and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of weather barrier system has been achieved throughout the building

envelope with no gaps or holes. 2. Continuous structural support of weather barrier system has been provided. 3. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been

maintained. 4. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 5. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 6. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements

and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths.

7. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 8. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrates. 9. Compatible materials have been used. 10. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been

provided. 11. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) have complied with

requirements for cleanliness, preparation and priming of surfaces, structural support, integrity, and continuity of barrier.

12. All penetrations have been sealed.


A. Protect weather barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072500 - 7

1. Protect weather barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace weather barrier exposed for more than days allowed by manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072500 - 8



SECTION 072616UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072616 - 1

SECTION 072616 - UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vapor retarder under concrete slabs on grade.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for vapor retarder sheet and installation accessories. Include data from tests performed within 18 months of submittal showing compliance with specified standard.

B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of vapor retarder work. Include details for edges at walls, grade beams, and the like. Include details for penetrating elements including conduit, piping, and structural members.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VAPOR RETARDER

A. Plastic Sheet Vapor Retarder: Meeting ASTM E 1745, Class A. Acceptable types include: 1. Minimum 12-mil thick polyolefin sheet:

a. "Stego Wrap", Stego Industries. b. "Moistop Ultra A", Fortifiber Corp. c. “VaporBlock 15”; Raven Industries. d. “Vapor-Mat”; W.R. Meadows. e. "Yellow Guard" 15 mil, by Poly-America.

2. Reinforced plastic laminate: a. "Griffolyn Type-85"

B. Accessory Products: 1. Provide manufacturer's recommended self-adhesive plastic seam tape for seams

and penetrations. 2. Penetration boots: Provide manufacturer's recommended accessory system for

sealing pipe and conduit penetrations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surface to receive vapor retarder is compacted and trimmed smooth.


SECTION 072616UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 072616 - 2

B. Verify that all work that will penetrate vapor retarder is complete and rigidly installed.

C. Confirm locations and details of vapor retarder termination.

3.2 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Place plastic sheet vapor retarder directly on compacted granular fill. Place sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.

C. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with per manufacturer's recommendations with pressure-sensitive tape.

D. Tape seal vapor retarder around columns, pipe, and conduit penetrations.

E. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 074217METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL

WALL PANELS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 074217 - 1

SECTION 074217 - METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes metal composite material wall panels (MCMP).



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels;

details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim and anchorage, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples: For each type of metal composite material panel indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

D. NFPA 285: Provide test reports that substantiate that the work of this Section conforms to NFPA 285 and Section 2603 of the Ohio Building Code.

E. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.

F. Maintenance data.


A. Supplier/installer shall have a minimum 15 years proven experience and must have completed at least 5 major projects in the specified aluminum composite material panel system.

B. Fabricator shall meet the standards of the Premium MCM Fabricator Certification program and be certified by Metal Construction Association (MCA) as a Premium MCM Fabricator.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical metal composite material panel assembly, copper and

aluminum faced, as shown on Drawings, including corner, supports, attachments, and accessories.



WALL PANELS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 074217 - 2

2. Water-Spray Test: Conduct water-spray test of mockup of metal composite material panel assembly, testing for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal composite material panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal composite material panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during installation.

E. Copper Panels: Wear gloves when handling to prevent fingerprints and soiling of surface.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal composite material panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal composite material panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.



WALL PANELS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 074217 - 3

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal composite material panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design Metal Composite Material Wall Panels and support structure that is part of cavity wall insulation system.

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal composite material panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 330: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Other Loads: As indicated on drawings. 4. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span. 5. Increase Base Design Wind Loads as required by ASCE 7. Do not decease

below 20 psf.

C. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

D. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 14.61 psf minimum, after 15 minutes.

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 degC), ambient; 180 deg F (100

degC), material surfaces.

G. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Metal composite material wall panel system passes NFPA 285 testing. 1. Test by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. a. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2. Metal composite material wall panel system shall include all components of exterior wall supporting the metal composite wall panels.



WALL PANELS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 074217 - 4

H. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide composite metal wall panels with a flame-spread index of 25 or less and a smoke-developed index of 450 or less, per ASTM E 84 when tested as an assembly in maximum thickness intended for use.

I. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the

listings of another qualified testing agency.

J. Intermediate Scale Multistory Fire Test: Each wall assemble that includes plastic insulation must pass NFPA 285 in conformance with requirements of Chapter 26 of the Ohio Building Code.

2.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS (MCMP)

A. Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory-formed and -assembled, metal composite material wall panels fabricated from two metal facings that are bonded to a solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment assembly’s components, panel stiffeners, and accessories required for weathertight system. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. 3A Composites USA, Inc.; Alucobond Plus. b. Alcoa Inc.; Reynobond. c. CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Formabond Wall System.

B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels (MCMP-1): Formed with 0.020-inch- (0.50-mm-) thick, coil-coated anodized aluminum sheet facings. 1. Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch (4 mm), minimum. . 2. Core: Fire retardant. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Fluoropolymer in accordance with Section 050513. b. Color: As indicated on drawings.

C. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels (MCMP-2): Formed with 0.020-inch- (0.50-mm-) thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet facings. 1. Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch (4 mm), minimum. . 2. Core: Fire retardant. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:


D. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels (MCMP-3): Formed with 0.020-inch- (0.50-mm-) thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet facings. 1. Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch (4 mm), minimum. . 2. Core: Fire retardant. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:




WALL PANELS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 074217 - 5

4. MCMP-3 is provided by Section 084423.10 - Custom Structural-Sealant-Glazed Curtain Walls.

E. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels (MCMP-4): Formed with 0.020-inch- (0.50-mm-) thick, coil-coated anodized aluminum sheet facings. 1. Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch (4 mm), minimum. . 2. Core: Fire retardant. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Match finish on curtain wall. 4. MCMP-4 is provided by Section 084423.10 - Custom Structural-Sealant-Glazed

Curtain Walls Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.

F. Attachment Assembly: Manufacturer's standard.

2.3 WEATHER BARRIER

A. Provide in conformance with Section 072500 - Weather Barriers

2.4 COMPOSITE FRAMING SUPPORT - CLIP SYSTEM WITH THERMAL INSULATION

A. Provide in conformance with Section 070544 - Composite Framing Support - Clip System with Thermal Insulation


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (ClassAZM150) aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal composite material panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal composite material panels unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal composite material panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal composite material panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite material panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.



WALL PANELS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 074217 - 6

E. Panel Sealants: Provide silicon sealants as specified in Section 079200 - Sealants.

2.6 FABRICATORS

A. One of the following: 1. Sobotec Ltd., Hamilton, Ontario, Canada (905-578-1278). 2. Kanalco Ltd., Bownamville, Ontario, Canada (905-623-2303) www.kanalco.com. 3. Riverside Group, Windsor, Ontario, Canada (519-645-1321)

www.riversidegroup.net.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Fabricate metal composite material panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

C. Panel Type System: 1. MCMP-1 (Sealant System): SL-1000 by Sobotec. 2. MCMP-2 (Sealant System): SL-1000 by Sobotec. 3. MCMP-3: Not applicable.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.

5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"

or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.



WALL PANELS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 074217 - 7

2.8 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Aluminum Panels and Accessories: 1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other

structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing

or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite material panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal composite material panels before installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel manufacturer's written recommendations.



WALL PANELS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 074217 - 8

3.3 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal composite material panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal composite material panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal composite material panels. 2. Flash and seal metal composite material panels at perimeter of all openings.

Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal composite material panels are installed.

3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal composite material panel work proceeds. 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel

splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 7. Align bottoms of metal composite material panels and fasten with blind rivets,

bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.

8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.

B. Fasteners: 1. Typical: Stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Aluminum Panels to Aluminum Substrate: Use aluminum or stainless-steel

fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use aluminum fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

3. Copper Panels: Use copper, stainless-steel or hardware-bronze fasteners.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.

D. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal composite material wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels. 1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery,

panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery, and panel-system joint seals.

E. Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance requirements specified. 1. Wet Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal

composite material wall panels with sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

2. Dry Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite material wall panels with manufacturer's standard gasket system.

3. Rainscreen Systems: Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.



WALL PANELS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 074217 - 9

F. Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to panel clips with manufacturer's standard fasteners. 1. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent panels with sealant backing

and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

2. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite material wall panels with manufacturer's standard gaskets.

G. Track-Support Installation: Install support assembly at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Use manufacturer's standard horizontal tracks and vertical drain channels that provide support and secondary drainage assembly, draining to the exterior at horizontal joints through drain tube. Attach metal composite material wall panels to tracks by interlocking panel edges with manufacturer's standard "T" clips. 1. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to perimeter extrusions with

manufacturer's standard fasteners. 2. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.

H. Rainscreen-Principle Installation: Install using manufacturer's standard assembly with vertical channel that provides support and secondary drainage assembly, draining at base of wall. Notch vertical channel to receive support pins. Install vertical channels supported by channel brackets or adjuster angles and at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach metal composite material wall panels by inserting horizontal support pins into notches in vertical channels and into flanges of panels. Leave horizontal and vertical joints with open reveal. 1. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to be installed and removed without

disturbing adjacent panels. 2. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.

I. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel

assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal composite material panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.

J. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that

is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof performance.

3.4 Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24



WALL PANELS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 074217 - 10

inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal composite material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal composite material panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 075423THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN

(TPO) ROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 075423 - 1

SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system. 2. Roof insulation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.


A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Sheet roofing, of color required. 2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.

E. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.

F. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Two special warranties required. Manufacturer’s warranty shall provide primary coverage and be responsible initially to satisfy Owner’s claims. Contractor’s warranty shall provide coverage to the extent manufacturer’s warranty does not satisfy Owner’s claims.



(TPO) ROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 075423 - 2

1. Application of warranty requirements herein shall not limit the Owner’s rights to remedies normally available under prevailing local laws. Owner reserves the right to utilize their rights under the special warranties, prevailing laws, or both to the extent allowed by law.

B. Special Roofing Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer's customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special warranty includes entire roof assembly from the structural deck up,

including but not limited to, membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, roofing accessories, roof walkways, and other components of membrane roofing system.

2. Promise to provide full labor and materials as required to restore roof system to weathertight condition without cost to Owner.

3. Wind Speed: Cover wind speed of not less than 72 mph at 10 meters above ground level. Do not reference Beaufort Scale or similar scales.

4. Include no exclusion for ponded water on roof membrane. 5. Exceptions: Warranty may exclude coverage for the following:

a. Abuse or misuse of roof system by Owner. b. Acts of God and other "natural disasters" except wind as specified herein. c. Winds in excess of specified Wind Speed. d. Fire (after occupancy by Owner).

6. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Roofing Contractor’s Warranty: Contractor’s customized form, without monetary limitation, in which contractor agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Comply with requirements for “Special Roofing Manufacturer’s Warranty”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide TPO-Sure Weld roof by Carlisle SynTec or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 2. Firestone Building Products. 3. GAF Materials Corporation. 4. GenFlex Roofing Systems. 5. Johns Manville.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation fasteners for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.



(TPO) ROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 075423 - 3


A. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

B. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the uplift pressures. Uplift pressures are indicated on structural drawing S001. Values below include a safety factor: 1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 100 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 90 lbf/sq. ft. 3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 68 lbf/sq. ft. 4. Parapets: 80 lbf/sq. ft.

D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class B; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.3 TPO ROOFING

A. Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet. 1. Roofs:

a. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal. 1) Thickness of TPO over Scrim: Not less than 0.024 inches as an

average of three areas. b. Exposed Face Color: White.

2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction. 2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall

comply with the following limits for VOC content: a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L. f. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. g. Non-membrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. h. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. i. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.



(TPO) ROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 075423 - 4

j. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils (1.4 mm) thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.

E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

F. Penetration Sealant: Provide material suitable to span gap and remain in place for life of roof warranty. Provide one of the following: 1. Froth-Pak Foam Sealant by Dow. 2. Silicone Sealant as specified in Section 079200 - Sealants. 3. Weather Barrier as specified in Section 072500.

G. Thermal Barrier: For interior application, provide a spray-applied thermal barrier over foam plastic insulation that meets or exceeds the requirements of Code for separation of foam plastic from the building interior. See Thermal Barrier under Ohio Building Code (OBC) Chapter 26. Product must be acceptable to the sprayed polyurethane foam insulation manufacturer as suitable protective cover for the foam plastic 1. Cementitious Thermal Barrier: Provide one of the following:

a. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco TB-415; Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum.

b. W.R. Grace Co.; Monokote Z-3306; Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum. c. Location of Cementitious Thermal Barrier:

1) Typical, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Intumescent Thermal Barrier: Provide one of the following:

a. Demilec (USA) LLC; BlazeLok TBX. b. Thermal Product Research; Fire Shell TB. c. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco TB-15 d. Locations: Intumescent Thermal Barrier acceptable instead of

cementitious thermal barrier under the following conditions: 1) Concealed from view conditions where sufficient room is available for

full expansion of the intumescent thermal barrier, as tested. 3. Bonding Agent: Manufacturers standard.

H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

approved by manufacturer of the TPO roof membrane. :



(TPO) ROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 075423 - 5

2. Locations: Insulation layers below Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation.

B. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, with factory-applied facing board on one major surface, as indicated below by type, and felt or glass-fiber mat facer on the other. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Firestone Building Products. c. GAF Materials Corporation. d. Homasote Company. e. Hunter Panels. f. Insulfoam LLC; a Carlisle company. g. Johns Manville.

C. Thermal Value 1. R-Value per Inch of Thickness: 5.0, maximum. 2. Provide continuous insulation with an R-Value of twenty or more. 3. Provide Two layers:

a. One Layer 2.0 inch thick, R = 10. b. Top layer 2 inches thick, R = 10 without coverboard.

D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered polyisocyanurate insulation boards fabricated to slope of not less than 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48) unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation

shapes as required to provide positive slope to drains. Slope at 1/2 inch per 12 inches.

2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.

C. Cover Board: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

SecurShield HD FR by Carlisle SynTec or a comparable product by one of the approved roofing manufacturer's.

2. Material: High-density (109 psi max), closed -cell Polyisocyanurate foam core with coated-glass fiber-mat facer laminated to both side of core.

3. R -Value: 2.5 per 1/2 inch of thickness. 4. Thickness: 1/2 inch.



(TPO) ROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 075423 - 6

D. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application.

E. Roof Deck Sealant Materials: 1. Joint Sealant:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Liquidarmor - CM Flashing and Sealant by Dow Chemical Company; or a comparable product by one of the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company. 2) Comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2. Penetration Sealant: Polyurethane spray foam. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide Styrofoam - CM Series by Dow Chemical Company or a comparable product by one of the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company. 2) Comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

b. Certainteed; MemBrain.

2.7 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 1. Locations:

a. At entrance onto roof from door or roof hatch. b. Others:

1) As indicated on drawing 2) As required for roof warranty.

b. Hastings Pavement Company, LLC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced,

and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck

at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with

requirements in Section 053100 "Steel Decking."




(TPO) ROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 075423 - 7

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition.

D. Gaps between Metal Roof Deck and Another material: Fill gap with Penetration Sealant to stop air and moisture movement between area above metal roof deck and below metal roof deck. At any location where foam insulation is used and exceeds 100 square inches provide a thermal barrier over the insulation, over interior side of foam.

E. Seal voids at bottom of roof deck to prohibit the passage of air between the air space above the roof deck and air space below the roof deck. Seal voids with "Roof Deck Sealant Materials" or other materials approved by the Architect.

3.4 ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

C. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.

D. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten first layer of insulation to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure

at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. a. Metal Deck: Fasteners to occur in top flute of metal deck, only.



(TPO) ROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 075423 - 8

2. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

E. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together. 1. Set cover board over top layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread

insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

3.5 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.

B. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of roofing.

D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing if required to meet Performance Requirements.

E. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to

seal cut edges of sheet. 2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample

areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with

requirements.

F. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.



(TPO) ROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 075423 - 9

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION



(TPO) ROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 075423 - 10



SECTION 076000FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 076000 - 1

SECTION 076000 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured Products:

a. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing. 2. Formed Products:

a. Formed sheet metal fabrications. 3. Flexible flashing.

B. Related Sections: 1. 05 0513 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal: For factory applied, heat cured

coatings on exposed sheet metal surfaces. 2. 07 7100 - Roof Specialties: For manufactured roof sheet metal fabrications.

1.2 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design flashing and sheet metal, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified Professional Engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. General: 1. Flashing and sheet metal assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads,

structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

C. Flashing and sheet metal shall be supplied and installed to positive and negative wind loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather; without failure: 1. Wind Speed: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Exposure: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Importance Factor: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 4. Safety Factor: Apply a safety factor of 2 to wind loads.

D. Copings and Edge of Roof Flashings: 1. Manufacture and install copings and roof-edge flashings tested according to

SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures: a. Design Pressure: 115 psf.

E. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material

surfaces.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 076000 - 2

F. Flashing and Sheet Metal shall not have waves, warps, buckles, oil-canning, fastening stresses or distortion.

G. Provide spring-lock counter flashing over edge of roof membrane that is easily removable to allow for reroofing or replacement of roofing. Spring-lock flashing not required at metal copings that act as counter flashing for the roof membrane, and are easily removable and re-installed.

H. Meet or exceed SMACNA requirements and comply with the recommendations of the NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" applicable to flashing and sheet metal.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed

details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and

location in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing

of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of roof-penetration flashing. 8. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes,

crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. 9. Include details of special conditions. 10. Include details of connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified. 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished

seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.

3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample. 4. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for

each color required.

D. Maintenance data.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 076000 - 3


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.

C. Flashing and Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

D. Metal thicknesses stated in the specifications are minimum thickness of metal without coatings and shall be increased as required to meet PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS and Construction Document requirements.

E. Flexible membranes flashing materials that deteriorate when exposed to ultraviolet light shall not be used as a material exposed to sunlight in final construction.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Sheet metal associated with roofing is a part of the warranty required for roofing system except length of warranty is 2 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. As-Milled Finish: One-side bright mill finish.

a. Locations: 1) Where indicated 2) Where approved by Architect.

2. Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is indicated, pretreat with white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil. a. Locations:

1) Where indicated on drawings.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 076000 - 4

3. Exposed Finishes: Provide fluoropolymer coating in conformance with Section 050513 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal. a. Colors:

1) Flashing and Sheet Metal for Glazed Framing: Match color of metal in glazed framing system.

2) Flashing and Sheet Metal for Louvers: Match color louver. 3) Others: As selected by Architect.

4. Locations: a. Exposed flashing at Louvers, unless otherwise indicated. b. Exposed flashing at glazed framing systems, unless otherwise indicated. c. Other Locations: Where indicated.

C. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: Provide one of the following: 1. ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead-soft, fully annealed stainless-steel sheet

of minimum uncoated thickness indicated; coated on both sides with a zinc-tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent tin), with factory-applied gray preweathering. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: 1) Follansbee Steel; TCS II. 2) Comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2. Stainless Steel complying with DIN 1.4510 and Din 1744; coated on both sides with tin (100 percent tin) to a thickness of 20 microns, and will weather naturally. a. Thickness: 0.015" thick, minimum. b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, one of the following: 1) ROOFINOX® Terne. 2) Comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

3. Locations: Typical.

2.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING

A. Self-Adhering Flexible Flashing: SBS-modified bituminous sheet membrane, 30 mil minimum thickness, laminated to a cross-laminated polyethylene film, in factory cut widths. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing"; W.R. Grace & Company. b. "Blueskin SA"; Henry.

2. Locations: Transition flashing at sheathing, metal flashings, and other locations indicated.

B. High Temperature Self-Adhering Membrane Flashing: SBS-modified or butyl based bituminous sheet membrane, 30-40 mil thickness, laminated to a cross-laminated polyethylene film, in factory cut widths. One of the following: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Vycor Ultra"; W.R. Grace & Company.

2. Locations: Beneath metal copings, metal plate assemblies, and other locations indicated.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 076000 - 5

C. Foil-Faced Self-Adhering Membrane Flashing: SBS-modified or butyl based bituminous sheet membrane, 30-40 mil thickness, integrally laminated to a glass scrim reinforced aluminum foil, in factory cut widths. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Foilskin"; Henry.

D. Liquid Mastic: Liquid mastic recommended by flashing manufacturer.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete flashing and sheet metal installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer

head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic

caps or factory-applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable

for metal being fastened. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless

steel.

C. Solder: 1. For Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin and as

recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in flashing and sheet metal and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. 1. Locations: Expansion joints with limited movement and sealant not exposed to

sunlight.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 076000 - 6

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.4 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS

A. Provide in conformance with Article, REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS, in Section 077100 - Roof Specialties, including reglets and flashings at foundation wall. 1. Furnish reglets at poured in place foundation wall to trade contractor designated

by Construction Manager. Construction Manager to designate trade contractor responsible for installation of reglets.


A. General: Custom fabricate flashing and sheet metal to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form flashing and sheet metal without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

E. Seams: 1. Typical: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be

seamed, form seams, and solder. 2. Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and

seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 076000 - 7

2.6 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. General: 1. Fabricate flashings with end dams to direct water to the exterior and preclude

water from entering into adjacent construction. 2. Cut edges of Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet:

a. Zinc Coated ANSI 304 or 316 Stainless Steel: No protective coating require.

b. Other types of Stainless Steel Coated with Zinc: Tin cut edges with solder where flashing is exposed to view: 1) Including edges that are not exposed to view, but the flashing

assemble is exposed to view.

B. Through Wall Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.018 inch (0.46 mm) thick.

C. Roof-Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Provide in conformance with Section 077100 - Roof Specialties.

D. Copings: Provide in conformance with Section 077100 - Roof Specialties. 1. Copings at curtain wall are provided with curtain wall.

E. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.018 inch (0.46 mm) thick.

F. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.018 inch (0.46 mm) thick.

G. Counterflashing and flashing receivers that counterflashes roofing membrane at exterior walls and parapets shall comply with requirements for REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS as specified in Section 077100 - Roof Specialties.

H. Where springlok type flashing is shown on drawings provide REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS as specified in Section 077100 - Roof Specialties.

I. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.018 inch (0.46 mm) thick.

J. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 076000 - 8

K. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick.

L. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend a minimum of 4 inches extension beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch

a. Finish: Prefinished in accordance with Section 050513 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal. 1) Color: Match color of metal of item in opening.

M. Insulation Cap: Aluminum, prefinished dark brown paint, minimum 0.0375 inch thick. Custom "J" shaped device to cover top of exposed foundation insulation specified elsewhere. Fabricate from 8 inch wide stock. 1. Short Leg: 1 inch. 2. Top: Inside dimension as required for snug fit over insulation. Bevel top to

slope 1/2 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and

securely anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or

backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 076000 - 9


A. General: Anchor flashing and sheet metal and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed flashing and sheet metal shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete flashing and sheet metal system. 1. Install flashing and sheet metal true to line and levels indicated. Provide

uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install flashing and sheet metal to fit substrates and to result in watertight

performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed flashing and sheet metal without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of flashing and sheet metal is not permitted. 7. Provide end dams at ends of all flashing. 8. Seams:

a. Typical: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

b. Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.

c. Seams in Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel: Provide soldered flat lock seams, unless otherwise indicated; comply with metal manufacturer's recommendations for tinning, soldering and cleaning joints.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel flashing and sheet

metal with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws and metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 076000 - 10

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 1. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of

installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder

recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.

2. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper.

H. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.

3.3 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use type of flexible flashing as specified and as recommended by the

manufacturer. 2. Clean, prepare, prime, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written

instructions. 3. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at

flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 4. Apply in a shingled manner to shed water without interception by any exposed

sheet edges. Install free of wrinkles and fishmouths. 5. Roll firmly to enhance adhesion to substrates.

3.4 SHEET METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.

B. Copings: As specified in Section 077100 - Roof Specialties.

C. Immediately prior to setting joint covers, apply continuous bead of sealant on both sides of joints as needed to form seal.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 076000 - 11

D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant.

F. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend a minimum of 4 inches beyond full width of opening and provide end dams in flashing to promote drainage to exterior and not into adjacent wall construction. Section 079200 - Sealants shall provide weeps in sealant joints at head and sill conditions to promote drainage to exterior. Coordinate location of weeps with Section 079200 - Sealants.

G. Insulation Cap: Install metal cap over exposed top of board. Set level with joints tightly fitted. Miter corners. Leave ready to be sealed to building under another section.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as flashing and sheet metal are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 076000 - 12



SECTION 077100ROOF SPECIALTIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077100 - 1

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Manufactured roof specialties as follows: 1. Copings. 2. Roof-edge flashings. 3. Reglets and counterflashings.

B. Related Sections: 1. 050513 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal: For factory applied, heat cured

coatings on exposed sheet metal surfaces. 2. 076000 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: For shop- and field-fabricated sheet metal

items.


A. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings roof-edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures: 1. Design Pressure: 80 lbf/sq. ft..

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Product test reports.

E. Maintenance data. 1. SPRI ES-1 Test Reports Roof-edge Flashings and Copings: Include the test

requirements for securing blocking and nailers to substrate.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain roof specialties approved by manufacturer providing roofing-system warranty specified in 075423 - Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077100 - 2


A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof-specialty installation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify profiles and tolerances of roof-specialty substrates by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with flashing, trim, and construction of parapets, roof deck, roof and wall panels, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Roofing-System Warranty: Roof specialties are included in warranty provisions of the associated roof membrane specified in Division 7.

B. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

2.2 CONCEALED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077100 - 3

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20

deg F.

B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads

matching color of sheet metal. 2. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or passivated Series

300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 5. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel

or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.

D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. 1. Locations: Expansion joints with limited movement and sealant not exposed to

sunlight.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

G. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, lead-free solder.

2.5 COPINGS

A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077100 - 4

1. Profile: Custom. 2. Coping-Cap Material: Formed aluminum, thickness as required to meet

performance requirements, but not less than 0.050 inches. . a. Finish:

1) Fluoropolymer in accordance with Section 050513. 2) Color: Custom color as selected by Architect.

3. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded or mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.

4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on, fabricated from coping-cap material. 5. Snap-on-Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12

incheswide, with integral cleats. 6. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as coping cover. 7. Fasteners: No exposed fasteners permitted.

2.6 ROOF-EDGE FLASHINGS

A. Canted Roof-Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on or compression clamped metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feetand a continuous formed- or extruded-aluminum anchor bar with integral drip-edge cleat to engage fascia cover. Provide matching corner units. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Econosnap 3 by Hickman Company, W. P. or comparable products as follows: a. Metal Era, Inc. b. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Provide roof edge flashing by same manufacturer as the coping. 3. Fascia Cover: Fabricated from the following exposed metal:

a. Formed Aluminum: b. Thickness: 0.075 inches, minimum.

4. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.

5. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as fascia cover.

B. Aluminum Finish: 1. Fluoropolymer in accordance with Section 050513. 2. Color: Custom color as selected by Architect.

2.7 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Springlok Flashing by Fry Reglet or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Fry Reglet Corporation: Springlok Flashing. 2. Hickman Company, W. P. Company: “Drive-Lock-In-Wall Counter Flashing". 3. Comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

B. Locations: 1. Provide at flashing over top edge of roof membrane to allow replacement of

roofing. Not required at roof parapets where roof membrane terminated under metal parapet coping.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077100 - 5

C. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick. 2. Provide factory mitered and sealed corners, connector clips, joint covers, anchor

clips, and necessary accessories for proper installation as detailed. 3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to

substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. a. Locations:

1) Typical 2) Roof side of precast architectural concrete panels.

4. Stucco Type, Embedded: Provide reglets with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness of applied finish materials. a. Locations: Where indicated.

5. Concrete Type, Embedded: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends. a. Locations: Where indicated.

6. Masonry Type, Embedded: Provide reglets with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. a. Locations: Typical at masonry wall construction.

D. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets or through0000-wall-flashing receiver and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal: 1. Formed Aluminum: 0.024 inch thick. 2. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.022-inch thickness.

E. Accessories: 1. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to

secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where reglet is provided separate from metal counterflashing.

2. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.

F. Aluminum Finish: 1. Fluoropolymer in conformance with Section 050513.

a. Color: Custom color as selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077100 - 6

C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and securely anchored.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Apply continuously under copings, roof-edge specialties, and reglets and

counterflashings, except where roof membrane is detailed at this location. 2. Coordinate application of self-adhering sheet underlayment under roof specialties

with requirements for continuity with adjacent air barrier materials.


A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems. 1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited

oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Install underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle

fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. Roll laps of self-adhering sheet underlayment with roller; cover within 14 days.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel roof specialties

with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties. 1. 12 feet (3.6 m) with no joints within 18 inches (450 mm) of corners or

intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F,

set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077100 - 7

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.

E. Seal joints with sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.

3.4 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor copings to meet performance requirements. 1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor

plates anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements.

3.5 ROOF-EDGE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.

3.6 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Embedded Reglets: See Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installation of reglets.

B. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings.

C. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077100 - 8

D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 077200ROOF ACCESSORIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077200 - 1

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Roof curbs. 2. Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 roofing Sections for roofing accessories. 2. 076000 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: For shop- and field-formed metal flashing,

roof-drainage systems, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 3. 077100 - Roof Specialties: For manufactured fasciae, copings, gravel stops,

and counterflashing.


A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.


D. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment,

ductwork, piping, and conduit. 4. Required clearances.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077200 - 2

E. Operation and maintenance data.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation. 1. Mill-Phosphatized Finish: Manufacturer's standard for field painting, unless

indicated otherwise.

B. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 (AZM150) coated. 1. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment

and white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm).

C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTMB209M), manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. Mill Finish: As manufactured, unless indicated otherwise.

D. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTMB221M), manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill finished.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

F. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F, thickness as indicated.

C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness and thermal resistivity as indicated.

D. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077200 - 3

F. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.

G. Sealants: As recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated.

H. Underlayment: 1. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting

of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

2.3 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: a. Greenheck Fan Corporation. b. Pate Company (The). c. Thybar Corporation.

B. Material: Zinc-coated (G90 galvanized) steel sheet, 0.052 inch (1.32 mm) thick. 1. Finish: Mill phosphatized .

C. Construction: 1. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick glass-fiber board

insulation. 2. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish. 3. Factory-installed wood nailer at top of curb, continuous around curb perimeter. 4. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to

conform to roof profile. 5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 16 inches unless otherwise indicated. 6. Top Surface: Level around perimeter with roof slope accommodated by sloping

the deck-mounting flange.

2.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced metal equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: a. Greenheck Fan Corporation. b. Pate Company (The). c. Thybar Corporation.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077200 - 4

B. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.079 inch (2.01 mm) thick. 1. Finish: Mill phosphatized .

C. Construction: 1. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick glass-fiber board

insulation. 2. Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard

thickness and finish. 3. Factory-installed continuous wood nailers 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) wide at tops of

equipment supports. 4. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same

metal and finish as equipment support. 5. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to

conform to roof profile. 6. Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches (300 mm) unless

otherwise indicated, but not less than 9 inches above elevation of roof membrane.

7. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height to accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each other. Equip supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without

warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting

indicated loads. 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required

to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,

leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077200 - 5

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel roof accessories

with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended slip sheet.

C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb on top of wood blocking provided by Section 061053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry and so surface is level.

D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each other.

E. Seal joints with sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.

B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Clean off excess sealants.

E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 077200 - 6



SECTION 078100APPLIED FIREPROOFING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078100 - 1

SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sprayed fire-resistive material (SFRM). 2. Related Sections: 078413 - Penetration Firestopping: For fire-resistance-rated

firestopping systems. 3. 078500 - Fire Resistant Joint Systems: For insulation installed as part of a

perimeter fire-resistant joint system.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Concealed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind other construction when the Work is completed

B. Exposed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are exposed to view, not concealed, when the Work is completed.

C. Cementitious Fireproofing: Factory-mixed dry formulation of binders and aggregates, but not mineral fibers, mixed with water at Project site to form a pumpable slurry for subsequent conveyance and application.


A. For beams and column sizes not included within the required UL fire resistance design numbers, the Contractor is responsible to adjust the thickness of sprayed protection material based on the equations listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.



1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Framing plans, schedules, or both, indicating the following: 1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating. 2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance

rating of each structural component and assembly. 4. Treatment of fireproofing after application.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078100 - 2

D. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.

E. Manufacturer's Certification: Manufacture shall certify that the Fire-Resistance Designs submitted are not load restricted.

F. Test Reports: Submit copies of ASTM E 119 or UL 263 full-scale fire test reports demonstrating performance of manufacturers' product(s) in the specified and/or submitted U.L. Fire Resistant Design(s).

G. Preconstruction Test Reports: For SFRM fireproofing.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects to set quality standards for materials and execution and for preconstruction testing. 1. Build mockup of each type of fireproofing and different substrate and each

required finish as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the



C. Fire-Resistance Design listings must state that the loading was determined by Allowable Stress Method or Resistance Design Method. UL design listings requiring a load factor restriction factor are not allowed.


A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on fireproofing. 1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials

and construction.

B. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. 1. Inspector shall test and observe condition of steel substrate, for applied

fireproofing, before the fireproofing is applied. 2. Bond Strength: Test for cohesive and adhesive strength according to ASTM E

736. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.

3. Density: Test for density according to ASTM E 605. Provide density indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078100 - 3

4. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, attests that primers or coatings are compatible with fireproofing.

5. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

6. For materials failing tests, obtain applied-fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated bonding agents or primers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing for each fire-resistance design from single source.

C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted

otherwise. 2. Restrained floor beams shall use UL “N " series designs, only. 3. Restrained roof beams shall use UL “S " series designs, only.

D. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.

2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Physical Properties: 1. Application: Designated for exterior use by a qualified testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according

to requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm).

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes

of 10 or less according to ASTM E 84. 5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937. 6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759. 7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to

ASTM E 760. 8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270g/sq.m) in 24 hours

according to ASTM E 859. 9. Fungal Resistance: Treat products with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial

formulation to result in no growth on specimens per ASTM G 21 or rating of 10 according to ASTM D 3274 when tested according to ASTM D 3273.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078100 - 4

10. Density: ASTM E 605, tested to provide densities not less than set forth in manufacturer's literature and applicable UL rated assemblies.

11. Finish: Spray-textured finish, unless indicated otherwise. .

2.3 LOW DENSITY, STANDARD BOND SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS (SFRM)

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Low Density Cementitious SFRM:

a. Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 15 High Yield. b. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type

MK-6 Series. c. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 300.

1) Provide CAFCO®BOND-SEAL over SFRM.

B. Physical Properties: 1. Density: Not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu.m) and as specified in the

approved fire-resistance design, according to ASTM E 605. 2. Bond Strength: Minimum 150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.18-kPa) cohesive and adhesive

strength based on field testing according to ASTM E 736. 3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 10 lbf/sq. in. (68.9 kPa) according to ASTM E

761.

2.4 MEDIUM DENSITY SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS (SFRM)

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Medium Density Cementitious SFRM:

a. Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 22. b. Grace, W.R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type

Z106 Series. c. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 400.

1) Provide CAFCO®BOND-SEAL over SFRM.

B. Physical Properties: 1. Density: Not less than 22 lb/cu. ft. and as specified in the approved

fire-resistance design, according to ASTM E 605. 2. Bond Strength: Minimum 500-lbf/sq. ft. cohesive and adhesive strength based

on field testing according to ASTM E 736. 3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 100 lbf/sq. in. according to ASTM E 761. 4. Minimum Cement Content: 60% by weight.

2.5 HIGH DENSITY SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS (SFRM)

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. High Density Cementitious SFRM:

a. Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrocrete 240. b. Grace, W.R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type

Z146 Series. 2. Physical Properties:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078100 - 5

3. Density: Not less than 40 lb/cu. ft. (640 kg/cu.m) and as specified in the approved fire-resistance design, according to ASTM E 605.

4. Bond Strength: Minimum 10,000-lbf/sq. ft. (47.8-kPa) cohesive and adhesive strength based on field testing according to ASTM E 736.

5. Compressive Strength: Minimum 400 lbf/sq. in. (2068 kPa) according to ASTM E 761.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with one or both of the following requirements: 1. Primer and substrate are identical to those tested in required fire-resistance

design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Primer's bond strength in required fire-resistance design complies with specified bond strength for fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests according to ASTM E 736.

C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer.

E. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following: 1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill

scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.

2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078100 - 6

3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.

B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed before beginning fireproofing work.

C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work is complete before beginning fireproofing work.

D. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

E. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.

C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.

D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.

E. Contact Owner's testing agency to inspect steel before the application of SFRM.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078100 - 7

1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place.

2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.

D. Metal Decks: 1. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal deck substrates until concrete

topping, if any, has been completed. 2. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal roof deck until roofing has been

completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing.

E. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. 1. Install lath in accordance with ASTM C 1063.

F. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

G. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.

H. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

I. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from fireproofing over which they are applied.

J. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups.

K. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations.

L. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.

M. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes: 1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written

instructions for each finish selected.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078100 - 8

1. Provide testing and inspection of fireproofing as applied to steel structural members; ascertain that required resistances have been attained in accordance with Chapter 17 and Sections 1704.12 and 1704.13 of the Building Code and meet or exceed the more stringent requirements of this Section. Inspection after application for bond, thickness and required density, and final inspection for damage or repairs before acceptance. Test and observe condition of steel substrate, for applied fireproofing, before the fireproofing is applied. Provide testing at not less than the following intervals: a. Mock-up. b. Each floor as completed and prior to installation of mechanical/electrical

work which may interfere with testing and/or replacement of fireproofing. c. ASTM E 605 unless more frequent testing required by governing Code.

B. Contact inspector prior to application of fireproofing. 1. Inspector shall test and observe condition of steel substrate, for applied

fireproofing, before the fireproofing is applied.

C. Tests and inspections of completed Work will be performed in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.

D. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and

retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test

results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.

D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.

E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078100 - 9

3.6 FIRE RATING SCHEDULE

A. Restraint: Members requiring fireproofing to be considered “unrestrained; as defined in ASTM E 119 / ANSI/UL 263, Appendix C.

B. The fire-resistance rating of structural members and assemblies shall comply with the requirements for the type of construction and shall not be less than the rating required for the fire-resistance-rated assemblies supported. Reference OBC 714.1IBC 714.1.

C. Roofs with metal deck shall be based on isocyanurate roof insulation being installed on deck, without a deck board.

D. For beams and column sizes not included within the required UL fire resistance design numbers, the Contractor is responsible to adjust the thickness of sprayed protection material based on the equations listed below and in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.

Beam T1=T2(W2/D2+0.6)/(W1/D1+0.6) T = thickness of spray applied material W= weight of beam per foot D = perimeter of protection at the interface of the protection material and the steel through which heat is being transferred to steel 1= refers to desired beam size and required material thickness 2= refers to given beam size and material thickness shown on the individual UL design. W/D values are not less than 0.37 T1 not less than 3/8" Applies to ratings of more than 1 hour of Unrestrained or Restrained Beam Ratings. Column X2=1.25(X1)(W1/D1)(D2/W2). X2=thickness of coating of smaller WF section. X1=thickness of coating used on the rated steel section W2=weight per foot of smaller WF section W1=weight per foot of the rated steel section D2=perimeter of smaller steel section at interface with coating D1=perimeter of the rated steel section at interface with coating

E. Fireproofing Requirements as indicated on Life Safety Drawings.

3.7 SFRM DENSITY SCHEDULE

A. Low Density SFRM Locations: 1. Concealed locations and exposed roof structure in mechanical rooms, unless

indicated otherwise. 2. Others: As indicated.

B. Medium Density SFRM Locations: 1. Interior columns where fireproofing is exposed to view.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078100 - 10

2. Others: As indicated.

C. High Density SFRM Locations: 1. Exposed exterior locations. 2. Structure in air plenums common to louver. 3. Framing temporarily exposed to weather for:

a. Periods longer than recommended by fireproofing manufacturer. b. Freeze/thaw conditions without protection after cure.

4. Provide on galvanized steel framing. 5. Framing within unconditioned space. 6. Framing in exterior walls not covered with sheathing or water-shedding

membrane. 7. Others: As indicated.

D. Default: Base bid on high density for locations not covered above. Verify required fireproofing density with Architect before installing.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 078413PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.

B. Related Sections: 1. 07 8446 - Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: For joints in or between

fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.


A. Delegated Design: Contractor responsible for selection and providing tested assemblies which fulfill the fireblocking and firestopping systems and meet the requirements of the Ohio Building Code.

B. Building structure is not required to be of fire rated construction, except where indicated on drawings, and as follows. 1. Floor deck and elevated deck within the volume created by the outside perimeter

of fire rated partitions, this volume shall extend 3 inches above the top of the fire rated partition and 3 inches below the fire rated partition. a. Fire Rating: Not less than the rating of the fire rated partition.

C. Draftstopping: At floor assemblies that are not fire rated provided penetration firestopping system with an assemble similar to a one-hour fire rated system required for Type 2A Construction, at penetrations in floor deck.

D. Provide firestopping at the following: 1. Penetrations in rated assemblies. 2. Others: As indicated.

E. Performance Requirements: 1. Firestopping to meet the requirements listed below for a duration not less than

required for the time rated construction assembly. a. Penetrations: ASTM E 814. b. Perimeter Openings: ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.

2. Firestopping in floors having void openings of 4 inches or more to be reinforced or covered to support the floor load requirements; all in a manner acceptable to the Architect.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078413 - 2

3. Firestopping to accommodate differential deflection and movement between adjacent substrates without damage to substrates, firestopping, loss of firestopping performance, and without transfer of structural loads through firestopping design.

F. Physical Requirements: Firestopping shall not: 1. Be water soluble in the cured state. 2. Contain halogens which may be released upon heating.

G. Firestopping, Smokestopping and, Smokeblocking to meet requirements of the 2011 Edition of the OBC, and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and

inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.



A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078413 - 3

2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified

testing and inspecting agency. b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to

designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide." 4) Insert name of qualified testing and inspecting agency.


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Comparable Product approved by Owner and Architect prior to bidding.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078413 - 4

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of

constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of

constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg

at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign

materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound

surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078413 - 5

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible

forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and

penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings

and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to

produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078413 - 6

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Basis of Design: 1. 2. Others: As indicated on drawings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 078500FIRE-RESISTANT JOINT SYSTEMS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078500 - 1

SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Fire-resistive joint systems in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections. 3. Joints at exterior wall construction/floor intersections. 4. Joints in smoke barriers.

B. Related Sections: 1. 078413 - Penetration Firestopping: For systems installed in openings in walls

and floors with and without penetrating items.


A. Delegated Design: Contractor responsible for selection and providing tested assemblies which fulfill the fireblocking and fire-resistive joint systems and meet the requirements of the Ohio Building Code.

B. Building structure is not required to be of fire rated construction, except where indicated on drawings. Fire-restive joints that that are required to be firestopped in a Type 1B construction shall be fireblocked, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Floor deck and elevated deck within the volume created by the outside perimeter

of fire rated partitions, this volume shall extend 8 inches above the top of the fire rated partition and 8 inches below the fire rated partition. a. Fire Rating: Not less than the rating of the fire rated partition.

C. Fireblocking: At floor slab construction that is not fire rated provided a fire-resistive joint system with an assemble similar to one-hour fire rated system for Type 2A Construction, between exterior wall construction and edge of structural floor slab.

D. Firestopping: At joints in or at perimeter of fire rated construction; provide fire-rated joints assemblies that maintain the designated rating for the fire rated construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing agency.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078500 - 2

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.



A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard

referenced in "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified

testing agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to

designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078500 - 3

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B. Joints at Exterior Wall Construction/Floor Intersections. and Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems consisting of mineral fiber safing and smoke seal compound with rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa) or ASTM E 2307. 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the

floor assembly. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: a. Hilti, Inc. b. Comparable Product approved by Owner and Architect prior to bidding.

C. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Ratings determined per UL 2079. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft (0.00775 cu. m/s x m) of joint at 0.30 inch wg

(74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: a. Grace Construction Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Specified Technologies Inc. d. 3M Fire Protection Products. e. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. f. USG Corporation.

D. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

E. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078500 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible

forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

D. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to

achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to

produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify

Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078500 - 5

C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.4 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG.

B. Where Intertek ETL SEMKO-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek ETL SEMKO's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under product category Firestop Systems.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 078500 - 6



SECTION 079200JOINT SEALANTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sealant and backing materials. 2. Acoustical sealants.


A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint

preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.

5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be

erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical

representative present. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied

Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each

substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 079200 - 2

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants, and the following: 1. Sanded sealant joints.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


E. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for

compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and

substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

F. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

G. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

H. Warranties.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Qualification Data: For installer.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 079200 - 3

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Sanded joints.

E. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted

by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been

removed from joint substrates.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of fixtures, casework, openings, and penetrating items to ensure that sealant is installed according to specified requirements.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: From date of Completion, as follows:

a. Silicone Sealants: 20 years. b. All other sealants: 5 years minimum.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 079200 - 4

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for

joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone - Nonsag, Neutral-Curing: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Joint Locations: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces, and as follows: a. Joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between metal surfaces. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors,

glazed openings, and louvers. e. Joints at materials penetrating through or mounted to materials listed

above. f. Control and expansion joints in overhead surfaces. g. Other joints as indicated.

2. Basis of Design Product: Dow Corning Corporation; 790, 791, or 795 at Contractor's option. a. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

comparable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. 2) Pecora Corporation.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 079200 - 5

3) Tremco Incorporated.

B. Silicone - Surface Modified: Nonsag, Non-Staining, Neutral-Curing: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Joint Locations: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces, and as follows: a. Joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints in mineral fiber cement paneling. d. Sealant at site concrete and masonry walls.

1) Colors: Base bid on use of three different colors. e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above. f. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors,

glazed openings, curtain wall, storefront, metal panel, and, louvers. g. Joints at materials penetrating through or mounted to materials listed

above. h. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and materials listed above

under the heading "Silicone - Nonsag, Neutral-Curing". i. Default: Provide at exterior joints not defined to receive a specific sealant

type. Verify use of sealant with Architect before proceeding with installation.

2. Basis of Design Product: Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS.

C. Silicone - Mildew-Resistant: Acid-Curing: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Joint Locations:

a. Interior sealant joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

b. Interior sealant joints subject to moisture. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.

D. Urethane; Pourable, Self-Leveling: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Joint Locations: Exterior horizontal joints subject to traffic and as follows:

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Other joints as indicated.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Tremco; THC 900. b. BASF Building Systems; SL 2. c. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR 201. d. SikaFlex; 2C SL.

E. Urethane; Multicomponent Nonsag: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 079200 - 6

1. Joint Locations: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces and as follows: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Control and expansion joints in GFRC. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Other joints as indicated.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2. b. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 885 SG. c. Sika Corporation; 2C NS TG. d. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred.

F. Urethane or Polycarbonate, Nonsag: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. Compatible with asphalt-base waterproofing materials. 1. Joint Locations: Perimeter of waterproofing and roofing, and roofing

accessories. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. b. Pro-Seal; Pro-Seal 34. c. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 1000. d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a. e. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic or Vulkem 116.

G. Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Vertical joints on exposed interior surfaces of and partitions. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors

windows and elevator entrances. d. Other joints as indicated.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

H. Epoxy: Two-part, self-leveling, 100% solids joint filler. 1. Typical Locations: Exposed sawcuts and non-moving control joints in interior

concrete slabs. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of colors. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Epolith-P; Sonneborn. b. Sikadur 51; Sika Corp.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 079200 - 7

2.3 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. (160 kg/cu. m) and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping. 1. Joint Locations:

a. Between masonry veneer and shelf/relieving angles. b. Fill void between gypsum sheathing and end of masonry veneer returning

towards the gypsum sheathing with foam joint sealant at following conditions: 1) Punched openings in masonry veneer where joint is concealed by a

door frame system, glazed framing system, or other system that conceals joint from view.

c. Other joints as indicated. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals. b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd. c. Willseal USA, LLC.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Joint Location:

a. Acoustical joints. b. Other joints as indicated. c. As required to obtain STC rating for gypsum board partitions. STC ratings

are established by GA:WP # on PARTITION SCHEDULE. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 079200 - 8

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330. 1. Type: Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), unless otherwise

recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

D. Weep/Vent Tubes: Medium density polyethylene plastic tubing with integral insect screen. 1. Size: 3/8 inch diameter by 4 inches long, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Color: White. 3. Basis of Design Product: "Round Plastic Weep"; Sandell Construction

Solutions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means

that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 079200 - 9

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant

application and replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that

allow optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that

do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

F. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

H. Two-Stage Joint System: Pressure equalized sealant system consisting of an exterior weather barrier sealant joint, an interior air barrier sealant joint, and weep/vent tubes. 1. Install sealant and backer rod from the exterior. 2. Install air barrier sealant and backer rod as indicated, but not less than 3 inches

back from the face of the panel, with long nosed nozzle. Tool sealant to a uniform profile.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 079200 - 10

3. Bridge air barrier sealant and weather sealant with backer rod and sealant sloped as indicated, but not less than2 percent, to form a drainage path for water to exit the cavity. Insert Place weep/vent tube over the bridge sealant. Tool sealant carefully around weep/vent tubes for a watertight seal.

4. Provide primary seal at the front side of panels using backer rod and silicone sealant.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 5 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 081113HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND

FRAMES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.


A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C; and comply with requirements of Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies.

B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Submit within 45 days after award. Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, show reinforcements, cut-outs, welds, anchorages and connections to adjacent construction, and provisions for hardware and other pertinent items. 1. Throat Dimension: Calculate and Indicate throat dimension for door frames.

C. Samples: Submit frame samples listed below not less than 12inch leg on jamb and 8 inch leg on head sections; minimum 5 inches deep. Show proposed finishes, methods of construction, and joint tolerances. 1. Door Frame: Submit double rabbet door frame showing intersection of jamb and

head. 2. Sidelight Frame: Submit sidelight frame showing intersection of vertical and

horizontal frame including glazing stops.



FRAMES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081113 - 2

D. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

E. Product test reports.

F. U.L. Certificates: Provide Underwriters Laboratories certificate of inspection for temperature rise construction for fire rated doors exceeding that of manufacturer's tested assembly.

G. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each unit to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

a. Steelcraft not acceptable for exterior door frames. Do not manufacture the required thermally broken frames.

2.2 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. General: 1. Frames in Gypsum Board Walls: Includes a minimum 5/16” backbend parallel to

face on the return leg. This profile required regardless if what is shown on drawings. a. Basis-of-Design Product: “MU-Series” by Steelcraft; and as shown below.



FRAMES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081113 - 3

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. . 1. Locations: Door Leaf Widths up to 3’-4”, unless noted otherwise. 2. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 3. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm),

unless indicated otherwise. 1) Coating:

a) Uncoated: Typical. b) Coated: Housekeeping.

d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: One of the following:

1) Kraft-paper honeycomb 2) Polystyrene. 3) Polyurethane. 4) Polyisocyanurate. 5) Mineral board. 6) Vertical steel stiffener.

4. Frames: a. Materials: Steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm).

1) Coating: Match coating on door. b. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as

adjacent door frame. 1) Coating: Match coating on door.

c. Construction: Full profile welded. 5. Exposed Finish: Prime.

C. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. . 1. Locations:

a. Door Leaf Widths more than 3’-4”, unless noted otherwise. b. Stairway doors.

2. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 3. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm).

1) Coating: a) Uncoated: Typical.



FRAMES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081113 - 4

b) Coated: Housekeeping. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: One of the following:

1) Kraft-paper honeycomb 2) Polystyrene. 3) Polyurethane. 4) Polyisocyanurate. 5) Mineral board. 6) Vertical steel stiffener.

4. Frames: a. Materials: Steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm).

1) Coating: Match coating on door. b. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as

adjacent door frame. 1) Coating: Match coating on door.

c. Construction: Full profile welded. 5. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.3 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3

mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard insulation material.

3. Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.370K x sq.m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

4. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch

(1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded. c. Thermally Broken Frame: Provide thermally broken frame with a nominal

3/8” thick vinyl break with compression type gasket at locations between conditioned and unconditioned spaces.



FRAMES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081113 - 5

1) Basis-of-Design Product: Mercury Thermal Break by Ceco; and shown below. Provide backbends at gypsum board partitions as specified above.

2) U Value: 0.41 in accordance with NFRC 102-2014 and ASTM test methods.

d. Door Frames in Walls with interior Gypsum Board: Provide a frame with a minimum 5/16” double backbend; similar to Ceco’s “BQ” frame profile, except thermally broken. The double backbend is required regardless of what is shown on drawings.

e. Rain Hoods: Provide rain hoods at heads of exterior door frames subject to direct weather exposure. Fabricate to profile from16 gage galvanized steel, full width of door frame. Weld to frame and seal to prevent water infiltration.

5. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 BORROWED LITES

A. Hollow-metal frames of steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. 1. Coating: Metallic unless all doors into room are uncoated.

B. Construction: Full profile welded.

C. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame

size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.

4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive

fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension

clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.



FRAMES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081113 - 6

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A

1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 4-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50 respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Glazing: Section 088000 "Glazing."

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.

K. Fill: For repairs or closing gaps; weld or body putty; manufacturer’s standard. Sealant or caulk not acceptable.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to

permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.



FRAMES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081113 - 7

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no

visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. a. Throat Openings: Provide as required to accommodate wall and partition

construction. 1) Throat Opening = Wall Thickness + 1/8 inch ± 1/16 inch.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from

top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm)

high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm)

high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each

24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each

24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches

(152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c. 1) Locations:

a) Where approved by Architect. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door

silencers. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door

silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door

silencers.



FRAMES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081113 - 8

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and

surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for

preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. 3. Prepare all doors and frames for door closer, including doors and frames not

schedule for a door closer.

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of

hollow-metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that

each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior

doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and

installation types indicated.

2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.




FRAMES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081113 - 9

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until

permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have

been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with

grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to

floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with

mineral-fiber insulation. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with

postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet

on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a

horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face

corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.



FRAMES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081113 - 10

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

c. At Bottom of Door: 1) Where thresholds are not used, 5/8 inch (15.8 mm) plus or minus

1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 2) Where thresholds are used, 1/4" maximum between door and

threshold. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)

plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced

uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 081218MINIMALIST ALUMINUM FRAMES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081218 - 1

SECTION 081218 - MINIMALIST ALUMINUM FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior aluminum frames that are concealed by gypsum board..

B. Related Sections: 1. 081400 - Flush Wood Doors: For wood doors installed in interior aluminum

frames.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated and include: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal

thicknesses, trims and connections. 2. Locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall-opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 5. Details of accessories.

C. Color Samples: Two sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors

D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches long in size.

E. Quality Assurance Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that products have been constructed and tested.



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years’ experience in manufacturing similar systems.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081218 - 2

B. Test procedures and Performances: Provide independent lab test report based on ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors indicating that frame has been tested and achieved a count of at least 35,000 cycles when subjected to a shutting force of 7 pounds per cycle, showing no visible cracking in abutting drywall finishing.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Minimalist door frame by Fry Reglet Corporation, or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for concealed soss hinges and strikes. 1. Minimum Frame Extrusion Wall Thickness: 0.078 inch (1.98 mm). 2. Construction: Extruded aluminum hinge jamb, strike jamb and header section

factory mitered to install with hair-line seams. 3. Provide continuous door silencer of thermoplastic vulcanizate (TPV) material. 4. Frame sections shall be extruded to include continuous, punched, taping flanges

along each exposed section for application of tape, mud, primer and paint.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened.

B. Hardware: 1. Comply with requirements in Division 08 door hardware Sections. 2. Soos Hinges: Provide soos hinges complying with door frame manufacturer's

recommendations. a. Quantity: Not less than three.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted or mitered connections.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081218 - 3

B. Factory prepare interior aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Provide flush mounting plates for field sizing to accommodate hardware locations

as defined in the specifications and drawings. 2. Reinforcements: Include integral hinge and strike reinforcements designed to

position hinge and strike plates flush with face of frame.

C. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.


A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1.0 mils (0.025 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored to substrates.

C. Fasteners: Use screws, per manufacturer's standard installation instruction, for secure attachment to wall conditions.

D. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 96 inches (2450 mm) long must be one piece.

E. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610.

F. Touch up marred frame surfaces so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches (1220 mm). Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081218 - 4



SECTION 081316INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED

DOORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081316 - 1

SECTION 081316 – INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior manual-swing aluminum framed doors and door frame units.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.

E. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.


A. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide YKK AP Series 50D Wide Stile Swing Entrances or comparable product by one of the following:



DOORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081316 - 2

1. Horton Automatics. 2. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. 3. Oldcastle Building Envelope. 4. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel

company. 5. YKK AP America Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Retain paragraph below for internal steel reinforcement of aluminum framing

members; revise to suit

B. Glazing: Provide in conformance with Section 088000-Glazing and Section 088113 - Decorative Glass Glazing, and as follows: 1. Non- Fire Rated Doors: Provide safety glazing(SG), type as follows: 2. Typical: Lam GL-1. 3. Others: Laminated glass type indicated on drawings.

C. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support loads imposed by doors.

B. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick,

extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: As indicated . 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and

preformed gaskets, with face of stop flush with face of door. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

B. Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."



DOORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081316 - 3

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing

to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to

greatest extent possible.

D. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing door hardware. 1. Door jamb adjacent to All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts provide a shape

similar to a tube profile that provides a flat surface full depth of the jamb and full height for the all glass store front to transition too.

E. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing door hardware.

F. Door Hardware Installation: Factory install door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.



DOORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081316 - 4

2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and

electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.

D. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

E. Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Field-Installed Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted door hardware

according to door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 081400WOOD DOORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081400 - 1

SECTION 081400 - WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior solid-core doors with medium-density-overlay faces. 2. Fire rated wood door frames. 3. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following. 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."

D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081400 - 2

F. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section.

b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flush Wood Door Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, unless indicated otherwise, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 5. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 6. Vancouver Door Company. 7. VT Industries Inc.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain added urea formaldehyde.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extra Heavy Duty: public toilets, assembly spaces, and exits. 3. Standard Duty: Closets (not including janitor's closets).

C. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 , made with binder containing no

added urea-formaldehyde resin. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed for

surface-applied closers and hardware.

D. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081400 - 3

1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N).

2. Required Locations: Where particleboard core doors are not designed to meet dimensions indicated on drawings.

E. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. 1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals

concealed by outer stile unless otherwise noted or required. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

3. Mineral-Core Doors: a. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of

referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

b. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

c. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

F. Smoke and Draft Control Doors: Where “S-labeled” or “smoke and draft control doors” are indicated, provide doors complying with UL 1784 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, bearing the letter “S” on the fire label of the door.

2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors : 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Faces: Medium-density overlay .

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES

A. Metal Louvers: 1. Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with Class II, clear anodic finish,

AA-M12C22A31. 2. Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with factory primed for paint finish.

B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081400 - 4

2.5 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hafele Hawa Junior 250A or comparable product approved by Architect.

B. Accessories: 1. Provide bottom door stop 00773.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished.

Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

2.7 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers

may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors: 1. Color: PL-1. 2. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM

D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081400 - 5

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 081400 - 6



SECTION 083113ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 083113 - 1

SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Access doors in walls, floors, partitions or ceilings included base bid work. 1. Access doors are:

a. Furnished and installed by trade contractors, designated by the Construction Manager, and installed where directed by mechanical/electrical trades contractor and approved by Architect.

b. Required for access to mechanical/electrical equipment and devices which are otherwise not accessible due to permanent General Trades work. 1) Coordinate requirements with Divisions 21 through 28 for location.

B. Single Source: Access doors must be from single manufacturer to maintain continuity of appearance. Access doors in individual rooms or areas must match in appearance for their application; e.g. all ceiling panels within a room shall be by the same manufacturer and the same model, except for door size.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



C. Samples: For each door face material.

D. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 tested according to the following test method: 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically. 2. NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 083113 - 2

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated by Milcor or comparable product by one of the following: 1. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 4. Milcor Inc. 5. Nystrom, Inc.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Recessed Access Doors with Concealed Flanges : 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Style "DWR".. 2. Assembly Description: Fabricate door in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch (16

mm) for gypsum board infill. Provide frame with gypsum board bead for concealed flange installation.

3. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 4. Door Size: 24" b y24" unless otherwise shown. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage.

a. Finish: Factory prime. 6. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door. 7. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 8. Hardware: Lock.

E. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges <Insert drawing designation>: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Series "UFR".. 2. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of

mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and interior latch release. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size.

3. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch (0.91 mm), 20 gage.

a. Finish: Factory prime. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Door Size: 24" b y24" unless otherwise shown. 8. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 9. Hardware: Latch at ceiling conditions and lock at wall conditions..

F. Carpet Cleaning Access Doors: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

model FDSS_HGFD_2HR_UM by JL Industries or a comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2. Size: 10 inch x 10 inch. 3. Install with bottom of door at. 4. Lock: Provide mortise slam lock option. Cylinder by Section 087100. 5. Location: Exterior side of building.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 083113 - 3

G. Floor Mounted Access Door (FAD-1): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

model FT-8080 by Acudor Products Inc. or a comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2. Size: 24 inch x 24 inch. 3. Secure door to frame with tamper resistant torx head fasteners. 4. Install access panel with top face of access coplanar with top of concrete floor.

H. Hardware: 1. Lock: Cylinder.

a. Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

b. Exception: Provide screwdriver operated cam on all access doors located in ceilings or soffits.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

E. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

F. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

G. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H15; with minimum sheet thickness according to ANSI H35.2 (ANSI H35.2M).

H. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.

I. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 083113 - 4

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.

D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.

E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device.

Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.

F. Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes: 1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and

chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

2. Prime painted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 083113 - 5

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 084113ALUMINUM-FRAMED

STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for ribbon walls. 3. Storefront framing for punched openings.

B. Related Sections: 1. 05 0513 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal: For factory applied, heat cured

coatings on exposed metal surfaces.

1.2 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Design glazed framing systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. The determinations of member sizes and internal profiles, is responsibility of Contractor. Glazed framing systems members shown or detailed on the Drawings to be regarded as a basis of design intent to show general arrangement and function of the various components of the building and not required member sizes except for limitation specified under design requirements description herein.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure

including, including but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.

C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Speed: 90 mph. 2. Exposure: C. 3. Importance Factor: 1.15 4. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 2

5. Miscellaneous: Design items listed below to withstand the following loads without damage or permanent deformation to the items or glazed framing system components: a. Sill Covers: Concentrated vertical load of 200 pounds applied at any point.

D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to

13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1 mm), whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller. a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) clearance

between framing members and operable units. 3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as

follows: a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus

1/4-inch (6.35-mm) for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m) or 1/175 times span, for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m).

E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do

not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,

assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when

tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 10 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Energy Performance: Glazed framing systems shall have certified and labeled energy performance ratings in accordance with NFRC. 1. Thermal Performance: When tested in accordance with AAMA 507, AAMA 1503

and NFRC 100: a. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRFf): A minimum of 68. b. Thermal Winter Transmittance U Value:

1) 0.34 BTU/HR/FT²/°F or less when tested with glass Type IG-1, as specified in Section 088000 - Glazing.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 3

2) 0.36 BTU/HR/FT²/°F or less when tested with glass Type IG-1, as specified in Section 088000 - Glazing, in a frame that is 21 feet wide x 4 feet -6 inches high with 5 equally spaced intermediate vertical mullions and zero intermediate horizontal mullions.

I. Glass Statistical Factor (Safety Factor): Glass thicknesses when shown on the drawings are for convenience of detailing only and are to be confirmed by the Contractor or glass manufacturer. Provide glass thicknesses for the size openings shown such that the probability of breakage at the design wind pressure will not exceed 8 lights per 1000 lights (S.F. = 2.5). Glass manufacturer to provide, on request, substantiating glass breakage data if such data is not otherwise available as manufacturer's published data.

J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces. 2. Test Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F (24 deg C). 3. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress

on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.

K. Acoustical Performance: Acoustical Performance: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 1425: 1. Sound Transmission Class (STC) shall not be less than: 32. 2. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) shall not be less than 27.

L. Size Requirements: 1. Width (Sight Line): Horizontal and vertical member width shall be the same

within each system. Field and perimeter member widths as shown on drawings. 2. Depth: Horizontal and vertical member depth to be as required for wind loading

and for sill as shown on drawings, but without affecting the building structure or intended tolerances.

3. Horizontal members shall be same depth as vertical members, unless indicated otherwise.

M. Sub-Sill/Sill Starter: Provide an extruded aluminum sub-sill with integral thermal break of same material as storefront mullions. Provide end dams with a watertight connection to sub-sill at each end of the sub-sill. Mechanically attach end dams to sub-sill. Water within storefront shall drain out of system above bottom edge of storefront system. System shall not require flashing beneath the sub-sill. 1. Sill shall mechanically lock to the sub-sill to transfer wind loads. Comply with

one of the following: a. Mechanical locks shall not create any penetrations in the wetzone of the

system b. Where the mechanical lock between the sill and sub--sill system shall be

designed weep water that may occur at this penetration to the exterior of the storefront system.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 4

N. Head Receptor: Extruded aluminum with integral thermal break of same material as storefront mullions. 1. Gaskets 2. Deflection.

O. Seal perimeter of the frame water tight and provide a flat substrate full depth of mullion that is an acceptable surface for two-stage joint system specified in Section 079200 - Joint Sealants. Glazing pockets at single-stage and two-stage sealant joints shall be sealed water tight.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Shop drawings shall include the aluminum-framed storefront manufacturer's

registered trademark in the title block of each drawing. a. Clearly identify components that are not manufactured by the storefront

manufacturer on shop drawings, and state the name of the manufacturer; and manufacturer's name of each of these components.

2. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

3. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of mullions.

4. Include details showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage.

5. Shimming Depths: For each type of anchorage to structure, show maximum allowable depths of shims permitted for normal conditions. Show details for shim depths exceeding normal conditions and their limits. Design custom anchorages as needed to meet field conditions.

6. Adjustability: Show details of anchors indicating range of adjustment and accommodation of tolerances of adjoining work.

7. Movement Capability: Show details of joints which accommodate vertical movement. Indicate range of movement.

8. Anchorage Drawings: a. Show embed types and layouts, anchorage locations, types and sizes of

anchors, and proposed methods of attachment to structure. b. Show details of anchors. Include range of adjustment for each anchor type

and bolt size, including those perpendicular to face of building. c. Describe all materials including fastener types and shimming devices.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 5

d. Indicate all reactions or loads-imposed-on structure imposed on structure under maximum design load conditions for Engineer to review.

e. Shimming Depths: For each type of anchorage to structure, show maximum allowable depths of shims permitted for normal conditions. Show details for shim depths exceeding normal conditions.

9. Clearly identify the manufacturer of components that are not manufactured by the storefront manufacturer.

10. For information only include digital 3 dimensional drawings of framing member intersections. Digital 3 dimensional drawings will not be approved and may not be returned.

C. Fabrication Sample: Provide sample of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.

D. Samples: For each exposed finish required.

E. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Calculations: Submit structural calculations for review by Architect. Submittals,

if requested, may or may not be returned, and will not bear stamp of approval. Calculations shall include the following information: a. Derivation of loads on glazed framing system. b. Analysis for all applicable loads on framing members and associated

deflections, comparison to specified limits. c. Analysis for all applicable loads on anchors, including anchors embedded in

concrete, comparison to specified limits. d. Section property computations for framing members. e. See “Engineer’s Seal/Signature” herein.

G. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from manufacturer.

H. Product test reports.

I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified preconstruction testing agency, for Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefront systems`, indicating compliance with performance requirements.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 6

J. Field quality-control reports.

K. Sample warranties.

L. Maintenance data.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum-framed entrances and storefront components from a single manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum-framed entrances and storefront systems that meet or exceed energy performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by certification, labeling, and inclusion in lists. 1. Manufacturer to provide list of at least ten (10) comparable projects of

aluminum-framed entrances and storefront system completed within the last five (5) years. List to include project name, Owner, Architect, Contractor, installer and product reference.

C. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. On-Site Superintendent: An individual with not less than 15 years of successful

experience installing aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. 2. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefront System: A firm with not less than

five (5) years of successful experience in erection of glazed wall systems similar to systems required for this project.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025.

E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except

with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 7

1.6 MOCKUPS

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. Mockup will also have tests specified under FIELD QUALITY CONTROL in PART 3 to promote quality assurance. 1. Build mockup of storefront as part of Integrated Exterior Mockup specified in

Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" and as shown on drawings. 2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field

Quality Control" Article. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the


1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Coating Warranty: Provide Special Coating Warranty in conformance with Section 050513 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide YKK AP YES 45 TU Front Set Series by YKK AP America Inc.; or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 2. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc. 3. Tubelite. 4. YKK AP America Inc. 5. Wausau Window and Wall Systems.

2.2 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken by isobars or continuous spacers. Poured and

bridged type thermal break. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: As indicated on drawings. 4. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 8

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Materials: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and

finish indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTMB209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTMB221M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

E. Sill Covers: Custom, extruded, preformed aluminum covers; profile as shown. Include attachment and support devices that accommodate floor deflection without damage or permanent deflection to the covers or other storefront components while maintaining alignment of cover top with top of adjacent window wall sill.

F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

G. Splice Joint Seals: “123 Silicone Seal by Dow Corning or “Sil-Span by Pecora Corp. A preformed ultra-low modulus silicone extrusion. Minimum 2 inches wide. Include manufacturer’s recommended silicone adhesive for installation. 1. Sealant: Use silicone sealant recommended by splice joint seal manufacturer to

seal and adhere splice joint seals to substrate.

H. Accessories: 1. Sill Covers: Custom, extruded, preformed aluminum covers; profile as shown.

Include concealed attachment and support devices. a. Aluminum, 0.060 inch minimum. b. Provide closed ends where exposed or where indicated.

2. Mullion Extensions: Custom, extruded, preformed aluminum covers; profile as shown. Include concealed attachment and support devices. a. Aluminum, 0.060 inch minimum.

3. Mullion Partition Closer (MPC): a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide Mull-it-Over by Mull-it-Over Products or a comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding. 1) STC Rating: 55, ASTM E90. 2) Fire Rating: Match fire rating of adjacent partition in a manner that

continues the fire rating of the partition to the interior face of the exterior glazing.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 9

a) Standard Conditions: Assembly fire rating of 1 hour per ANSI/UL2079. UL Joint System No. WW-S-1039.

3) Finish: Match finish on storefront framing. b. Locations:

1) Typical for transition from an interior partition to a vertical mullion. 2) Typical for transition from gypsum board column enclosure to vertical

mullion where transition is part of the demising partition between a room and another occupied space.

3) Others: Where indicated. 4. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant,

nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. a. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning

out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

5. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

6. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

I. Others: As required for a complete installation.

2.3 SPANDREL INSULATION

A. Spandrel Insulation: Insulation shall be approved for use with firestopping system installed between curtain wall and edge of slab. Specifications based on "Thermafiber FIRESPAN" by Thermafiber; a dark colored semi-rigid mineral fiber blanket capable of withstanding 2000 degrees F for 5 hours and preventing passage of flame when tested according to ASTM E 119; other fire resistive qualities to equal or exceed manufacturer's published standards. Provide in thickness shown and with scrim-reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be approved for firestopping system used at edge of concrete slab. Grain of insulation shall be run vertically unless indicated otherwise on approved shop drawings for firestopping. 1. Maximum Flame-Spread: 25, ASTM E84. 2. Maximum Smoke-Developed Indexes: 5, ASTM E84. 3. Thermal Resistivity: Not less than 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F. 4. Foil Faced Vapor Retarder: 0.02 perms, ASTM E96. 5. Locations:

a. Where indicated. b. At cavity behind glass spandrel panels in glazed framing systems.


A. Entrance Doors: Provide in conformance with Section 084213 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances.

2.5 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 10

1. Typical Glass Type: IG-1. 2. Other Glass Types: As indicated on drawings.

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

D. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L.

2.6 FABRICATION



C. Conceal fasteners wherever possible; not just convenient.

D. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing

to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 6. Horizontal and vertical mullion faces common to the perimeter sealant joints,

perimeter sealant joints specified in Section 079200 - Joint Sealants, shall be a continuous flat water tight surface for the full depth of mullion, including glazing pockets.

E. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Locations:

a. Typical.

B. High-Performance Organic Finish: 1. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with Section 050513. 2. Interior Finish: In accordance with Section 050513. 3. Locations:

a. Punched openings in veneer masonry wall. 1) Black color as selected by Architect.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 11

b. Others: Where indicated on drawings provide at following: 1) Color: Black color as selected by Architect, unless indicated

otherwise on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and

electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 7. Insulation & Vapor Barrier: Install insulation and vapor barrier at all non-vision

areas including metal panels, and spandrel glass. a. Insulation: Trim insulation so foil-facing laps curtain wall framing by

nominal ¾ inch and insulation fills framing with compressed fit, tight to framing. Tape perimeter with foil-faced tape to complete seal to framing and maintain vapor retarder properties of foil faced insulation. Tape must have minimum 1/2 inch bond to framing or tape which is bonded to framing. Maintain a 1 inch clear dimension from interior face of glazing and insulation.

b. Perform fabrication within a relatively dry environment and preclude trapping moisture within the system.

B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic

action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 12

D. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.

E. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather

stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door

hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Glazed Framing System: During construction, conduct field tests as described below in accordance with AAMA 501 – Methods of Test for Exterior Walls.

C. Tests for installed Glazed Framing System: 1. Water Hose Tests: Minimum 4 tests, at locations selected by Architect or

Architect’s consultant, including some or all of wall types listed below; AAMA 501.2 – Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Glazed framing systems, and Sloped Glazing for Water Leakage. AAMA 501.2 tests may be conducted by contractor if Architect and Consultant, with Construction Manager, witness tests. Contractor shall then issue test report. a. Wall Types: Each type of window wall. b. Test Intervals: Test at the approximate intervals of work completions:

1) Mockup. 2) Initial installation before more than 40 units set, to verify initial

methods. 3) 25%. 4) 50%. 5) 80-85%.

c. Each test to include minimum of 4 vertical mullions 1-1/2 stories tall and 6 horizontal stack mullions each one unit wide. Field tests must be repeated, plus another area pass first time, to constitute a successful test.

2. Field Chamber Tests: Minimum two tests. Follow ASTM E783 and E1105 to measure air leakage and confirm resistance to water penetration at full 12 psf design load, not the reduced 8 psf. These tests must be conducted by an independent laboratory. a. Wall Types:

1) Conventionally captured glazing. 2) Rainscreen panels with punched windows.

b. Test Intervals: Test at the approximate intervals of work completions: 1) Mockup. 2) 25%.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 13

3) 50%. 4) 80-85%.

c. It may be necessary to install work at test areas out of sequence to perform tests at specified intervals.

D. The cost of testing to be paid for by the Contractor. Contractor shall pay for retesting if work, in the Architect's judgment, is found to be at fault or not in conformance with specified requirements. . Costs, including time and expenses for required witnesses, of all re-test work to be borne by contractor. 1. Required Witnesses: Construction Manager, Owner's representative (WJE),

Architect.

E. To be accepted, results of test must meet same criteria as lab tests.

F. Other Inspections: As indicated elsewhere and as follows: 1. Chemical Anchors: In accordance with Section 014000 - Quality Requirements,

provide independent inspection of field installed chemical anchors.


A. Immediately after glass installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces; except do not remove labels immediately where surfaces will be accessible after unit is set, leave these labels on glass until Architect verifies glass, then remove labels.

B. Follow glass manufacturer’s written recommendations when cleaning.

C. Do not use any solvents detrimental to finish of aluminum framing. Consult with manufacturer of finish to determine solvents and/or cleaning agents which may be used on the finish including recommended methods and limitations of procedures.

D. Protect glass and framing from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with

glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

E. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

F. Final Cleaning: 1. Time: Four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of

Substantial Completion 2. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces. 3. Clean framing members following procedure recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084113 - 14


Columbus Metropolitan Library - Dublin Branch Construction Documents Issue 3 - 15 November 2017

SECTION 084126ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND

STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084126 - 1

SECTION 084126 - ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior all-glass entrance doors. 2. Interior all-glass storefronts.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For all-glass entrances and storefronts. 1. Include plans, elevations, and sections. 2. Include details of fittings and glazing, including isometric drawings of patch

fittings and rail fittings. Include details at head of door for proper installation of concealed closer and strike plate for exit device.

3. Door hardware locations, mounting heights, and installation requirements.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish indicated.

D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

E. Product test reports.

F. Sample warranties.

G. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of all-glass systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion, except as

follows:



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084126 - 2

a. Concealed Floor Closers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of all-glass entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Loads: 1. Interior Wind Loads: 5 pounds per square foot. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated under Deflection Limits below. 3. Deflection Limits:

a. Deflection normal to glazing plane is limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is smaller.

b. The differential deflection of two adjacent unsupported sides shall not be greater than the thickness of the panel when a force of 50 pounds per linear foot is applied horizontally to one panel at any point up to 42 inches above the walking surface.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by C. R. Laurance or comparable product by one of the following: 1. C.R. Laurence Co, Inc. 2. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 3. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh; C.R. Laurence Co, Inc. 4. Dorma 5. Doralco Architectural Metals. 6. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 7. Virginia Glass Products Corporation.

2.3 METAL COMPONENTS

A. Fitting Configuration: 1. Manual-Swinging, All-Glass Entrance Doors and Transoms: Patch fittings at

head and sill on pivot side, and for locks with lever handles. 2. All-Glass Storefronts: Continuous rail fitting at top and bottom.

B. Patch Fittings: Aluminum.

C. Rail Fittings: 1. Material: Match patch-fitting metal and finish. 2. Height:

a. Top Rail: 1-1/2 inches high x 1 inch wide extruded aluminum channel.. b. Bottom Rail: 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) or 4 inches high x nominal 1-1/2 inches

wide extruded aluminum. . 3. Profile: Square.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084126 - 3

4. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard precision-fit end caps for rail fittings.

D. Accessory Fittings: Match patch- and rail-fitting metal and finish for the following: 1. Overhead doorstop.

a. Locations: Typical.

E. Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed.

F. Materials: 1. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), with strength and durability

characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5.

2.4 GLAZING

A. Glazing: 1. Provide in conformance with Section 080000 - Glazing. 2. Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated

surfaces), Type I (transparent), tested for surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength per 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. a. Class 1: Clear monolithic.

1) Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm) a) Where drawings and specifications conflict on glass thickness,

provide tempered glass in the greater glass thickness. b. Edges:

1) Exposed edges of doors penciled (satin radiused). 2) Sidelights, field, and transom: Edges radiused per manufacturer’s

recommendations. a) Corner Edges: Lap-joint corners with exposed edges polished.

3) Edges housed in frame: Per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Heavy-duty entrance door hardware units in sizes, quantities, and types recommended by manufacturer for all-glass entrance systems indicated. For exposed parts, match metal and finish of patch fittings.

B. Concealed Overhead Closers and Bottom Pivots: Center hung; BHMA A156.4, Grade 1; including cases, top arms, top walking beam pivots, plates, and accessories required for complete installation. 1. Swing: Single acting.

a. Positive Dead Stop: Coordinated with hold-open angle if any, or at angle selected.

2. Hold Open: Automatic, at angle selected. 3. Opening-Force Requirements:

a. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door. 4. Locations: Typical.

C. Push-Pull Set: 1. Straight style ladder pulls and push sets mounted back to back. 2. Material: 304 or 316 stainless steel.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084126 - 4

3. Diameter: 1-1/4 inch. 4. Height: Door height minus 20 inches and; centered with an equal space at top

and bottom of door to edge of door handle. 5. Finish: US32D. 6. Orientation: Vertical, unless indicated otherwise. 7. Locations: Doors 200A, 200B, 205, 206, 207, 208, and 209

D. Office Door Lock: DORMA Center Lock & Strike with the following functions: 1. Lock incorporates the technology built into the DORMA M9000 Heavy-Duty

Grade 1 Mortise Lockset. a. Latch bolt operated by trim either side, except when outside trim locked by

key outside or by inside turn. b. When outside trim locked, latch bolt retracted by key outside or by inside

trim. c. Outside trim remains locked until inside turn rotated to unlocked position or

unlocked by key. d. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latch bolt when door locked.

2. Lever Trim Style: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of options.

3. Keyway Cylinder: Provided by Section 078100 - Door Hardware.

4. Others: As need for a complete installation. 5. Locations: .Doors 109 and 110.

E. Exit Devices: UL 305. 1. Basis-of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

PA100F PA110F by Blumcraft or comparable product approved by Architect. 2. Function: Operation by push-pull when inside operator is locked down

(dogged). Cylinder on both sides of door. Operation by push for push side of door at all times. Provide flush metal strike at head of door, as recommended by manufacturer, to engage exit device to head of door opening.

3. Push Handles: 1-1/4 inch diameter stainless Steel Tubing. 4. Pull Handle:

a. Straight style ladder pulls and push sets mounted back to back. b. Material: 304 or 316 stainless steel. c. Diameter: 1-1/4 inch. d. Height: Door height minus 20 inches and; centered with an equal

space at top and bottom of door to edge of door handle. e. Finish: US32D.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084126 - 5

f. Orientation: Vertical. 5. Stainless Steel Finish: Satin (Brushed). 6. Latching: Provide white metal dust proof strike. 7. Threshold: Not permitted. 8. Latching: At dust proof strike in floor. 9. Style: Concealed vertical rod in housing style indicated. 10. Provide exit devices on both leaves of pairs of doors. 11. Locations: Doors 003, 004, and 005.

F. Threshold: Not permitted.

G. Others: As needed for a complete installation that meets manufacturers’ recommendations.

2.6 BUTT-GLAZING SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses NT, G, and A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 999-A. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Construction SCS1200. c. Pecora Corporation; 860. d. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze.

B. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessory fittings before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering. 1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that

when glass is installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite.

B. Coordinate wall and door assembly preparation and provide hardware as necessary for fully operable installation.

C. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware and fittings to greatest extent possible; products may be disassembled to accommodate shipping constraints.

D. Finished metal surfaces protected with strippable film.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Exposed metal: 1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.



STOREFRONTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084126 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints.

C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.

D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate indicated.

F. Install butt-joint sealants according to manufacturer's instructions and as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust glazed interior wall and door assembly to operate smoothly from sliding or pivoting positions.

B. Adjust swing door hardware for smooth operation.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 084213ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084213 - 1

SECTION 084213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units including. 2. Sidelights.

a. Locations: Door openings not within a storefront or curtain wall system. 3. Transoms.

a. Locations: Door openings not within a storefront or curtain wall system.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor

barriers. 2. Shop drawings shall include the same manufacturer's registered trademark in the

title block of each drawing.

C. Samples: For each exposed finish required.

D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

E. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed entrance.

F. Product test reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Sample warranties.

I. Maintenance data.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084213 - 2


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain all aluminum-framed entrances from the same manufacturer.

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except


1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. ?. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of

supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084213 - 3


C. Structural Loads: Comply with requirements specified in Section 084423 - Structural-Sealant-Glazed Curtain Walls.

D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do




E. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Entrance Doors:

a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. (5.08L/s per sq.m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. (2.54L/s per sq.m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when

tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. (480 Pa).

G. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Swinging doors shall have U-factor of not

more than 0.52Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.23 W/sq. m x K) as determined according to NFRC 100 with glazing having the following performance requirements: a. 1 inch thick insulted glass.

1) Outer pane of glass: 6 mm clear tempered glass. 2) 1/2 inch air space. 3) Inner pane of glass: 6 mm clear tempered glass. 4) Visible Light: 79%. 5) Winter U-Factor (center of glass): 0.47. 6) SHGC: 0.70.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Comply with requirements specified in Section 084423 - Structural-Sealant-Glazed Curtain Walls.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084213 - 4

3. Condensation Resistance: Swinging doors shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 56 as determined according to NFRC 500.

H. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 degC), ambient; 180 deg F (100 degC),

material surfaces.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MegaTherm®XT Entrance Doors by YKK AP America Inc.; or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Kawneer North America. 2. Oldcastle, Inc. 3. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc. 4. Tubelite. 5. Wausau Window and Wall Systems. 6. YKK AP America Inc.


A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 2- to 2-1/2-inch overall thickness, with minimum

0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate

aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.

2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width. a. Bottom Rail : 10 inches.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Nominal Size: 1-3/4 by 6 inches, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084213 - 5

E. Materials: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and

finish indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTMB209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTMB221M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.


2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule and as specified in Section 087100 - Door Hardware for each entrance door. 1. Exception: Door cylinders furnished by Section 087100 and installed by this

Section. 2. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color

indicated, and named manufacturers' products. 3. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of

operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 4. Opening-Force Requirements:

a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67N) to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf (133N) to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67N) to open the door to its minimum required width.

b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2N) to fully open door.

B. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing.

C. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.

D. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

E. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084213 - 6

2.5 GLAZING


B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

D. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L.

2.6 FABRICATION



C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing

to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to


D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. Provide reinforce for installation of a door closer

E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. Provide reinforce for installation of a door closer

F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084213 - 7


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Locations: Openings in glazed framing system with clear anodic finish.

B. High-Performance Organic Finish: 1. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with Section 050513. 2. Interior Finish: In accordance with Section 050513. 3. Locations:

a. Openings within a glazed framing system with High-Performance Organic Finish. 1) Color: Match color of glazed framing system.

b. Punched openings in veneer masonry wall. 1) Black color as selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 INSTALLATION


electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.


action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or installing nonconductive spacers.


C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084213 - 8

F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather

stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door

hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.



B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on aluminum-framed entrances. 1. Water Penetration Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas

designated by Architect shall be tested according to ASTM E1105 with a static test of 15 minutes, per the standard; and an additional test of 2 hour duration without pressure. There shall not evidence water penetration.

C. Aluminum-framed entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 084229AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084229 - 1

SECTION 08462 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes exterior and interior, sliding, power-operated automatic entrances.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" forming recesses in concrete for

recessed thresholds. 2. Section 08730 "Automatic Door Operators" for automatic door operators

furnished separately from doors and frames.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.

B. Activation Device: A control that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Safety Device: A control that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing.

E. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.10 for definitions of terms.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed sliding tracks and recessed thresholds that control automatic entrances. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified elsewhere.

B. Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrances.

C. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware required for rest of Project.

D. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances with connections to power supplies and access-control system.





NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084229 - 2

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrances. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and

furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment

details. 2. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field

assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Indicate locations of activation and safety devices. 5. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities,

and locations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied metal-clad finishes. 1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color or finish selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For automatic entrances.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of automatic entrance. Include emergency-exit features of automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress.

C. Product Test Reports: For each type of automatic entrance, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Field quality-control reports.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM indicating that manufacturer has a Certified Inspector on staff.

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084229 - 3

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

C. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 1) Lateral deflection of glass lite edges in excess of 1/175 of their length

or 3/4 inch (75 mm), whichever is less. b. Excessive air leakage c. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE ASSEMBLIES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain sliding folding and swinging automatic entrances from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01400 "Quality Requirements," to design automatic entrances.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084229 - 4

B. Structural Performance: Automatic entrances shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Structural drawings.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Operating Temperature Range: Automatic entrances shall operate within minus 20 to plus 122 deg F.

E. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Swinging doors and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.70 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

F. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 1.25 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed entrance-system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..

G. Opening Force: 1. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf required to manually set door in

motion if power fails, and not more than 15 lbf required to open door to minimum required width.

2. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf required for a breakaway door or panel to open.

H. Entrapment-Prevention Force: 1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 30 lbf required to prevent stopped

door from closing.

2.3 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including doors, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, controls, and accessories required for a complete installation.

B. Sliding Automatic Entrance : 1. Biparting-Sliding Units: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Horton Automatics; a division of Overhead Door Corporation. b. Stanley Access Technologies, LLC; Division of Stanley Security Solutions. c. Record-USA. d. Horton Automatics; a division of Overhead Door Corporation.

3. Configuration: Biparting-sliding doors with two sliding leaves sidelites on each side. a. Traffic Pattern: Two way. b. Emergency Breakaway Capability: As indicated on Drawings. c. Mounting: Between jambs.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084229 - 5

4. Operator Features: a. Power opening and closing. b. Drive System: Chain or belt. c. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. d. Adjustable hold-open time between zero and 30 seconds. e. Obstruction recycle. f. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator, key operated.

5. Sliding-Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered, ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered, continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly. a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers

for each active leaf. 6. Sliding-Door Threshold: Threshold members and bottom-guide-track system with

stainless-steel, ball-bearing-center roller wheels. a. Configuration:

1) Exterior Vestibule Doors: Recessed-Saddle-type threshold across door opening and inverted, roller surface-mounted, pin recessed, pin-guide track system at sidelites. Top surface of threshold coplanar with adjacent pedestrian pavement surfaces.

2) Interior Vestibule Doors: No threshold across door opening with guide mechanism same as “Exterior” above.

7. Controls: Activation and safety devices according to BHMA standards. a. Activation Device: Motion sensor mounted on each side of door header to

detect pedestrians in activating zone and to open door. b. Safety Device: Presence sensor mounted on each side of door header and

two photoelectric beams mounted in sidelite jambs on one side of the door to detect pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing.

c. Sidelite Safety Device: Presence sensor, mounted above each sidelite on side of door opening through which doors travel, to detect obstructions and to prevent door from opening.

d. Opening-Width Control: Two-position switch that in the normal position allows sliding doors to travel to full opening width and in the alternate position reduces opening to a selected partial opening width.

2.4 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS

A. Framing Members: Extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Nominal Size: 1-3/4 by 4-1/2 inches. 2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062-inch wall thickness.

B. Stile and Rail Doors: 1-3/4-inch- thick, glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and

preformed gaskets.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084229 - 6

2. Stile Design: Medium stile, 3-1/2-inch nominal width. 3. Rail Design:

a. Top Rail: 5-inch nominal height. b. Bottom Rail 10-inch nominal height.

C. Sidelite(s): 1-3/4-inch- deep sidelite(s) with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail door. 2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and

preformed gaskets.

D. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- thick extruded aluminum and extending full width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access. 1. Mounting: Concealed, with one side of header flush with framing. 2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 175 lb per leaf over spans up to 14

feet without intermediate supports. a. Provide sag rods for spans exceeding 14 feet.

E. Brackets and Reinforcements: High-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

F. Signage: As required by cited BHMA standard. 1. Application Process: Silk-screened Insert requirement.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221. 2. Sheet: ASTM B 209.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Reinforcement with corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Use surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 316.

D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness, in entrance manufacturer's standard thickness.

F. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800 "Glazing."

G. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084229 - 7

H. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout; complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; of consistency suitable for application.

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

J. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

2.6 DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS

A. General: Provide operators and controls, which include activation and safety devices, according to BHMA standards, for condition of exposure, and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.

B. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement. 1. Door Operator Performance: Door operators shall open and close doors and

maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads.

2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead unit powered by fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solid-state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation with power off.

C. Motion Sensors: Self-contained, K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units; fully enclosed by its plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection-field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. 1. Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional

detection.

D. Presence Sensors: Self-contained, active-infrared scanner units; adjustable to provide detection-field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. Sensors shall remain active at all times.

E. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting. Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed.

F. Push-Plate Switch: Momentary-contact door-control switch with flat push-plate actuator with contrasting-colored, engraved message. 1. Configuration: Square push plate with 4-by-4-inch junction box.

a. Mounting: Recess mounted, semiflush in wall. 2. Push-Plate Material: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from manufacturer's

full range. 3. Message: International symbol of accessibility and "Push to Open."

G. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084229 - 8

2.7 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish unless otherwise indicated.

B. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Device that allows door to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position. Maximum force to open door shall be as stipulated in "Performance Requirements" Article. Interrupt powered operation of door operator while in breakaway mode. 1. Include emergency-exit features of automatic entrances serving as a required

means of egress, that allow egress without any special knowledge when doors are locked to stop entry into the building.

C. Automatic Locking: Electrically controlled device mounted in header that automatically locks sliding door against sliding when in closed position. Provide fail secure operation if power fails with panic hardware that allows emergency egress. 1. Include concealed, vertical-rod exit devices, UL 305, with latching into threshold

and overhead carrier assembly and released by full-width panic bar; and that prevent emergency breakaway doors from swinging unless released to permit emergency egress.

2. Include locking devices for sidelites to prevent manual break out.

D. Weather Stripping: Replaceable components. 1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with

nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or

discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match framing. a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and

structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084229 - 9

1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads.

2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces.

3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 4. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection

devices.4 5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to

produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 6. Fabricate exterior components to drain condensation and water passing joints

within system to the exterior. 7. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly

from building structure. 8. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units.

C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware.

D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing.

E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."

F. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. 1. Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors

and breakaway sidelites.

G. Controls: 1. General: Factory install activation and safety devices in doors and headers as

required by BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel. 2. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites, with dimension above

finished floor as follows: a. Top Beam: 48 inches. b. Bottom Beam: 24 inches.

2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084229 - 10



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrances.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic entrance installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install automatic entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls, wiring, and connection to the building's power supply. 1. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints

free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.

2. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

3. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating.

B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent

possible. 2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and

true to location with anchorage for permanent support. 3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within

framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior. 4. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout.

C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system.

D. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system as specified in Division 16.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084229 - 11

E. Controls: Install and adjust activation and safety devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. Connect control wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

F. Guide Rails: Install rails according to BHMA A156.10, including Appendix A, and manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

G. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 08800 "Glazing."

H. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" to provide weathertight installation. 1. Set thresholds, bottom-guide-track system, framing members and flashings in

full sealant bed. 2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.

I. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door and breakaway sidelite as required by cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel.

J. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.


A. Certified Inspector: Owner will engage a Certified Inspector to test and inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections.

B. Automatic entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware, moving parts, door operators, and controls to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards. 1. Adjust exterior doors for weathertight closure.

B. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to [four] visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084229 - 12

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 08800 "Glazing" for cleaning and

maintaining glass.

3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 24 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic entrance operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 1. Engage a Certified Inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment

or repair and at end of maintenance period. Furnish completed inspection reports to Owner.

2. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours.

3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week, emergency callback service.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 084423STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED

CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 1

SECTION 084423 - STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Factory-glazed, four-sided structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall assemblies. 2. Coordination for electrically operated hardware including card reader. 3. Anchorage for above systems, including pre-set inserts in structure, bracing, and

reinforcing as required. 4. Engineering design. 5. Trim at Base of Window: Metal trim extending from bottom horizontal mullion

down to grade.

B. Electric Coordination: 1. See Section 087100, Door Hardware. 2. Electrical Devices provided under This Section: See "Section Includes" above. 3. Voltages and Operation Requirements:

a. Operator: 120 VAC. b. Actuating Devices: 24 VAC.

4. Verify all voltages with Divisions 26-28 upon award of Contract and coordinate operation of card reader with electrical Automatic Handicap Closer/Openers.

C. Related Sections: 1. 050513 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal: For factory applied, heat cured

coatings on exposed metal surfaces. 2. 088000 - Glazing.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Curtain wall, curtainwall, curtain-wall are interchangeable terms for purposes of this Section.

1.3 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The character of these documents is intended to provide a performance type specification for the design, fabrication and installation of the aluminum curtain wall systems. Contractor is responsible for the engineering and design of all components and materials as well as the fabrication, installation and performance of the curtain wall systems.



CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 2

B. Architectural drawings are diagrammatic. The architectural details shown are intended as a guide for the aesthetic and interfacing requirements of the various components of the exterior wall to and with other work. The requirements shown by the details are intended to establish basic dimensions of the module and the sight lines, jointing and profiles of members. The Contractor is responsible for the design and engineering of the system within these aesthetic parameters. The drawings are not to be construed as engineering design, or adequate to meet the engineering design requirements.

C. It is recognized that the architectural design details do not cover some conditions or modifications, which may be required. It is, however, intended that conditions not detailed shall be developed through the Contractor's shop drawings to the same level of aesthetics and in compliance with performance criteria as indicated for detailed areas and as stipulated in these specifications.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS DESCRIPTION

A. The Drawings show design intent. Products provided must conform to design intent shown.

B. Contractor is solely responsible for engineering design of the systems following the below listed architectural design criteria and performance criteria specified under PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS.

C. Glazing System: As indicated in PART 2.

D. Size Requirements: 1. Width (Sight Line): Horizontal and vertical member width shall be the same

within each system. Field and perimeter member widths as follows a. Typical Field Width Dimension: 2-1/2 inches.

2. Minimum Perimeter Width Dimension: 2-1/2 inches 3. Depth: Horizontal and vertical member depth to be as required for wind loading

and for sill as shown on drawings and be the same within each system. Provide horizontal mullions at least 1-1/4” less in interior depth were window blind passes by interior horizontal mullion, as detailed on drawings.

E. Fireblocking: Provide fireblocking between curtain wall, and edge of slab at floor levels and roof level. Design and fabricate curtain wall, including spandrel conditions, to meet requirements for firestopping. Comply with UL design indicated on drawings.

F. Field Installed Sealant Joints: 1. Bonding Surface: Not less than 3/8 inch wide. Configure so standard

hourglass sealant shape can be installed. 2. Location: Locate to prevent weep blockage. 3. Size: Not less than 1/4 inch wide. Not greater than 3/4 inch wide unless

specifically accepted by Architect or required to accommodate calculated movement.



CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 3

G. Design Modifications: Make design modifications of work shown only as may be necessary to meet performance requirements and coordinate the work. Maintain the general exterior design concept without altering spacings, profiles, or alignments shown.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazed aluminum curtain walls.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting

structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.


C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Speeds: 90 mph. 2. Importance Factor: 1.15. 3. Exposure Category: c. 4. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Sill Covers: Concentrated vertical load of 200 pounds applied at any point.

a. Design to withstand the loads without damage or permanent deformation.

D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction

perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1 mm), whichever is less.




1/4-inch (6. 35-mm) for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m) or 1/175 times span, for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m).


not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.



CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 4

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.




G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No uncontrolled water on indoor face of any component when tested at a static

pressure of 15 PSF (718 Pa).

H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501 as follows: 1. No uncontrolled water on indoor face of any component when tested at minimum

at a dynamic pressure of 15 PSF (718 Pa).

I. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Vision Glass Area of Glazed Curtain Wall Assemblies:

a. Thermal Winter Transmittance (U-factor): 1) Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than

0.30 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg. as determined according to NFRC 100 when tested with glass type IG-1 as specified in Section 088000 - Glazing.

2) Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.29 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg. as determined according to NFRC 100 when tested with glass type IG-1, as specified in Section 088000 - Glazing, with a frame that is 11 feet - 6 inches high x 16 feet - 4 inches wide, with no horizontal intermediate mullions and 4 equally spaced intermediate vertical mullions.

b. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 76 as determined according to NFRC 500.

2. Non-Vision Glass Area of Glazed Curtain Wall Assemblies: a. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall

have U-factor of not more than 0.0555 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 1) Insulation shall be continuous at interior side of the curtain wall with a

minimum U-factor at any location shall not exceed 0.1157. b. Vapor Retarder at Warm Side of Insulation: Provide continuous vapor

retarder on interior side of insulation. 1) Perm Rate: 0.03 perms per ASTM E96.

3. Exterior wall system to meet latest edition of Model Energy Code. Provide calculations showing compliance and applicable test data.

J. Acoustical Performance: When tested in accordance with ASTME 90 and AAMA 1801: 1. Sound Transmission Class (STC) shall not be less than: 33. 2. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) shall not be less than: 26.



CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 5

K. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.

L. Glass Statistical Factor (Safety Factor): Glass thicknesses when shown on the drawings are for convenience of detailing only and are to be confirmed by the Contractor or glass manufacturer. Provide glass thicknesses for the size openings shown such that the probability of breakage at the design wind pressure will not exceed 8 lights per 1000 lights (S.F. = 2.5). Glass manufacturer to provide, on request, substantiating glass breakage data if such data is not otherwise available as manufacturer's published data.

M. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of curtain-wall assemblies.

N. Structural-Sealant Joints: 1. Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi.

O. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving

no sealant material behind. 2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not

separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.



1.7 SUBMITTALS



barriers. 2. Detail weeps, and indicate frequency of weeps, required for proper drainage of

water collected within curtain wall system. 3. Shop drawings shall include the curtain wall manufacturer's logo in the title block

on all drawings.


D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.



CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 6

E. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from manufacturer.


G. Performance Data: Furnish manufacturers’ written data substantiating products meet or exceed performance requirements specified herein.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Sample warranties.

J. Finish and Maintenance Data: Provide written instructions for the following as required under Section 017823, Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Finishes. Include glass. 2. Maintenance: Recommended materials and methods for proper maintenance of

work provided under this Section. 3. A cross reference sheet for all specially marked components. 4. Parts catalog to match job. 5. Tag tools for positive identification and deliver to Owner prior to acceptance of

work. 6. Manufacturers' brochures describing the actual materials used in the work.

Include alloys, sealants, gaskets, and all other major components.



B. Electrical Coordination: Ensure that all electrical components and requirements are properly coordinated for successful operation. Obtain catalogue cuts, power characteristics, shop drawings, and other information necessary for coordination from providers of work of other appropriate Sections at earliest possible time.

C. Electrical Work: Comply with requirements of Divisions 26-28.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except


F. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of curtain-wall assemblies.



CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 7

G. Structural-Sealant Joints: 1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing. 2. Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi.

H. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving

no sealant material behind. 2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not

separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.

1.9 MOCKUPS

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings, build as independent

self-supporting mockup Maintain mock-up until substantial completion. 2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field

Quality Control" Article. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the


1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer and Contractor agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide YKK AP YCW 750 Four Side SSG Series by YKK AP America Inc. for structurally glazing system; or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Wausau. 2. Kawneer. 3. Vistawall. 4. YKK America. 5. Harmon. 6. Shuco USA LP. 7. Pioneer Cladding and Glazing Systems, LLC.



CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 8

2.2 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Glazing System: 4-side structural silicone glazing. 2. Glazing Plane: Front. 3. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 4. Fabrication Method: Either factory- or field-fabricated system. 5. Mullion Depth: 6-1/2 inches.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum units where feasible, otherwise nonmagnetic stainless steel, ASTM A 666 Type 304 or 316; except, at fabricator's option, brackets not exposed to moisture or abrasion may be hot dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123, Coating Grade 85 (2 oz./sf). Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for installation and alignment of work.

C. Materials: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and

finish indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

1) Minimum Thickness: 0.050 b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.


2.3 GLAZING

A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Provide in conformance with Section 088000.

B. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in curtain-wall assembly indicated. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Weatherseal Sealants within Curtain Wall System: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall manufacturers for this use. 1. Color: Match structural sealant.



CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 9

D. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

2.4 OTHER MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. Spandrel Insulation: Insulation shall be approved for use with firestopping system installed between curtain wall and edge of slab. Specifications based on "Thermafiber FIRESPAN" by Thermafiber; a dark colored semi

B. -rigid mineral fiber blanket capable of withstanding 2000 degrees F for 5 hours and preventing passage of flame when tested according to ASTM E 119; other fire resistive qualities to equal or exceed manufacturer's published standards. Provide in thickness shown and with scrim-reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be approved for firestopping system used at edge of concrete slab. Grain of insulation shall be run vertically unless indicated otherwise on approved shop drawings for firestopping. 1. Maximum Flame-Spread: 25, ASTM E84. 2. Maximum Smoke-Developed Indexes: 5, ASTM E84. 3. Thermal Resistivity: Not less than 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F. 4. Foil Faced Vapor Retarder: 0.02 perms, ASTM E96. 5. Locations:

a. Where indicated. b. At cavity behind glass spandrel panels in glazed framing systems. c. Over mullions in concealed spaces.

C. Flashing: 1. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft stainless steel, 26-gauge, type selected by

manufacturer for compatibility or manufacturer's standard aluminum.

D. Fasteners: 1. Exposed: Flat head design, countersunk flush, finish to match adjacent

aluminum. Series 300 stainless steel or aluminum. 2. Unexposed: Cadmium & colored chromate plated meeting F.S. QQ-P-416C,

Type II, Class 1.

E. Special Parts: Provide as required or shown.

F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard with exposed portions matching finish of curtain wall system. Provide slip-joint linings of sheets, pads, shims, or washers of fluorocarbon resin, or similar material recommended by manufacturer at joints where movement must be accommodated. 1. Steel for Anchorage: ASTM A 36, sizes as required to meet structural

requirements. Prime finish 1 coat zinc chromate paint conforming to FS TT-P-645.

2. Pre-Set Inserts: For anchorage of curtain wall systems to concrete structure. Galvanized steel channel shaped devices or malleable iron devices by Halfen, Unistrut, Hohmann & Barnard or approved equal. Sizes as required for loads within manufacturer's recommended working limits. Provide additional reinforcing bars looped through anchor and extended into structure as required to assure against pull-out.



CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 10

3. Caulking Stops: PVC extrusions molded to close open backs of aluminum extrusions and provide suitable space and support for backer rod and sealant; manufacturer's standard devices. a. Locations:

1) Perimeter of curtainwall framing. 2) Provide as substrate for sealant specified in Section 079200 - Joint

Sealants. 3) Where shown on drawings.

4. Strap Anchors: Stainless steel devices, configuration, size, and thickness as needed for conditions of application and strength. Provide where: a. Suitable substrate not available in locations needed for direct anchorage

through aluminum framing members. b. Attachment would necessitate drilling or penetrating steel lintel with flashing

above. 5. Door Frame Insert: Manufacturer’s offset door frame unit to align exterior face

of door with exterior face of glazing. 6. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint

12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

7. Miscellaneous: As needed for complete installation.

2.5 ENTRANCES

A. Swinging Door Entrances: Comply with Section 084213 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances.

B. Automatic Sliding Door Entrances: Provide in conformance with Section 084229 - Automatic Entrances.

2.6 FABRICATION


B. Meet or exceed DESIGN REQUIREMENTS and PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS in Part 1 above.

C. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

D. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. All exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line and

design with all joints, unless otherwise shown or specified being accurately fitted and rigidly secured. Exposed edges shall be finished to match face of the work.

5. Provide fully permanent weather and water tight joints both exposed to exterior and within glass cavity by sealing with high performance compounds.

6. Fully degrease and clean machined members prior to assembly or application of sealant compounds.



CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 11

a. Where required, weld by methods recommended by manufacturer and AWS to avoid discoloration at welds. Grind exposed welds smooth.

7. Provide tubular and/or solid extruded aluminum mullions and horizontal rail shapes with sharp, well defined corners and flush sight lines. Horizontal tube at bottom of curtain wall shall be a tube shape of extruded aluminum, size and shape as indicated on drawings a. Provide major framing members factory assembled in basic rectangular

units sized for ease of erection and transportation. 8. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing

to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 9. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and

exterior for spandrel glazing panels. 10. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to


E. Fabricate components to resist water penetration as follows: 1. Mullions at Wall Type Transitions: Provide basic rectangular mullion units with a

continuous flat aluminum surface, perpendicular to face of glass. The continuous flat aluminum surface shall occur full depth of mullion and on face that accepts an interior sealant joint from interior side and a two-stage sealant joint from exterior side. See two-stage sealant joints specified in Section 079200.

2. Factory-Assembled Frame Units: 3. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 4. All joinery must be factory sealed with sealant. 5. Provide major framing members factory assembled in basic rectangular units

sized for ease of erection and transportation. 6. Provide interlocking male/female type stack joints at all adjacent vertical grid

frame members to allow for expansion and contraction of frame units and sealed with two rows of neoprene weather-stripping in grooves extruded as an integral part of sections. "Stick" system type one piece tubular vertical members which do not allow for expansion and contraction in vertical members will not be acceptable.

7. Provide interlocking male/female type stack joints at horizontal mullions at each floor level. Stack joint members to allow for thermal expansion. "Stick" system type one-piece tubular members will not be acceptable. a. Stack joint to occur at first horizontal mullion above finished floor; unless

approved otherwise by Architect. 8. Prepare surfaces that are in contact structural sealant according to sealant

manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. 9. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 10. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 11. Install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 12. Insulation & Vapor Barrier: Install insulation and vapor barrier at all non-vision

areas including metal panels, and spandrel glass. a. Insulation: Trim insulation so foil-facing laps curtain wall framing by

nominal 3/4 inch and insulation fills framing with compressed fit, tight to framing. Tape perimeter with foil-faced tape to complete seal to framing and maintain vapor retarder properties of foil faced insulation. Tape must have minimum 1/2 inch bond to framing or tape which is bonded to framing. Maintain a 1 inch clear dimension from interior face of glazing and insulation.



CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 12

b. Perform fabrication within a relatively dry environment and preclude trapping moisture within the system.

F. Drainage System: Provide weep holes and drainage slots within glazing pockets to drain all condensation or accumulating water within the system to exterior.

G. Reinforcements and Anchors: 1. Reinforce work as necessary to meet performance requirements, and for support

to structure. 2. Anchors to adequately secure components to structure to meet performance

requirements and to provide fully for anticipated building movement or thermal movement of component materials.

3. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or preformed separators which will prevent corrosion or electrolytic action in accordance with industry standards and procedures.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.




A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.

2.9 EDGE OF SLAB FIRESTOPPING

A. Firestopping: Provide firestopping between curtain wall, and edge of slab at floor levels and roof level. Design and fabricate curtain wall, including spandrel conditions, to meet requirements for firestopping. Comply with UL design indicated on drawings. Firestopping shall conform with Section 078500 - Fire-Resistant Joint Systems

B. Edge of Slab Firestopping: Provide fire resistant joint system between edge of structural slab and precast architectural concrete in conformance with Section 078500 - Fire-Resistant Joint Systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION





CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 13

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION


electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize

distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. 7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.


action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum is in contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Electrically Operated Devices: 1. Provide wiring and connections internal to system including actuating devices. 2. Utilize conduit provided under another division. 3. Leave ready for final connection under Divisions 26-28.

H. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions, to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erection Tolerances: Install structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.



CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423 - 14

2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abutt in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.



B. Test Area: Perform tests on representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls.

C. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls. 1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas

designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.

D. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 084423.10CUSTOM

STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 1

SECTION 084423.10 - CUSTOM STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Factory-glazed, four-sided structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall assemblies, with

parrallelagram shaped glazing openings that are not at a 90 degree corners. a. Location: Curtain wall passing edge of slab at third floor and extending to

top of building.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design Structural-Sealant-Glazed Curtain Walls. Design glazed framing systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. The determinations of member sizes and internal profiles, is responsibility of Contractor. Glazed framing systems members shown or detailed on the Drawings to be regarded as a basis of design intent to show general arrangement and function of the various components of the building and not required member sizes except for limitation specified under design requirements description herein. 1. The Drawings show aesthetic design intent. Products provided must conform to

design intent shown and performance levels specified.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting

structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.


C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Speeds: 90 mph. 2. Importance Factor: 1.15. 3. Exposure Category: B 4. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Sill Covers: Concentrated vertical load of 200 pounds applied at any point.

a. Design to withstand the loads without damage or permanent deformation.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 2

D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction

perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1 mm), whichever is less.




1/4-inch (6.35-mm) for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m) or 1/175 times span, for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m).







G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when

tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 lbf/sq. ft.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 3

H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Vision Glass Area:

a. Thermal Winter Transmittance (U-factor): 1) Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than

0.31 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg. as determined according to NFRC 100 when tested with the designated insulating glass. 088000 - Glazing, for the area highlighted in snap shot below (view pdf version to see the blue highlighted area). This U-value does not include the additional thermal value gained by insulating areas behind metal panels, spandrel glass, or shadow box conditions.

2. Non-Vision Glass Area: a. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall

have U-factor of not more than 0.0555 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 1) Insulation shall be continuous at interior side of the curtain wall with a

minimum U-factor at any location shall not exceed 0.1157. b. Vapor Retarder at Warm Side of Insulation: Provide continuous vapor

retarder on interior side of insulation. 1) Perm Rate: 0.03 perms per ASTM E96.

I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.

J. Structural-Sealant Joints: 1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing. 2. Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi (138 kPa).




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 4

K. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving

no sealant material behind.

L. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.



1.4 SUBMITTALS



barriers.


D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from manufacturer.


G. Quality-Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality-control reports.

H. Source quality-control reports.

I. Field quality-control reports.

J. Sample warranties.

K. Maintenance data.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 5



B. Laboratory Mockup Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except


E. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of curtain-wall assemblies.

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION LABORATORY MOCKUPS

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform testing on preconstruction laboratory mockups.

B. Build preconstruction laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, products, and methods of construction that will be used at Project site. 1. Size and Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when

preconstruction laboratory mockups will be constructed and tested.

C. Preconstruction Laboratory Mockup Testing Program: Test preconstruction laboratory mockups according to requirements in "Performance Requirements" Article. Perform the following tests in the following order: 1. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 50 percent of positive test load. 2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. 3. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331. 4. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: AAMA 501.1. 5. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 100 percent of positive and negative test loads.

Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.

6. Interstory Drift: AAMA 501.4 at 100 percent of design displacement. Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 6

7. Vertical Interstory Movement: AAMA 501.7. Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.

8. Thermal Cycling: According to AAMA 501.5. Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.

9. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 100 and 150 percent of positive and negative test loads. Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Vistawall. 2. Harmon. 3. Shuco USA LP. 4. Pioneer Cladding and Glazing Systems, LLC. 5. Kawneer North America. 6. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 7. YKK AP America Inc. 8. Wausau Window and Wall Systems.

2.2 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Fabrication Method: Either factory- or field-fabricated system. 2. Glazing System: Retained with structural sealant on four sides.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 7

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 1. Brackets to support the curtain wall shall be concealed from view.

a. Where vision glass passes finished floor surface recess supports for curtain wall in floor slab or below floor slabs so supports are concealed from view.

b. Where window sill for vision glass is near finished floor recess supports for curtain wall in floor slab or below floor slabs so supports are concealed from view. 1) A window sill extension that conceals curtain wall support set on top

of concrete slab is acceptable if the window sill extension conceals the support from view and the top face of the window sill extension is coplanar with the top face of the first horizontal mullion above finished floor.

C. Materials: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and

finish indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. d. Coating: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

e. Locations: 1) As required to meet PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS.

D. Splice Joint Seals: 123 Silicone Seal by Dow Corning or Sil-Span by Pecora Corp. A preformed ultra-low modulus silicone extrusion. Minimum 2 inches wide. Include manufacturer's recommended silicone adhesive for installation.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 8

2.3 CURTAIN WALL INSULATION

A. Spandrel Insulation: Insulation shall be approved for use with firestopping system installed between curtain wall and edge of slab. Specifications based on "Thermafiber FIRESPAN" by Thermafiber; a dark colored semi-rigid mineral fiber blanket capable of withstanding 2000 degrees F for 5 hours and preventing passage of flame when tested according to ASTM E 119; other fire resistive qualities to equal or exceed manufacturer's published standards. Provide in thickness shown and with scrim-reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be approved for firestopping system used at edge of concrete slab. Grain of insulation shall be run vertically unless indicated otherwise on approved shop drawings for firestopping. 1. Maximum Flame-Spread: 25, ASTM E84. 2. Maximum Smoke-Developed Indexes: 5, ASTM E84. 3. Thermal Resistivity: Not less than 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F. 4. Foil Faced Vapor Retarder: 0.02 perms, ASTM E96. 5. Locations:

a. Where indicated. b. At cavity behind glass spandrel panels in glazed framing systems. c. Over mullions in concealed spaces. d. Others: As indicated.

6. Basis-of-Design Product: Thermafiber "FireSpan."

B. Insulation Anchors: 1. Typical: Metal spindle on mounting plate and washer; stainless steel or steel

with galvanized G-90 coating; or approved equal. a. Spindle: Copper-coated low carbon steel or stainless steel, fully annealed,

0.105 inches (2.67 mm) in diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

2.4 GLAZING


B. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in curtain-wall assembly indicated. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall manufacturers for this use. 1. Color: Match structural sealant.

D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 9

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Perforated Shadow Box Liner: Aluminum sheet, minimum 0.080 inches thick; perforation hole size, spacing, and pattern as approved by the Architect.

B. Sill Covers: Extruded aluminum. Provide longest lengths possible to minimize splice joints. Joints to be hairline tight. 1. Locations:

a. Typical. 2. Depth: As required to lap over face of gypsum board at drywall partitions

concealing non-vision areas of curtain wall from view.

C. Jamb and Head Extensions: Provide extruded aluminum jamb and head extensions. 1. Locations:

a. Typical. 2. Depth: As required to lap over face of gypsum board at drywall partitions

concealing non-vision areas of curtain wall from view.

2.6 LOUVERS

A. Horizontal Blade Louver: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

PL-4080 by Construction Specialties, Inc. or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2. Appearance: Horizontal blade louver with perforated aluminum fascia cover and perimeter edges designed to glaze into structurally glazed curtain wall.

3. Total Depth: 7.5 inches. 4. Description:

a. Heads, sills, jambs and mullions to be one piece structural aluminum members with edge profile to fit into glazing pocket of curtainwall and watertight construction at glazing pocket.

b. Blades to be one piece aluminum extrusions with reinforcing bosses. 1) Blade Orientation: As indicated on drawings.

c. Material: aluminum, unless noted otherwise. d. Material thickness to be as follows:

1) Heads, sills, jambs and mullions: 0.125 inch (2.06mm). 2) Blades: 0.068 inch (1.73 mm). 3) Perforated Face to be 0.125 inch.

5. Perforated aluminum panel in single frame with 4 inch deep blades. Perforated element is face fastened to rear frame and supported by a 0.125 inch aluminum channel frame with mitered. Perforated face element shall be supported in rear as required to minimize deflection, warping, oil canning etc.; and to comply with all engineering criteria. Spacing and location of rear supports will be determined by engineering analysis and shall be identified on the shop drawings. Louver manufactures must supply test data results from an 3rd party organization that have perforated sheet with rear blades in a single frame that meet or exceed performance listed below.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 10

6. Wind Driven Rain Performance: The louver test was based on a 39.370"(1.00m) x 39.370" (1.00 m) core area. Unit tested at a rainfall rate of 3.0 inches per hour (75 mm/hr) with a wind directed to the face of the louver at a velocity 29.1-mph (13 m/s) . The test data shall show the water penetration effectiveness rating at each corresponding ventilation rate.

Core Ventilation Rate (m/s):

0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5

Core Ventilation Rate (ft/min):

0 98 197 295 394 492 591 689

Free Area Ventilation Rate (ft/min):

0 193 387 583 777 970 1163 1360

Rating Effectiveness B C C C C C C D

Effectiveness Ratio 96.2 93.5 91.9 90.8 90.8 88.8 83.1 71.0

Effectiveness Rating: A = 1 to 0.99 B = 0.989 to 0.95 C = 0.949 to 0.80 D = 0.80 to 0

7. Finish: Match finish on curtain wall, except as follows:

a. Perforated Metal: Powder coat with color that matches MCMP-3. 8. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.7 METAL PANELS

A. Metal Panels: Provide in conformance with Section 074217 - Metal Composite Material Wall Panels and as follows: 1. Seal seams to be watertight and meet PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS. 2. Design panels to meet intent of drawings. The vertical faces of different panels,

within the curtain wall, are offset to different dimensions from the face of curtain wall mullions to give a shingle appearance.

3. Color: As indicated on drawings.

2.8 FIREBLOCKING

A. Edge of Slab Fireblocking: Provide as specified under Section 078446 - Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.

B. Locations: Between curtain wall and edge of slabs at floor levels and roof level.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 11

2.9 FABRICATION


B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing

to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to


C. Dual Stage Sealant Joints: At perimeter of framing system provide a watertight tube shape member, or other similar shape acceptable to architect, that allows installation for a dual stage sealant joints installed from exterior side of wall; with sealant joints of equal widths and that are aligned from font to back. 1. Exception: Not required at horizontal mullions under parapet.

D. Factory-Assembled Frame Units: 1. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 2. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant

manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure compatibility and adhesion. 3. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 4. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 5. Install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Locations: Typical.

B. Perforated Shadow Box Liner: Baked enamel or powder coated. 1. Color: As selected by Architect.


A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 12

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize

distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. 7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 8. Install shadow box under conditions of low humidity to preclude condensation

from forming within shadow boxes when building is occupied. Add desiccant as recommended by manufacturer. Fill void to the interior side of the perforated aluminum panel with mineral fiber insulation (without a foil face); and install an aluminum sheet to the interior face of each the curtain wall framing cavity and seal to provide a vapor barrier. Seal framing members within cavity so the cavity formed by metal and glass forms a vapor tight receptacle.

9. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.


B. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

C. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

D. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions, to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Test Area: Perform tests on one bay at least 30 feet (9.1 m), by one story.

C. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls. 1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas

designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 084423.10 - 13

a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.

D. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2. 1. Test a minimum of two areas on each building facade. 2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing.

E. Structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 087100DOOR HARDWARE

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 1

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware.


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per

minute/sq. m) at the tested pressure differential of 0.1-inch of water for both ambient temperature and elevated temperature tests.

C. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

E. Door Closers: All door closers shall be secured to door with sex-bolts. Doors shall also be reinforced for door closers as specified elsewhere.

F. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design and ICC A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting

of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N). 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.

b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not

more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 2

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch.

5. Adjust spring hinges so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 1.5 seconds to move to the closed position.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include details of electrified door hardware and wiring diagrams.

C. Samples: For each exposed finish.

D. Door Hardware Schedule: Organized into door hardware sets indicating type, style, function, size, label, hand, manufacturer, fasteners, location, and finish of each door hardware item. Include description of each electrified door hardware function, including sequence of operation.

E. Keying Schedule: Detail Owner's final keying instructions for locks.

F. Product certificates.


A. Supplier Qualifications: Person who is or employs a qualified DHI Architectural Hardware Consultant.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that are listed to perform electrical modifications, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, are acceptable.

C. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

E. Keys: Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware.

G. Standards: Comply with BHMA A156 series standards, Grade 1.

H. Certified Products: Provide door hardware that is listed in BHMA directory of certified products.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 3

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within warranty period from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 10 years. 2. Warranty Period for Exit Devices: 3 years. 3. Warranty Period for Locks: 7 years. 4. All other hardware one year.

PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product named for each door hardware item indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Product named for each door hardware item indicated in Door Hardware Sets establishes the basis of design. Provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the manufacturers specified for each type of hardware item.

C. Manufacturers Used in the specification: Products Manufacture Specified Acceptable Equals Hinges Ives Hager, Stanley Locksets Schlage No substitutions Exit Devices Von Duprin 99 Series No substitutions Closers LCN 4041XP MC No substitutions Overhead Stops Glynn Johnson Rixson, ABH Push/Pulls, Stops Ives Hager, Rockwood Flushbolts Ives Hager, Rockwood Thresholds/Seals National Guard Hager, Pemko, Zero Key Cabinet Lund Telkee Power Transfers Von Duprin No substitutions Cylinders Medeco No substitutions Electric Strikes Von Duprin No substitutions

2.2 DOOR HARDWARE

A. Scheduled Door Hardware: Provide door hardware according to Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 4

2.3 HINGES

A. General: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 2. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin. 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin.

C. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for out-swinging exterior doors.

D. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; screw heads finished to match surface of hinges.

E. Metal Doors and Frames: Machine screws (drilled and tapped holes).

2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Mortise Locks: 1. Locks shall be ANSI A156.13, Grade 1 mortise locksets, Manufactured from

heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance.

2. Locks to have a standard 2-3/4” backset with a full 3/4" throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latch bolt. Deadbolt shall be a full 1” throw, constructed of stainless steel.

3. Lever trim shall be cast or forged in the design specified, with 2-1/8” diameter roses. Levers to be thru-bolted to assure proper alignment. Trim shall be applied by threaded bushing “no exposed screws”

2.5 BOLTS

Shall have forged bronze faceplate with extruded brass lever wrought brass guide and strike. Flush bolts for hollow metal doors shall be extension rod type door up to 7’6” in height shall have 12” steel or brass rods, manual flush bolts for doors over 7’6” in height shall be increased by 6” for each additional 6” of door height. Wood doors shall have corner-wrap type. Provide dust proof strikes for all bottom bolts.

2.6 EXIT DEVICES

A. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.

B. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.

C. All lever design shall match mortise or cylindrical lock lever designs.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 5

D. All devices to incorporate a security dead-latching feature. Provide roller strikes for all rim and surface mounted vertical rod devices, ASA strikes for mortise devices, and manufacturer’s standard strikes for concealed vertical rod devices.

E. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3. 1. Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and

labeled for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for which they have been tested.

F. Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors, unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.

2.7 CLOSERS

A. Surface-Mounted Closers:

B. All closers will utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120 degrees Fahrenheit to –30 degrees Fahrenheit without seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers on fire rated doors will be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with standard UL 10C for “Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies” and UBC 7-2 (1997).

C. Door closers shall hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder. Cylinder body shall be 1 1/2" in diameter, and double heat-treated pinion shall be 11/16” in diameter. A written certificate showing successful completion of a minimum or 10,000,000 cycles for exterior door closers must be provided.

D. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and back check.

E. All closers will not be seen on the public side or hallway side of the door. The appropriate drop plate or mounting plates will be used as conditions dictate.

F. Use of sext bolts prohibited, unless approved by Architect in writing.

2.8 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Protective Trim Units: Sized 2” inches less than door width on push side and 1” inch less than door width on pull side, by height scheduled or indicated. Fasten with exposed machine or self-tapping screws.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 6

2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Stops and Holders: Provide floor stops for doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.

B. Silencers for Door Frames: Neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

2.10 DOOR GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS

A. Door Gasketing: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

2.11 CYLINDERS, KEYING, AND STRIKES

A. Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Provide cylinders for doors specified to need cylinders in Sections

083113 - Access Doors, Frames and 084126 - All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts, and 107516 - Ground-Set Flagpoles: even though door hardware schedule may indicate “ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER”.

B. Keying System: All cylinders keyed to owners existing Medeco key system as directed by owner/Architect at later date

2.12 FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials if different from specified standard.

B. Fasteners: Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Provide steel machine or wood screws or steel through bolts for fire-rated applications.

C. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors.

D. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."

E. Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 7

EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

B. Steel Door and Frame Preparation: Comply with DHI A115 series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface-applied hardware according to SDI 107.

C. Wood Door Preparation: Comply with DHI A115-W series.

D. Mounting Heights: Comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for

Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders'

Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

E. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 1. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant

complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

F. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that from an open position of 70 degrees,

the door will take at least three seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.


A. Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 8

3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

Hardware Group No. 01

Each To Have: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr

ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4" X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA PULL PLATE 8305 8" 4" X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4" X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA PULL PLATE 8305 8" 4" X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH MC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW 630 IVE



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CYL X TURN DEAD

LOCK L460L L583-363 626 SCH

1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA FLUSH PULL 94 626 ROC 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 9



6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080L M81A 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 2 EA OH STOP & HOLDER 100H 630 GLY



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99-L-NL-M81 626 VON 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99-L-NL-M81 626 VON 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW 630 IVE


Each To Have:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 10

Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080L M81A 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050CL CLR NGP



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 99-L-BE-F-M81 626 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050CL CLR NGP



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 689 VON 1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT

HARDWARE RX-ALK-99-L-BE-F-M81-RSS PBAR-SNB 626 VON

1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050CL CLR NGP

CREDENTIAL READ. FURN. SECT. 281300

EA NOTE POWER SUPPLY FUR. SECT. 281300 CREDENTIAL READER EITHER SIDE SHUNTS ALARM ALLOWING UNRESTRICTED EGRESS/INGRESS





NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 11

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080L M81A 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050CL CLR NGP



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080L M81A 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH MC 689 LCN 1 SET SEALS 5050CL CLR NGP



6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9947-EO 626 VON 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH MC 689 LCN 1 EA DRIP CAP 17 AL NGP 1 SET SEALS 110SA CL NGP 1 SET ASTRAGAL 115NA CL NGP 1 EA PANIC THRESHOLD 896S AL NGP



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 12



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 689 VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC

HARDWARE RX-ALK-99-EO-RSS PBAR-SNB 626 VON

1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH MC

X D. P X 30 X 61 689 LCN

1 EA PANIC THRESHOLD 896S AL NGP EA NOTE POWER SUPPLY FUR. SECT.

281300

EA SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER Each To Have:

Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 689 VON 1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT

HARDWARE RX-ALK-99-L-F-M81-RSS PBAR-SNB 626 VON

2 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH MC 689 LCN 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 FA900 LGR SCE


EA NOTE POWER SUPPLY FUR. SECT. 281300 CREDENTIAL READER EITHER SIDE SHUNTS ALARM ALLOWING UNRESTRICTED EGRESS/INGRESS



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 13



2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE 1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK L9092LEU M81A RX 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC

(180 DEGREE @ DOOR 106) 689 LCN

1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE CREDENTIAL READ. FURN. SECT.

281300

EA NOTE POWER SUPPLY FUR. SECT. 281300



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK L9040 M81A L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK L9040 M81A L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 14



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA FACULTY RESTROOM L9485L M81A L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6216 FSE DS 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE


EA NOTE POWER SUPPLY FUR. SECT. 281300 WHEN VACANT CREDENTIAL READER TO ACCESS ROOM. TURNING DEADBOLT SHUNTS OUT OTHER KEYS. WHEN LEAVING SPACE, SIMPLY DEPRESS LEVER; RETRACTING LATCH AND DEADBOLT. DOOR STAYS LOCKED UNTIL ACCESS BY CREDENTIAL READER



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA FACULTY RESTROOM L9485L M81A L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6216 FSE DS 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH MC 689 LCN


EA NOTE POWER SUPPLY FUR. SECT. 281300 WHEN VACANT, CREDENTIAL READER ALLOWS ACCESS. WHEN OCCUPIED, DEADBOLT SHUTS OUT OTHER READERS. LEAVING SPACE, SIMPLY DEPRESS LEVER; LATCH AND DEADBOLT RETRACTS. OTHER CREDENTIAL READER WOULD THEN ALLOW ACCESS.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 15



2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE 1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK L9092LEU M81A RX 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE 1 EA DRIP CAP 17 AL NGP 1 SET SEALS 110SA CL NGP 1 EA PANIC THRESHOLD 896S AL NGP 1 EA DOOR VIEWER 698 626 IVE





2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA ELECTRIC HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 630 IVE 1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK L9092LEU M81A RX 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH MC 689 LCN 1 EA DRIP CAP 17 AL NGP 1 SET SEALS 110SA CL NGP 1 EA PANIC THRESHOLD 896S AL NGP 1 EA DOOR VIEWER 698 626 IVE





NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 16



3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080L M81A 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ MC 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 110SA CL NGP 1 EA PANIC THRESHOLD 896S AL NGP



2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE 1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK L9092LEU M81A RX 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 MED 1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH MC 689 LCN





1 EA KEY CABINET 1200 SERIES + 50% EXP. LUN



6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9 3347L-BE 626 VON 2 EA ELECTRIC CLOSER 4040SE 689 LCN 2 EA OVERHEAD STOPS 100S 630 GLY



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 087100 - 17

END OF SECTION


SECTION 088000GLAZING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Glazed curtain walls. 4. Storefront framing. 5. Glazed entrances. 6. Sloped glazing. 7. Interior borrowed lites.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to International Building Code by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:

C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings and in compliance with IBC and

authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings and in compliance with IBC and

authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical,

design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.

4. Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design glass to resist each of the following combinations of loads: a. Outward design wind pressure minus the weight of the glass. Base design

on glass type factors for short-duration load. b. Inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus half of the

design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for short-duration load.

c. Half of the inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus the design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for long-duration load.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088000 - 2

5. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at thinnest part of the glass.

6. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.001.

7. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less.

8. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.


A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of

current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches (300 mm) square.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and

GANA's "Glazing Manual."



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088000 - 3

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."

3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing."

4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

D. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature

conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088000 - 4

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Completion.

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness

indicated. 2. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on

LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

3. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

4. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088000 - 5

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I, complying with other requirements specified and with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear. b. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite. c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.

C. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated, and as follows: 1. Bow and Warpage Tolerance: 50 percent less than ASTM C 1048. 2. Roller Wave Distortion Limits: Maximum 0.003 inch center and 0.008 inch

edges in accordance with ASTM C 1651.

D. Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass: Heat-treated float glass, Condition C; with ceramic enamel applied by silk-screened process; complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's Tempering Division's "Engineering Standards Manual" and with other requirements specified. 1. Ceramic Coating Color and Pattern: Match Architect's sample.

E. Reflective-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1376, coated by vacuum deposition (sputter-coating) process, and complying with other requirements specified.

F. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B, Type I, Quality-Q3, and complying with other requirements specified.

G. Reflective-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1376, Kind CS; coated by vacuum deposition (sputter-coating) process, and complying with other requirements specified.

2.3 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with

interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as

needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088000 - 6

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Company, Incorporated, Tamarac, FL, (800-432-8132). 2. AFG Industries, Inc., Atlanta, GA (800-766-2343). 3. Oldcastle Glass (subsidiary of CRH plc.), Rosemont, IL, (866-653-2278). 4. Glass Corporation, family of companies), Cheswick, PA, (800-232-9129). 5. Viracon, Inc., Owatonna, MN 55060, (800-533-2080).

B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal. 2. Spacer: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish .

2.5 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies.

B. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from 2 plies of clear, ceramic flat glass; 5/16-inch (8-mm) total nominal thickness; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products);

FireLite Plus. b. Schott North America, Inc.; Laminated Pyran Crystal. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-L. d. .

2.6 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM or silicone gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by

inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088000 - 7

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.9 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type GL-1 & GL-1T: Float glass, tempered. 1. Annealed tempered. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal. 3. Color: Clear. 4. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.10 LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type LG-1: Clear laminated glass with two plies of clear float glass.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088000 - 8

1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3.0 mm. 2. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch. 3. Provide safety glazing labeling.

B. Glass Type LG-1T: Clear laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered clear float glass. 1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3.0 mm. 2. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch. 3. Provide safety glazing labeling.

C. Glass Type LG-2TF: Frosted laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered clear float glass. 1. Laminated Glass: Nominal 1/2" thick assembly of 2 lights

a. Outer pane of Glass: 6mm thick clear, heat strengthened, acid etch #41. b. PVB Interlayer: 0.060" clear. c. Inner pane of Glass: 3mm thick clear, heat strengthened.

2. Provide safety glazing labeling. 3. Basis of Design:

a. Viracon, 9/16" clear laminated SF-41glass HS/HS. 1) 1/4" (6mm) clear acid etched 41 #1 HS- .060 (1.52mm) clear pvb-

1/4" (6mm) clear HS.

2.11 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type IG-1: Low-E insulating glass. 1. Basis of Design: VE-1-2M Insulating HS/HS by Viracon with ow-e coating on #2

and #4 surface. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass, VE-2M #2. 5. Interspace Content: Argon. 6. Indoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass with room side low-E. 7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.20 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F, maximum. 8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.17 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. maximum. 9. Transmittance:

a. Visible Light: 70%. b. Solar Energy: 32%. c. U-V (300-380 nm): 10%.

10. Reflectance: a. Visible Light - Exterior: 11. b. Visible Light - Interior: 11%. c. Solar Energy: 31.

11. Shading Coefficient: 0.42 12. Relative Heat Gain (Btu / (hr x sqft): 87. 13. Solar factor (SHGC): 0.37. 14. At glazing units larger than 72 inches x 120 inches and larger than 60 inches by

142 inches the low-e coating on the #4 surface maybe deleted. The physical properties of this insulated glass unit are as stated above with the following modifications: a. Transmittance:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088000 - 9

1) Solar Energy: 33%. b. Reflectance:

1) Visible Light - Interior: 12%. c. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.25 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F, maximum. d. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.21 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

15. Exterior Service Type Door Locations: Revise IG-1 so exterior pane of glass is a laminated unit that is a nominal 1/4 inches thick. a. Interlayer: “SentryGlas" ionoplast interlayer not less than 0.060 inch (1.52

mm) thick.

B. IG-1T: (Insulating, clear, Low-E, tempered): 1. Same as Type IG-1 except inner and outer panes are tempered.

C. Glass Type IG-1S: Same as Type IG-1 except with simulated sand blast on #3 Surface and low-e on #4 surface is deleted. 1. Simulated Sand Blast:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: #1086 by Viracon, Inc. b. Location: #3 Surface.

D. Glass Type IG-1F: Low-E insulating glass with frit pattern on #3 Surface. 1. Small dark gray dot pattern of 60% solid:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Match Architect’s sample. b. Location: #3 Surface.

2.12 SPANDREL-GLASS TYPES

A. SG-1: (Insulating Spandrel, clear, Low-E, heat strengthened): 1. Same as IG-1 except for the following:

a. Both inner and outer panes are heat strengthened b. #4 surface to have custom frit color as selected by Architect.

2.13 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES

A. Glass Type FR-1: Fire-resistive glass: 1. Thickness: 3/16 inch. 2. Laminated and impact safety-rated listed for scheduled minute fire resistance for

units of size shown on drawings. 3. Product: TGP's "FireLite Plus". 4. Fire Rating: Match rating of assemble supporting glazing.

2.14 SLIDING GLASS WINDOW

A. Track Assembly: #1092 P "Ezy Roll" by Knape & Vogt, color anodized aluminum track for sliding glass doors, complete with top and bottom guide and shoe which attaches to glass.

B. Pull: #836 by Knape & Vogt, two piece chrome finish device mounting in 13/16" diameter hold drilled in glass; provide one for each sliding leaf.

C. Lock: KV #963 ratchet lock, polished chrome.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088000 - 10

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,

and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088000 - 11

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088000 - 12

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 088300MIRRORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088300 - 1

SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors: 1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. 2. Film-backed glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: 1. Mirrors: 12 inches (300 mm) square, including edge treatment on two adjoining

edges. 2. Mirror Clips: Full size. 3. Mirror Trim: 12 inches (300 mm) long.

D. Preconstruction test reports.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.



A. Glazing Publications: Comply with GANA's "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

B. Safety Glazing Products: For film-backed mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

C. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088300 - 2

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS (DGL-2)

A. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating process. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: a. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. b. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company. c. Binswanger Mirror; a division of Vitro America, Inc. d. D & W Incorporated. e. Donisi Mirror Company. f. Gardner Glass, Inc. g. Gilded Mirrors, Inc. h. Guardian Industries. i. Head West. j. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc. k. Lenoir Mirror Company. l. Maran-Wurzell Glass & Mirror. m. National Glass Industries. n. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc. o. Sunshine Mirror; Westshore Glass Corp. p. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. q. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.

B. Clear Glass: Mirror Select Quality; ultraclear (low-iron) float glass with a minimum 91 percent visible light transmission. 1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm .

C. Safety Glazing Products: For film-backed mirrors, provide products that comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

B. Edge Sealer: Approved by mirror manufacturer.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088300 - 3

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. 1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of not more than 70 g/L when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.

2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE

A. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 1. Finish: Clear bright anodized.

B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.

C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts before tempering for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.

B. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished . Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer.

C. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088300 - 4

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

B. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

C. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 088700GLAZING SURFACE FILMS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088700 - 1

SECTION 088700 – GLAZING SURFACE FILMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Surface applied glazing films with digital image.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of film type. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

C. Samples: 1. Provide sample of each type of finish indicated on clear glass.

a. Size: Not less than 4 inches x 4 inches.

D. Maintenance Data: For films to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Do not install film when outside temperature is less than 40°F (5°C)

B. Lighting: Do not install window film until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot-candles (160 lux) is provided on the surfaces to receive window film.

C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by the window film manufacturer for full drying or curing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Glazing Surface Films (DGLV-1))

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide WINSCOUV, Item Code E-2200ZC manufactured by Lintec.

B. Approved Fabricators: 1. Digico Imaging Inc., 3487 E. Fulton St., Columbus, OH 43227, 614-239-5200,

(Contact: Tred Rowland).


SECTION 088700GLAZING SURFACE FILMS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 088700 - 2

C. Print Medium: As recommended by glazing surface film manufacturer and approved by Architect.

D. Glass Type GL-C1 with Digital Image: 1. Match appearance and quality of existing similar graphic images. Architect will

designate the existing graphics to be used as standard of quality.

E. Glass Type GL-T1: Match Appearance of Architects sample. See Finish Legend for description of Architect's Sample.

F. Glass Type GL-T2: Match Appearance of Architects sample. See Finish Legend for description of Architect's Sample.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide accessories and tools recommended by manufacturer for project installation conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.


A. General: Comply with window film manufacturer’s written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

B. Install window film with no gaps or overlaps. Make butt splices, if necessary, using straightedge and sharp knife.

C. Apply film to the non-public side of glass, unless indicated otherwise.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.

B. Use cleaning methods recommended by window film manufacturer.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Attach signs reading “Window Film Applied. Do not wash these windows or remove this notice until 30 days after installation” to head of window frame or other conspicuous location.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 090563MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION

CONTROL FOR FLOORING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 090563 - 1

SECTION 090563 - MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL FOR FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Fluid-applied membrane-forming systems that control the moisture-vapor-emission rate of interior concrete as required for floor covering installation.

B. Related Sections: 1. 03 1500 - Concrete Accessories: For vapor retarder under concrete slab on

grade. 2. Division 09 Sections: For flooring system substrate requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MVE: Moisture vapor emission.

B. MVER: Moisture vapor emission rate.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



C. Preinstallation testing reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample warranty.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Employs factory-trained personnel who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection.

B. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain components from same manufacturer or manufacturer approved by system manufacturer.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace vapor retarder and floor covering that that fails due to moisture vapor emission and moisture born contaminates within specified warranty period.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 090563 - 2

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. MVE-Control System Capabilities: Capable of achieving the following: 1. MVER: Maximum 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM F

1869. 2. Alkalinity Resistance: Capable of being in contact with surfaces having alkalinity

content of 14 pH.

2.2 MVE-CONTROL SYSTEM

A. MVE-Control System: ASTM F 3010-qualified, fluid-applied, two-component, epoxy-resin, membrane-forming system; formulated for application on concrete substrates to reduce MVER to level required for installation of floor coverings indicated and acceptable to manufacturers of floor covering products indicated, including adhesives. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aquafin Building Product Systems; Vaportight Coat-SG3. b. KOSTER American Corporation; VAP-I. c. Synthetics International; Synthetic30.

2. Substrate Primer: Provide MVE-control system manufacturer's concrete-substrate primer if required for system indicated by substrate conditions.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Patching and Leveling Material: Moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant product recommended in writing by MVE-control system manufacturer and with minimum of 3000-psi compressive strength after 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Crack-Filling Material: Resin-based material recommended in writing by MVE-control system manufacturer for sealing concrete substrate crack repair.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of system indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 090563 - 3

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Preinstallation Testing: Perform alkalinity and moisture tests in accordance with Division 09 Sections for floor coverings. If not otherwise indicated, perform tests as follows: 1. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests. 2. Alkalinity Testing: Perform pH testing according to ASTM F 710. 3. Moisture Testing: Perform the following tests:

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare and clean substrates according to MVE-control system manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of system to concrete.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install MVE-control system according to ASTM F 3010 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic surface free of surface deficiencies such as pin holes, fish eyes, and voids. 1. Install primers as required to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not apply MVE-control system across substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints.

C. Apply system, including component coats if any, in thickness recommended in writing by MVE-control system manufacturer for MVER required.

D. After curing, examine MVE-control system for surface deficiencies. Repair surface deficiencies according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform testing. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform the following tests:

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869.

B. Installation Inspections: Arrange for MVE control system manufacturer’s technical personnel to inspect substrate preparation and installation of system components to ensure that a complete MVE-control system is installed without deficiencies.

C. MVE-control system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect MVE-control system from damage, wear, dirt, dust, and other contaminants before floor covering installation. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary coverings, recommended in writing by MVE-control system manufacturer.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 090563 - 4

B. Do not allow subsequent preinstallation examination and testing for floor covering installation to damage, puncture, or otherwise compromise the MVE-control system membrane.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 092116GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL

ASSEMBLIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092116 - 1

SECTION 092116 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Shaft-wall enclosures. 2. Chase enclosures. 3. Horizontal enclosures.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. 078446 - Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: For head-of-wall assemblies that

incorporate gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies. 2. 09 8100 - Acoustical Insulation.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Performance: Provide shaftwall assemblies capable of withstanding design

loads within limits and under the following conditions: 2. Design Load: 5 lbf/sq. ft. uniform air-pressure differential acting perpendicular to

covering material supported by metal framing. 3. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without

horizontal deflection greater than 1/240 of the wall height.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated.


A. Qualifications: Provide materials and methods tested for required fire separations and acoustic performance, installed in accordance with this specification and the requirements of local building officials.

B. Except where specified otherwise, provide gypsum board and accessory products by same manufacturer to ensure compatibility and single source responsibility.

C. Allowable Tolerances: Provide framing fabricated and erected to conform with the following allowable tolerances: 1. Partition Framing: Plumb and located within plus or minus 1/4" of required

locations, noncumulative. 2. Ceiling Framing: Level within 1/8" in 10' and erected so that deflection of any

component does not exceed 1/360 of its span after installation of all finish materials and equipment.



ASSEMBLIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092116 - 2

D. Assembly Responsibility: Contractor to ensure rated assemblies can be substantiated by applicable tests using the proposed products. Where assembly rating cannot be substantiated by applicable tests, provide approved products which fulfill rating requirements at no additional cost to University. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

2. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

E. Wall/Partition Terminations: Comply with “Wall/Partition Terminations” under QUALITY ASSURANCE in Part 1 of Section 092900 - Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies.

F. Methods and materials to conform to manufacturer's recommendations as a minimum criteria except where more stringent provisions are shown or specified.

G. Mold Prevention: Comply with recommendations of GA 238 for Transportation & Receiving, Storage & Handling, Application, and Maintenance Following Application.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited

to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


A. Deliver materials to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. Fire-rated materials shall bear testing agency label and fire classification numbers intact and legible. Handle materials with care to prevent damage.

B. Storage: Keep materials dry. Store materials in dry interior spaces, off floor on planks or platforms, stacked flat, and under cover. Avoid conditions conducive to mold formation or deterioration. 1. Avoid overloading floor system. 2. Stack and support board to prevent sagging; do not place long lengths over short

lengths. 3. Comply with the more stringent requirements of manufacturer’s

recommendations, GA-216, and these specifications. 4. See “Storage” under DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE under Section

016000 – Product Requirements.



ASSEMBLIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092116 - 3

C. Remove defective, damaged, or deteriorated materials, including wet board, from jobsite and replace with new conforming materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL

A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated. 1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end

butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly

manufacturer's written recommendations.

2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaced with water-resistant glass mat on front back, and long edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC, Subsidiary of Georgia Pacific; Dens-Glass

Ultra Shaftliner. b. Lafarge North America, Inc.; Firecheck Moldcheck Type X Shaftliner. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Gold Bond BRAND e2XP

Extended Exposure. d. Temple-Inland Inc.; GreenGlass® Liner Board.

2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Long Edges: Double bevel. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D

3273

B. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board."

2.3 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

A. Manufacturer: As required to meet the requirements specified in "Assembly Responsibility" under QUALITY ASSURANCE in PART 1. Provide products by one of the following: 1. Shaft Wall Framing: Provide products by one of the following:

a. Clark/Dietrich Building Systems. b. USG c. Clark/Western. d. Marino/Ware.

B. Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.



ASSEMBLIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092116 - 4

C. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.

C. Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board."

D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.

F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 098100. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of

assembly.

G. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated


2.5 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated on Drawings by design designation of a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated..

C. STC Rating: As indicated.

D. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1. Depth: As indicated. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.

E. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches long and in depth matching studs. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.



ASSEMBLIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092116 - 5

F. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

slotted deflection track systems: a. SLP-TRK® by Clark/Dietrich Building Systems.. b. The System by Metal-Lite, Inc. c. “VertiTrack™ VTD” series by The Steel Network, Inc.

3. Vertical Deflection: 1/2 inch compression and 1/2 inch extension (1 inch vertical movement).

G. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0329 inch thick.

H. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board.

2.6 SEQUENCE/SCHEDULING

A. Applied Fireproofing: All attachments to structural steel framing receiving applied fireproofing, specified elsewhere, to be installed prior to installation of sprayed fireproofing to preclude removal of fireproofing. Include clips, tracks, hangers, and other devices required for subsequent installation of metal framing specified under this section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Applied Fireproofing." 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or

ceiling runner tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.

B. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.



ASSEMBLIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092116 - 6

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: 1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing

indicated. 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels.

B. Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support.

C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing. 1. At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of

door frame. 2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies provide

support as specified in Section 092216-Non-Structural Metal Framing, and accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 gypsum board face panel layer.

D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity of assemblies where required to enclose rods.

E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.

F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.

G. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

H. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in locations specified in Section 092216 - -Non-Structural Metal Framing, while maintaining fire-resistance rating and acoustical rating of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies.

I. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.



ASSEMBLIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092116 - 7

J. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies cannot be positioned within 4 inches of the shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar projections into shaft, install 1/2- or 5/8-inch- thick, gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. No recesses allowed (at steel beams especially). 1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels

in adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches o.c. with screws fastened to shaft-wall framing.

2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24 inches o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft-wall framing.

3. At elevator shafts with no gypsum board partition between the exterior glazed framing system and elevator shaft, the cant is specified elsewhere.

K. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited

to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or


END OF SECTION



ASSEMBLIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092116 - 8



SECTION 092216NON-STRUCTURAL METAL

FRAMING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits.

B. Related Sections: 1. 054000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: For exterior and interior load-bearing

and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses.

2. 078500 - Fire-Resistant Joint Systems: For joints in or between fire-resistance-rated head-of-wall framing assemblies.


A. Delegated Design: Design non-structural metal framing systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design framing systems in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute Publication AISI S220, except as otherwise shown or specified.

C. Performance: Provide non-structural metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under the following conditions: 1. Design Load: 5 lbf/sq. ft. uniform air-pressure differential acting perpendicular to

covering material supported by metal framing. 2. Deflection Limits:

a. Typical: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without horizontal deflection greater than 1/240 of the wall height.

b. Partitions with Tile or Plaster: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without horizontal deflection greater than 1/360 of the wall height.

D. Design framed openings to accommodate design loads, gravity loads, and construction tolerances with a maximum deflection not to exceed that recommended by manufacturer of product or system in opening.

E. Design partial height partitions to withstand the following loads: 1. Top of Partition:

a. Uniform load of applied perpendicularly. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied perpendicularly at any point. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.



FRAMING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092216 - 2

F. For Non-Composite partitions (partitions with gypsum board on one side or not full height on both sides) provide studs that comply with recommendations of SSMA and manufacturer, and meet or exceed specified performance requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: Submit for approval, samples of each system specified. Minimum length to be 8".

C. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: Provide manufacturer's installation instructions. This submittal is for information only and will not be stamped and may not be returned.

D. Load Tables: For non-structural metal framing assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, provide manufacturers' published load tables annotated to show compliance, for each type of framing assembly.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For non-structural metal framing assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria not otherwise addressed in manufacturers' published load tables, provide analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Thickness: Where metal thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide framing members in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal

unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A

653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

C. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.



FRAMING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092216 - 3

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm), unless indicated otherwise; and not less than thicknesses required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. a. Contractor's Option: At Contractor's option provide one of the following

products instead of the meeting the minimum base thickness specified above: 1) ProSTUD 20, by ClarkDietrich:

a) Steel Strength: 65 ksi. b) Design Thickness: 0.0200 inches.

2) ViperStud Framing System by Marino\Ware: a) Steel Strength: 57 ksi. b) Thickness: 0.0205 inches thick for stud up to 3-5/8 inches

wide, and 0.220 inches thick for studs four to six inches wide. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings .

D. Slip-Type Head Joints: At head locations, provide the following in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of

finishes due to deflection of structure above. a. Vertical Movement Capability: 3/4 inch in compression and 3/4 inch in

extension for a total structural deflection of 1-1/2 inch. b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series.

E. Curved Track: Where curved surfaces are indicated, provide one of the following in width to accommodate depth of studs: 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; Contour Track. 2. Radius Track; Ready-Track. 3. Flexability Concepts; Flex-C Trac.

F. Partial Height Partition Reinforcement: Steel reinforcement members designed to support out-of-plane loading in partial height partitions that are unsupported at the top track. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. The Steel Network, Inc.; MidWall.

2. Minimum Yield Strength and Base-Metal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements indicated.

3. Height: a. For partitions less than 48 inches: 24 inches. b. For partitions equal to or greater than 48 inches: 48 inches.

4. Depth: 2-1/2 inches minimum, and not more than thickness of metal framing..

G. Pre-Fabricated Headers and Jambs: Manufacturer's proprietary shape used to form header beams and jambs, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges and as follows: 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



FRAMING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092216 - 4

a. Clark Dietrich Building Systems; RedHeader. 2. Minimum Yield Strength and Base-Metal Thickness: As required to meet

performance requirements indicated. 3. Flange Widths: As required to meet performance requirements indicated. 4. Minimum Yield Strength: 33ksi. 5. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: (18 gauge) (0.0428 inch).

H. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Lite Loads: Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 4 inch x 0.053 inch. 2. Heavy Loads (Typical): Provide one of the following:

a. Provide metal blocking from notched steel stud track as detailed in framing for all wall-mounted equipment, cabinets, and finish hardware, including door stops. Products available in manufactured form; "Notch-Tite" by Metal Lite Inc., Anaheim, CA (800/886-6824). 1) Size: 6 inch x 16 gage. Attachment screws: Minimum 3-#10 at

each stud. 2) Locations:

a) Wall cabinets, shelving, handrails, grab bars, equipment. b) Others: As indicated.

b. Provide "Danback Wood Backing Plate" by Dietrich, a manufactured device of plywood strips in lengths to match stud spacing and joined by flexible galvanized 25 gage metal plates. Plywood strips of 3/4 inches thick x 5-1/4 inches high and machined to fit around stud flange. Device produced in 48 inches lengths. 1) Furnish with fire treated plywood. 2) Attach with minimum 2 #10 x 3/4 inch long screws at each stud. 3) Locations:

a) Wall cabinets, shelving, handrails, grab bars, equipment. b) Others: As indicated.

I. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch-

(1.72-mm-) thick, galvanized steel.

J. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm), minimum.. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), unless indicated otherwise.

K. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical.

L. Acoustic Isolation Clips: Designed to isolate hat-shaped, rigid furring channels from studs, for walls or ceilings. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Acoustical Solutions, Inc.; Isolation Clips for Walls and Ceilings. b. Pliteq; GenieClip.



FRAMING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092216 - 5

M. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm), minimum. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-

(1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

N. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Capable of sustaining a load equal to 5 times that imposed as

determined by ASTM E 488. a. Type: Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms,

postinstalled, chemical anchor, or postinstalled, expansion anchor. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Not permitted.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter.

D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 2 inches at 48 inches on center or 1-1/2 inches at 36 inches on center.

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum

1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.031 inch (0.84 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.031 inch (0.84 mm).

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical.

F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

"Drywall Grid Systems" by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; "Drywall Grid Systems."



FRAMING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092216 - 6

b. Rockfon, LLC; Chicago Metallic "Drywall Grid System." c. USG Corporation; "Drywall Suspension System."

2. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: a. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc

coating, soft temper. b. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load

(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter wire.

3. Accessories: a. Drywall Angle Clips: BPDWC series, by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Transition Clips: BPDWT series by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. 3-way Bite Clips: BPGC3W by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. d. Others: As needed for a complete installation.

4. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system, minimum.


A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Slip Clips: VertiClip, "SL" series by Signature Industries, LLC (919-844-0789) and distributed by The Steel Network, Inc., Raleigh, NC (919-845-1025). 1. An "L “shaped device 1-1/2 inch x 2-3/4 inch legs with two 1-1/2 inch slots in long

leg x stud depth. 2. Gage not less than stud to which it attaches; minimum 16 gage for studs at door

framing. 3. Special slip washer prevents binding at stud attachment with #12 screws.

Provide one clip for each stud.

C. Jack Studs: Provide studs between bottom track and window and/or relite sills, between lintels and headers and top track, and elsewhere as required for support of attached materials and equipment.

D. Wood Blocking Support: Provide support of wood blocking where shown or required. Minimum 2" x 2" x 16 gage angle x full height of blocking or 16 gage studs.

E. Special Corner Plates: 20 ga. galvanized angles or bent plates, 5" x 5" legs, full height, 1 piece. See "Special Corner Plates" under PARTITION FRAMING in Part 3 below for locations.

F. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide foam gasket.



FRAMING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092216 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for

installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or

ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841

that apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM

C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C

844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that

apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, wall mounted door stops, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.



FRAMING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092216 - 8

3.4 CONTROL JOINTS

A. Provide framing for control joints specified under gypsum wallboard or plaster systems. Examine these Sections for requirements and provide suitable framing for the following conditions: 1. Partition, furring or column fireproofing abuts a structural element (except floor)

or dissimilar wall or ceiling. 2. Ceiling abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or partition or other vertical

penetration. 3. Construction changes within the plane of the partition or ceiling. 4. Wings of "L", "U", and "T"-shaped ceiling areas are joined. 5. Expansion or control joints occurring in the base exterior wall. 6. Gypsum wallboard.

a. Partition or furring run exceeds 30 feet. b. Ceiling dimensions exceed 50 feet in either direction with perimeter relief,

30 feet without relief. 7. Differential Deflection Conditions: All locations where partitions are supported by

two or more structural members and subject to differential deflection by live or dead loading: a. Typical Framing Floor to Structure: Provide "Ceiling Deflection Track." b. Framing over One Floor (stairs, shafts, etc.): Provide control joints where

studs are interrupted by structure. 8. Door and Sidelight Frames Less than Full Height: Provide joints from each corner

at each jamb of frames less than ceiling height. a. Provide on both sides of partition. b. Extend joints from top of frame to above ceiling.

9. Above ceiling, only one pair of joints need continue to top of partition. 10. Adjacent frames with less than 16 inches space between jambs need joints only

at outermost jambs. No joints in gypsum board are permitted above frame.

B. Ceiling-height door frames may be used as control joints to comply with straight run requirement, as may less-than-ceiling-height door frames with complying control joints.

C. Provide framing immediately on both sides of joints and fill cavity with gypsum panel strips or firestopping as required to maintain fire resistance rating and acoustic rating in accordance with manufacturer's tested details.

3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Spacing: 1. Typical: 16" o.c. except where otherwise noted on drawings. 2. Curved Walls: Provide closer spacing as needed in accordance with GA-226. 3. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but

not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. a. Option:

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.



FRAMING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092216 - 9

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,

install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. Install to allow vertical movement indicated in PART 2 above. a. Gage: Where stud gage is heavier than 20 gage, increase gage to match

stud gage. At doors not less than 16 gage for full width of opening plus minimum 8 inches beyond each jamb.

2. Door Openings: a. Product: Use Pre-Fabricated Headers and Jambs. b. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; and

install header into door head and secure to jamb per manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

6. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent

to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally

along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

E. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

F. Studs to run continuous full height without breaks or splices.

G. Install all metal blocking, bracing and anchor strips. 1. At contractor's option, provide specified manufactured wood blocking in lieu of

metal blocking. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations except attach with not less than two #10 screws.

H. Bracing: Bracing where permitted by the Architect to achieve greater wall heights to conform to the following: 1. Conform to same requirements as studs and are subject to approval of Architect. 2. Install at approximately 45 degrees with wall end secured to continuous

horizontal channel and braced end secured to structure. 3. Space braces at not less than 48" centers and on both sides of partition.



FRAMING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092216 - 10

4. At fire-rated partitions, enclose all bracing in gypsum board in sufficient thickness to equal the fire-resistance of the partition.

I. Multiple Studs: Provide double studs at the following conditions: 1. Ends of partitions in an "I" configuration; where the end of partition is not laterally

braced by other partition. 2. Control joint locations.

J. Corners: 1. 90 Degree Corners: Provide 3-stud corners as approved by Architect; space

two studs equal to track width and screw together with 3rd stud placed at 90 degrees to the two studs. Standard ASTM C 754 corner details not acceptable.

2. See "Special Corner Plates" under "Specialties" below.

K. Provide metal framing for various recessed items in walls and partitions by using deeper studs or double studs as required for recessed items deeper than typical wall thicknesses. Review requirements with Architect before proceeding.

L. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

M. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry

attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

N. Acoustic Isolation Clips: Attach to studs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

O. Specialties: 1. Where resilient clips are required, provide horizontally at 24 inches on center.

Install with open edge at top. At floor, bottom clip may have open edge at bottom to facilitate installation.

2. Special Corner Plates: Provide positive connection of framing members at corner conditions at conditions listed below. Attach corner plates to adjacent studs at not less than 16 inch centers. a. Where studs cannot fill corner; i.e. 45 and 60 degree corners.

1) Outside Corners. Where outside corner receives wallboard. 2) Inside Corners: Where outside corner does not receive wallboard or

is not accessible. i.e. shaft or chase. b. Locations requiring corner guards (specified under Division 10). c. Others: As indicated on drawings.

3. Chase Wall Bridging: Provide two rows of horizontal bridging on inside faces of chase wall studs at 1/3 points. Bridging to be not less than 2-1/2 inch stud or track member, continuous, attached to each stud.

4. Elevator Shaft Cants: Provide cants on ledges in shafts formed by beams and floor slabs to prevent hazard from mislaid tools or other loose objects. Construct cants not less than 75 degrees from horizontal from 25 gage sheet steel or metal stud framing and gypsum board.



FRAMING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092216 - 11

P. Installation Tolerance: 1. Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3

mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 2. Partition Framing: Plumb and located within plus or minus 1/4" of required

locations, noncumulative. 3. Ceiling and Soffit Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are

level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.6 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger

inserts that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: 1. Install per manufacturer's instructions: and as following if more stringent:

a. Space main runners at not more than 48 inches on center and within 6 inches of walls, positioned for proper ceiling height.

b. Cross Runner Spacing: 24 inches on center. c. Support main runners with hanger wires at 48 inches on center and within 6

inches from ends of main runners. d. Provide 1 inch clearance between runners and abutting walls.

2. Inside Corners at Stepped Ceiling: Reinforce ceiling grid corner with drywall angle clip.

3. Outside Corners At Stepped Ceiling: Provide concealed grid bracing.

E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



FRAMING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092216 - 12

END OF SECTION


SECTION 092900GYPSUM BOARD

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. All acoustical aids associated with gypsum board partitions. 3. Metal Base.

B. Related Sections: 1. 061643 - Gypsum Sheathing: For gypsum sheathing for exterior walls. 2. 079200 - Joint Sealants: For acoustical sealants installed as part of STC-rated

gypsum board assemblies. 3. 093000 - Tiling: For backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part

of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Completion.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092900 - 2


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 2. Continental Building Products. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. Temple-Inland. 5. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M or ASTM C 1658/C 1658M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D

3274.

C. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Sheetrock Mold Tough VHI Firecode Core. 2. Performance: Not less than the following:

a. Abrasion Resistance: Level 2. b. Indentation Resistance: Level 1. c. Soft Body Impact: Level 3. d. Hard Body Impact: Level 3.

3. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 4. Long Edges: Tapered. 5. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D

3274.

2.2 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092900 - 3

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Trim-Tex or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Trim-Tex. b. Comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

2. Material: Vinyl, paintable. 3. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead: Jumbo low profile. b. Shadow, Reveal Beads and Other Shapes: As indicated on drawings. c. Bullnose bead, 38 inch radius. d. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint: Hideaway Expansion Joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. Jumbo

Archway.

B. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Reveal Metal Base (MTLB-1): Model DRMB-625-400 by Fry Reglet Corp. a. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or

thicker. 4. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping

compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,

fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim

accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose

compound or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. a. Basis-of-Design Product for High-Build Interior Coating: Tuff-Hide by

USG. Apply finish coat(s) to obtain not less than 10 mils DFT.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092900 - 4


A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Division 09 Section "Acoustic Insulation."

C. Acoustical Joint Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Sealants."

D. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Do not place butt non-tapered edges against tapered edges.

F. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

G. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc., except in chases braced internally.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092900 - 5

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of

floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

H. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

I. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board types in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceramic Tile Backer Board: Specified elsewhere.

B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to

greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate

courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with

no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base

layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092900 - 6

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and as specified in Section 092216; and in specific locations approved by Associate Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. Metal Base: At locations indicated on drawings.

D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Joint Treatment: See "Finishing" below. Provide for surfaces designed for spackling. 1. Tape: Apply setting type embedding compound filling joint completely and apply

reinforcing tape centered over joint and seated in compound. Fold and embed tape at interior angles, including intersections between walls and ceilings, to furnish true angle. Allow to harden.

2. 1st Coat: After taping compound is dry, apply coat filling taper flush with surface.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092900 - 7

3. 2nd and 3rd Coats: Spread finish coat evenly over, and extend beyond, previous coat by approximately 3 inches; finish smooth and flush with surface.

4. Sanding: Where required to achieve acceptable smoothness, exercise care to limit scuffing of paper surface. Use fine textured abrasive products with minimum lap to paper surface.

5. Butt Joints with Non-Tapered Edges: Bevel edges of board approximately 1/8 inch at 45 degree angle and remove loose paper. a. Finish: Provide a "Level 5" finish for a distance of 3 feet, in all directions,

from board edges and corners.

E. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Joints and interior angles to have tape embedded in joint compound.

Surface to be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Additional finishing required only where required for fire resistance rating. a. Locations: Plenum areas above ceilings, concealed areas.

2. Level 3: Joints and interior angles to have tape embedded in joint compound and 2 separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories. Joint compound to be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. a. Locations: Mechanical Rooms.

3. Level 4: Joints and interior angles to have tape embedded in joint compound and 3 separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories. Joint compound to be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. a. Locations: Surfaces scheduled for light-textured finishes, wallcoverings,

flat paints and panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

c. Butt Joints: At non-tapered butt joints, bevel edges of board approximately 1/8 inch at 45 degree angle and remove loose paper. Finish joint as specified above except finish to width approximately twice that of tapered edge joints.

d. Sanding: Where required to achieve acceptable smoothness, exercise care to limit scuffing of paper surface. Use fine textured abrasive products with minimum lap to paper surface.

4. Level 5: Joints and interior angles to have tape embedded in joint compound and 3 separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories. A thin skim coat of joint compound, to be applied to entire surface. High-build interior coating product specified above is acceptable. Surface to be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. a. Locations: Surfaces scheduled for gloss and semi-gloss coatings, wall and

ceiling areas abutting window mullions, curved surfaces, long hallways, large surface areas flooded with artificial and/or natural lighting and where indicated on Drawings.

b. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 092900 - 8

c. Butt Joints: At non-tapered butt joints, bevel edges of board approximately 1/8 inch at 45 degree angle and remove loose paper. Finish joint as specified above except finish to width approximately twice that of tapered edge joints.

d. Sanding: Where required to achieve acceptable smoothness, exercise care to limit scuffing of paper surface. Use fine textured abrasive products with minimum lap to paper surface.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited



END OF SECTION


SECTION 093000TILING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 093000 - 1

SECTION 093000 - TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Crack isolation membrane. 3. Tile backing panels.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. Dimension Stone Tile: Modular stone units less than 3/4 inch thick.


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. 3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish

required. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type

and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches (300 mm) square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work.

3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.

4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.


A. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 093000 - 2

B. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Waterproof membrane. 2. Crack isolation membrane. 3. Joint sealants. 4. Backer units. 5. Metal edge strips.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of

amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated a. Minimum Quantity: One box of full-size units of each type, composition,

color, pattern, and size used. 2. Grout: Furnish 3 percent of each type, composition and color of grout used.

a. Minimum Quantity: One bag of each composition and color of grout used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CERAMIC TILE PRODUCTS

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade porcelain tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. Ceramic Tile (CT): 1. Floor Tile (CFT): Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

indicated on the Finish Legend a. Grout Color: As indicated on drawings. b. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as indicated on drawings and as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes.

2. Wall Base Tile (CWB): Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on the Finish Legend. a. Grout Color: As indicated on drawings. b. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where


3. Ceramic Wall Tile (CWT):



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 093000 - 3

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on the Finish Legend or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding.

b. Grout Color: Match Architect’s sample. c. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where


2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).

2.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.

B. Chlorinated-Polyethylene-Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch (0.76-mm) nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal TS.

C. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement.

a. MAPEI Corporation: Mapelastic 315. b. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention

Membrane.

2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.

B. Chlorinated-Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch (0.76-mm) nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal CIS.

C. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-inch (0.203-mm) nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 093000 - 4

D. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Bostik, Inc.: Hydroment UltraSet Advanced. b. Mapei, ÓPRP M19". c. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention

Membrane.

2.5 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Improved Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.15. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products indicated below or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Basis-of-Design Product for Small Format Tiles: Prolite by Custom

Building Products. b. Basis-of-Design Product for Large Format Wall Tiles: Prolite by Custom

Building Products. c. Basis-of-Design Product for Large Format Floor Tiles: Basis-of-Design

Product: MegaLite® Crack Prevention Mortar by Custom Building Products.

d. Approved manufacturers: 1) Custom Building Products. 2) Mapei Corporation. 3) Laticrete International, Inc. 4) TEC: H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.15.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.15, Improved Dry-Set Cement Mortar. 1. Locations: Tile Type CWT and CWB: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

MegaLite Crack Prevention Mortar by Custom Building Products or comparable product by one of the following: a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc. c. MAPEI Corporation. d. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. e. Bostik f. Mapei. g. Setting material must be approved by tile manufacturer for each substrate.

2.6 GROUT (GT)

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: a. Custom Building Products.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 093000 - 5

b. MAPEI Corporation. c. North American Adhesives Co. d. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2. Color: Match Architect's sample.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Protective Coating: Liquid grout-release coating that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile; and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

C. Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming stone tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by stone tile producers and grout manufacturers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are

incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind stone tile has been completed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify floor meets the floor flatness tolerances specified in Section 035411 - FLOOR SUBSTRATE PREPARATION. 1. Floors not within tolerance: Construction Manager shall delegate trade

contractor reasonable for flattening floor in conformance with Section 035411 - FLOOR SUBSTRATE PREPARATION.

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 093000 - 6

C. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.3 BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.

3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.

3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.

3.6 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile

installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Large format wall tile. b. Tile floors in wet areas. c. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. d. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 093000 - 7

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in pattern as shown on drawings. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than a third of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths.

E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 2. Large Format Floor Tile: 1/4 inch. 3. Other Floor Tile: 1/8 inch.

F. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in substrate substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly in

front of them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07

Section "Joint Sealants."

G. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's

written instructions. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging.

B. Protect installed tile work during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 093000 - 8

3.8 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Prepare surfaces, fit, set or bond, grout, and clean in accordance with Tile Council of America, Inc. "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation", and as stated below:

B. Large Format Tile: See DEFIITIONS in Part 1 above. In accordance with TCA recommendations, the following installation method can produce maximum coverage, with corners and edges fully supported, without backbuttering or beat-in: 1. Select a notched trowel sized to facilitate the proper coverage. 2. Key mortar into substrate with flat side of trowel. 3. Comb with notched side of trowel IN ONE DIRECTION. 4. Firmly press tiles into mortar and move them perpendicularly ACROSS the

ridges, forward and back approximately 1/8 to 1/4 , to flatten ridges and fill valleys.

5. Periodically remove and check a tile to assure proper coverage is being attained.

C. Ceramic Tile Shower Floors and Walls: Thinset on membrane on sloped fill. Recessed slab required. 1. TCA design B421 Waterproof membrane bonded to reinforced mortar bed over

sloped fill. Waterproof membrane required 2. Waterproof Membrane: ANSI A108.10. Provide on floor and full height of

walls. 3. Tile: ANSI A137.1. 4. Epoxy Grout: ANSI 118.3. Locations:

a. Patient Toilet Room Floors and; walls and floors of showers. b. Ceramic Tile Shower Floors and Walls.

1) Floors: Work at partitions with glass walls is specified in Section 093023 - Glass Tiling. Coordinate installation with Section 093023 - Glass Tiling

c. Other wet floor areas.

D. Ceramic Tile on Elevated Slabs: 1. Thinset: TCA design F122; with waterproof or crack-suppression membrane:

a. Waterproofing in toilet rooms and wet rooms; crack-suppression membrane elsewhere.

b. Cementitious Bond Coat: ANSI A118.15. c. Tile: ANSI A137.1. d. Grout: ANSI A118.3

2. Medium-Bed Thin Set: Similar to “Thinset” above except use special shaped trowel as recommended by mortar manufacturer. Provide medium set at Large Format Tile. a. Waterproofing in toilet rooms and wet rooms; crack-suppression membrane

elsewhere. b. Cementitious Bond Coat: ANSI A118.15. c. Tile: ANSI A137.1. d. Grout: ANSI A118.3

E. Porcelain Floor Tile: Same as "Ceramic Tile" designs above for slab on grade and elevated slabs as applicable.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 093000 - 9

F. Ceramic Tile on Dry Interior Walls: 1. At Masonry Walls: TCA design W202I or W211.

a. Tile: ANSI A137.1.). b. Cementitious Bond Coat: ANSI A118.15. c. Grout: ANSI A118.3. d. Substrate: W202 typical; W211 for out of tolerance masonry.

2. At Stud Walls: TCA design W244E. a. Tile: ANSI A137.1. b. Cementitious Bond Coat: ANSI A118.15 c. Grout: ANSI A118.3. d. Substrate: Cement Board.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 093000 - 10



SECTION 095113ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

B. Related Sections: 1. 079200 - Joint Sealants: For acoustical sealant joints.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the

listings of another qualified testing agency.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels.

5. Perimeter moldings.

C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and

texture.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095113 - 2

2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color.


E. Research/evaluation reports.



A. Source Limitations: Obtain components for acoustical panel ceiling systems, including panels suspension systems, trim, and accessories, from a single manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Completion.


A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity

installed, but not less than 2 boxes. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal

to [2.0] <Insert number> percent of quantity installed.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095113 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Finish Legend:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS (ACP)

A. ACP-1: 3151 OPTIMA OPEN PLAN 1. Color: White. 2. LR: Not less than 0.90. 3. NRC: Not less than 0.90. 4. AC: 180. 5. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. 6. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 7. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches. 8. Grid Size: 15/16 inch.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes

or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Cast-in-place or postinstalled expansion anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095113 - 4

c. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor.

d. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy.

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating,

soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load

(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter wire.

D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.

F. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM (MSS)

A. MSS-1: 1. Width of Metal Suspension System: Provide width as indicated on Finish

Legend for each type of ACP. 2. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross

runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide Prelude XL Grid by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following 1) Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2) Chicago Metallic Corporation

b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. c. Face Design: Flat, flush. d. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. e. Cap Finish: Painted white .

2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by same manufacturer as adjacent Metal Suspension Systems.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095113 - 5

B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge

details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details and where indicated on drawings, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.

3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

C. Acoustical Sealant: Provide in conformance with Section 079200 - Joint Sealants.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested

fire-rated design.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. At perimeter of light fixtures provide support wires at all four corners. 4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces

hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095113 - 6

6. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

7. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, or postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors that extend through forms into concrete.

8. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

9. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 10. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 11. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member

supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

12. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Provide edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical

legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400

mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:

a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by

flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with

bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of

exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095113 - 7

5. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. a. Locations:

1) Where indicated on drawings. 2) Vestibules. 3) Spaces, rooms, corridors with doors in exterior wall of building.

6. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095113 - 8



SECTION 095426LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095426 - 1

SECTION 095426 - LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes linear wood ceiling panels and concealed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Shop drawing illustrating the layout and details of the linear wood ceiling

components. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for ceiling panels. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels.

6. Perimeter moldings.

C. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Installation instructions are for information only and the return of installation instructions with SUBMITTALS does not constitute Architect's approval of Installation Instructions.

D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Ceiling Panel: Set of 12 inch x 46.5 inches samples of each type, color, pattern,

and texture.

E. Maintenance data.


A. Woodworking Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Grade: Custom.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095426 - 2

1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part

of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Field verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

B. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423, Classified with UL label on product carton 0.85.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries or a comparable product approved by Architect and manufacturer of Linear Wood Ceiling, prior to bidding.

2. Main beams and cross tees, base metal and end detail, fabricated from commercial quality hot dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping prefinished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching. a. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 Heavy Duty. b. Cap Finish: Painted Tech Black.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095426 - 3


A. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

2.4 WOOD CEILING PANELS (WDC)

A. WDC-1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Woodworks Grille, Item # 7265BO as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries or comparable product by one of the following: a. Rulon. b. 9 Wood.

2. Wood Species/Finish: Poplar, Yellow or hybrid, with custom stain to match Architect's sample. a. Wood Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory applied transparent finish.

3. Slat Height: 2-1/4 inch. 4. Slat Width: 5/8 inch. 5. Slats per Linear foot: 6, evenly spaced. 6. Wood Panel Depth: 2-3/4 inches. 7. Panel Sizes and Configuration: As indicated on drawings and approved shop

drawings. 8. Edge Profile: Square.

B. Accessories: 1. Backer Clip, hanger clips, or other suitable devices as needed for attachment to

metal suspension system. 2. Fasteners to Secure Backer to metal suspension system: # 6 x 1-1/4" bugle

head Hi-Lo drywall screws. Install so head is flush with exposed backer face. Drill hole in wood for each screw location. a. Exposed Head Color: Match color of adjacent substrate.

3. End Caps: 4.25 inches. 4. Locations;

a. Exposed wall trim and edge trim. b. Others: As indicated on drawings.

5. Access Panel: Provide custom access panels of same material as wood ceiling and conforming to requirements of Section 064000 – Architectural Woodwork and as follows: a. Nominal Size: 610mm x610mm (24” x 24”) unless otherwise shown.

Locate hanger wires for suspension of MSS to allow access panel to rest on MSS and maintain the access opening size when access panel is stored for maintenance.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095426 - 4

b. Manufacturer's detail shown below.

c. Locations:

1) Where required for access to mechanical/electrical equipment and devices.

2) Others: Where indicated. 6. Miscellaneous: As needed for complete installation.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM (MSS)

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries or a comparable product approved by Architect and manufacturer of Linear Wood Ceiling, prior to bidding.

2. Main beams and cross tees, base metal and end detail, fabricated from commercial quality hot dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM a 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping prefinished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching. a. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 Heavy Duty. b. Cap Finish: Painted Tech Black.

3. Minimum Modular Size: 24 inch by 24 inch. Provide additional main beams to reduce the cantilever of LCW-1 from a main beam to no more than11-1/2 inches.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095426 - 5

1. Cap Finish: Painted Tech Black.

D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: 1. ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft annealed, with a yield stress load of at

least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge.

E. Accessories: 1. Transition Moldings: As selected by Architect from Armstrong's full line of Series

7900 transition moldings. 2. Others: As required for a complete installation.

2.6 ACOUSTIC INSULATION

A. Faced Acoustic Insulation Panels: ASTM C 553, Type III (blankets with black membrane facing with a flame-spread index of 25 or less) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from black colored glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Product: BioAcoustic Infill Panel (Black - Matte) by Armstrong World Industries,

Inc. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Color: Black. 4. NRC: 0.75. 5. Typical Modular Size: 11 inch x 48 inch, unless otherwise approved by

Architect. 6. Exposed edges: Paint flat black in factory or in field.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Wood Ceiling Panels: Panels shall be assembled in widths and lengths indicated. Wood members shall be manufactured without finger-joints, and fastened together with wood strips. The wood strips shall be positioned 5-1/2 inches from the ends and 12 inches on center, with interconnecting overlapping wood strips for support of the system. Shop fabricate panels to maximum extent reasonable possible to reduce requirement for field cutting and finishing of wood. Field cutting and finishing shall conform to requirements of Section 064000 - Architectural Woodwork. 1. Dowels Wood Strips: Wood of same species as wood members.

a. Color: Black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install wood panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095426 - 6

system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces

hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported

directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of panels. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and

not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Screw attach panels securely to suspension-system runners and edge moldings. 1. Arrange panels as follows:

a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095426 - 7

2. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

G. Install acoustical insulation panels between backers and over entire area of linear wood ceiling with black face of insulation down. Accurately cut acoustical insulation panels to fit linear wood panels at the ends of panels. Provide tight butt joints between adjacent acoustical panels. Cut and fit acoustical insulation panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

H. Tolerances: Installed system to be level within 1/8" in 12 feet.


A. Clean exposed surfaces of Linear Wood ceilings and comply with manufacturer's instructions for touch-up of minor finish damage.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 095426 - 8

NTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


SECTION 096280RESINOUS FLOORING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096280 - 1

SECTION 096280- RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following: 1. Urethane flooring system as shown on the drawings and in schedules. 2. This system is designated as CNT-3 on the Finish Legend.

B. Related sections include the following: 1. Cast-in-Place Concrete, section 033000


A. The work shall consist of preparation of the substrate, the furnishing and application of a pigmented 100 % solids epoxy/urethane-based floor coating system. The system shall have the color and texture as specified by the Owner with a nominal thickness of 28 mils. It shall be applied to the prepared area(s) as defined in the plans strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Latest edition of Manufacturer's literature including performance data and installation procedures.

B. Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each product being used.

C. Samples: A 3 x 3 inch square sample of the proposed system. Color, texture, and thickness shall be representative of overall appearance of finished system subject to normal tolerances.


A. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the production, sales, and technical support of epoxy and urethane industrial flooring and related materials.

B. The Applicator shall have experience in installation of the flooring system as confirmed by the manufacturer in all phases of surface preparation and application of the product specified.

C. No requests for substitutions shall be considered that would change the generic type of the specified System.

D. System shall be in compliance with requirements of United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Food, Drug Administration (FDA), and local Health Department.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096280 - 2

E. System shall be in compliance with the Indoor Air Quality requirements of California section 01350 as verified by a qualified independent testing laboratory.

F. A pre-installation conference shall be held between Applicator, General Contractor and the Owner to review and clarification of this specification, application procedure, quality control, inspection and acceptance criteria and production schedule.


A. Packing and Shipping 1. All components of the system shall be delivered to the site in the Manufacturer's

packaging, clearly identified with the product type and batch number.

B. Storage and Protection 1. The Applicator shall be provided with a storage area for all components. The

area shall be between 60 F and 90 F, dry, out of direct sunlight and in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and relevant health and safety regulations.

C. Waste Disposal 1. The Applicator shall be provided with adequate disposal facilities for

non-hazardous waste generated during installation of the system.

1.6 PROJECTCONDITIONS

A. Site Requirements 1. Application may proceed while air, material and substrate temperatures are

between 60 F and 85 F providing the substrate temperature is above the dew point. Outside of this range, the Manufacturer shall be consulted.

2. The relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 80 % and the surface temperature shall be at least 5 F above the dew point.

3. The Applicator shall ensure that adequate ventilation is available for the work area.

4. The Applicator shall be supplied with adequate lighting equal to the final lighting level during the preparation and installation of the system.

B. Conditions of new concrete to be coated with epoxy material. 1. Concrete shall be moisture cured for a minimum of 7 days and have fully cured a

minimum of twenty eight days in accordance with ACI-308 prior to the application of the coating system pending moisture tests.

2. Concrete shall have a flat rubbed finish, float or light steel trowel finish (a hard steel trowel finish is neither necessary nor desirable). a. Construction Manager shall coordinate desired concrete finish with trade

contractor responsible for finishing concrete. 3. Sealers and curing agents other than dissipating types should not to be used. 4. Concrete surfaces on grade shall have been constructed with a vapor barrier to

protect against the effects of vapor transmission and possible delamination of the system.

C. Safety Requirements



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096280 - 3

1. All open flames and spark-producing equipment shall be removed from the work area prior to commencement of application.

2. "No Smoking" signs shall be posted at the entrances to the work area. 3. The Owner shall be responsible for the removal of foodstuffs from the work area. 4. Non-related personnel in the work area shall be kept to a minimum.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOORING (CNT-3)

A. Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Epoxy/Urethane-Based seamless flooring system. 1. System Materials:

a. Primer: Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Dur-A-Glaze #4 Primer resin and hardener. b. Topcoat: Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Armor Topcoat resin, hardener and grit.

2. Patch Materials: a. Shallow Fill and Patching: Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Dur-A-Glaze Rapid-Patch. b. Deep Fill and Sloping Material (over ¼ inch): Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc.

Dur-A-Crete.

2.2 MANUFACTURER

A. Dur-A-Flex, Inc., 95 Goodwin Street, East Hartford, CR 06108, Phone: (317) 690-4696, Fax: (860) 528-2802

B. Manufacturer of Approved System shall be single source and made in the USA.

C. Certified (Dur-A-Flex) Installers required for this system. Approved installer: Armstrong Industrial Floors/ Precision Industrial Services. Contact Larry Jones, (614) 745-7834, Fax (614) 877-7362

2.3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Primer: 1. Percent Solids: 100% 2. VOC: 7.45 g/L 3. Surface Resistivity, ASTM D 257: 106-109 ohm/Square 4. Static Decay, Mii-Std-3010, Method 4046: 0.01 seconds 5. Voltage generation, ESD STM 97.2: 14v 6. Compressive Strength:

a. ASTM D 695: 16,000psi b. ASTMC579: 10,500 psi

7. Tensile Strength: a. ASTM D 638: 3,000 psi b. ASTMC307: 1,950 psi

8. Tensile Elongation, ASTM D 638: 7.5% 9. Flexural Strength:

a. ASTM D 790: 4,000 psi b. ASTMC580: 2,900 psi

10. 1Hardness (Shore D), ASTM D 2240: 70-80



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096280 - 4

11. Linear Shrinkage, ASTM D 2566: 0.02% 12. Linear Expansion, ASTM D 696: 2x10-5. 13. Bond Strength to Concrete, ASTM D 4541: 400 psi, substrate fails 14. Indentation, MIL D-3134: 0.025 Max. 15. Impact Resistance, MIL D-3134: Pass. 16. Water Absorption, ASTM D 570: 0.04%. 17. Heat Resistance Limitation: 140 F to 200 F 18. Flammability, ASTM D 570: Self Extinguishing 19. Flame Spread/NFPA 101, ASTM E 84: Class A

B. Topcoat: Armor-Stat ESD Topcoat 1. Resin: Polyaspartic. 2. Percent Solids: 69%. 3. VOC: 30g/L 4. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 2370: 7,000 psi. 5. Adhesion, ASTM 4541: Substrate failure. 6. Hardness, ASTM D 3363: >4H 7. 60° Gloss ASTM D 523: 30 +1-10

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting flooring performance. 1. Verify that substrates and conditions arc satisfactory for flooring installation and

comply with requirements specified.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General 1. New and existing concrete surfaces shall be free of oil, grease, curing

compounds, loose particles, moss, algae growth, laitance, friable matter, dirt, and bituminous products.

2. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test ASTM F 1869 98. Application will

proceed only when the vapor/moisture emission rates from the slab is less than and not higher than 3 lbs/1,000 sf/24 hrs.

b. Perform relative humidity test using is situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.

c. If the vapor emission exceeds 75 % relative humidity or 3 lbs/1,000 sf/24 hrs. then Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Dur-A-Glaze MVP Primer moisture mitigation system must be installed prior to resinous flooring installation. Slab-on grade substrates without a vapor barrier may also require the moisture mitigation system.

3. There shall be no visible moisture present on the surface at the time of application of the system.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096280 - 5

4. Mechanical surface preparation a. Diamond grind all surfaces to receive flooring system with a floor grinder

utilizing a 25 grit diamond tool that grinds to within 1/8" of wall (Werkmaster or equal). All surface and embedded accumulations of paint, toppings hardened concrete layers, curing materials, laitance, power trowel finishes and other surface characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a minimum profile of CSP 2-3 as described by the International Concrete Repair Institute and concrete surfaces shall have a maximum deviation of 1/8" using a 10' straightedge placed anywhere on the surface.

b. Floor areas inaccessible to the grinding machines shall be mechanically abraded to the same degree of cleanliness, soundness and profile using diamond grinders, needle guns, bush hammers, or other suitable equipment.

c. Where the perimeter of the substrate to be coated is not adjacent to a wall or curb, a minimum 1/4 inch key cut shall be made to properly seat the system, providing a smooth transition between areas. The detail cut shall also apply to drain perimeters and expansion joint edges.

d. Cracks and joints (non-moving) greater than 118 inch wide are to be chiseled or chipped-out and repaired per manufacturer’s recommendations.

5. At spalled or worn areas, mechanically remove loose or delaminated concrete 10 a sound concrete and patch per manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General 1. The system shall be applied in four distinct steps as listed below:

a. Substrate preparation b. Priming c. Topcoat application

2. Immediately prior to the application of any component of the system, the surface shall be dry and any remaining dust or loose particles shall be removed using a vacuum or clean, dry, oil frec compressed air.

3. The handling, mixing and addition of components shall be performed in a safe manner to achieve the desired results in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.

4. The system shall follow the contour of the substrate unless pitching or other leveling work has been specified by the Architect.

5. A neat finish with well defined boundaries and straight edges shall be provided by the Applicator.

B. Primer 1. The primer shall be Dur A Glaze #4 Primer that is mixed at the ratio of 2 parts

resin to 1 part hardener per the manufacturer's instructions. 2. The primer shall be applied by notched squeegee and back rolled at the rate of

200 sf/gal, to yield a dry film thickness of 8 mils.

C. Topcoat 1. The topcoats shall be a kit comprised of a liquid resin, hardener and grit mixed

per the manufacturer's instructions.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096280 - 6

2. The topcoats of Armor Top shall be roller applied at the rate of 350 sf/kit to yield a dry film thickness of 3 to 4 mils and a second coat shall be applied immediately after first coat is tack free.

3. The finished floor will have a nominal thickness of 14 16 mils.


A. Tests, Inspection 1. The following tests shall be conducted by the Applicator:

a. Temperature 1) Air, substrate temperatures and, if applicable, dew point.

b. Coverage Rates 1) Rates for all layers shall be monitored by checking quantity of

material used against the area covered.


A. Cure flooring material in compliance with manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent their contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of the curing process.

B. Remove masking. Perform detail cleaning at floor termination, to leave cleanable surface for subsequent work of other sections.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 096500RESILIENT FLOORING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096500 - 1

SECTION 096500 - RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient tile flooring. 2. Resilient sheet flooring

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required. 1. Heat-Welding Bead: Include manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not

less than 9 inches (230 mm) long, of each color required.

D. Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each floor covering product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.


1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear

feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each type, color, and pattern of flooring installed.

2. Floor Tile: Furnish not less than two boxes for every 100 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation and seaming method indicated.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for floor coverings including resilient base and accessories.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096500 - 2

a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for each type, color and pattern in locations directed by Architect.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Resilient Sheet Flooring and Integral Base: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace resilient sheet flooring and integral base installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of resilient sheet flooring due to

unusual traffic, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification. ?.

2.2 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING (RF)

A. Sheet Vinyl 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products indicated on the Finish Legend.

B. ColorArtTM Medintech® with Diamond 10TM Coating. 1. Description: An unbacked, nonlayered, homogeneous sheet vinyl flooring.

Protected by a diamond-infused UV-cured polyurethane finish, the colors and pattern detail are dispersed uniformly throughout the thickness of the product. Color pigments are insoluble in water and resistant to cleaning agents and light.

2. Homogeneous sheet flooring shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F1913 Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing

3. Pattern and Color: Match Architect's sample. 4. Width: 6 ft. 7 in. (2.0 m). 5. Length: up to 65.6 lineal feet (20 meters). 6. Thickness: 0.080 in. (2.0 mm).

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096500 - 3

B. High Performance Adhesives: Type recommended by manufacturer where heavy static or rolling loads exist. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Resilient Flooring Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

C. Seamless-Installation Accessories: 1. Chemical-Bonding Compound: Manufacturer's product for chemically bonding

seams. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range colors

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and

hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with

adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install flooring until it is same temperature as space where it is to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be

installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation, or in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.2 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing sheet floorings.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096500 - 4

B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

C. Lay out floor coverings as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas,

at least 6 inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. 5. Eliminate deformations in linoleum flooring that result from hanging method used

during drying process (stove bar marks).

D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Transition change in floor materials under doors.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Adhere flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.3 SEAMLESS INSTALLATION

A. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply compound to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on flooring surfaces.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient floor coverings until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 096513RESILIENT BASE AND

ACCESSORIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of

each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Resilient Base: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace resilient base installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of resilient base due to

vandalism or abuse. 2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient base shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification.

2.2 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE (RBRB)

A. Manufacturers: : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on the Finish Legend or comparable products by one of the following:: 1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 2. Flexco. 3. Roppe Corporation, USA.



ACCESSORIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096513 - 2

4. Johnsonite.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).

C. RBRB-#: Thermoset-rubber base indicated in Finish Legend is Basis of Design. 1. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 2. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. 4. Outside Corners: Preformed. 5. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. 6. Colors: Match Architect's sample.

2.3 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY (RTS)

A. Manufacturers: : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on the Finish Legend or comparable products approved by one of the following: 1. Roppe Corporation, USA. 2. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division. 3. Johnsonite.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: 1. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. 2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of colors..


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.



ACCESSORIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096513 - 3

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with

returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Completion.

END OF SECTION



ACCESSORIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096513 - 4



SECTION 096813TILE CARPETING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096813 - 1

SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular, carpet tile (CPPT).

B. This Section is an Alternate. See Section 012300 - Alternates.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations

where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Type of subfloor. 3. Type of installation. 4. Pattern of installation. 5. Pattern type, location, and direction. 6. Pile direction. 7. Transition detail.



E. Sample warranty.



A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 3percent of amount installed for each type

indicated, but not less than FOUR full boxes.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Master II certification level.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096813 - 2

B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.


A. Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011.


A. Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual

traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling,

snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Meets NFPA Class 1 when tested under ASTM E-648 glue down

B. Smoke Density: Not more than 450, ASTM E - 662.

2.2 CARPET TILE (CPTT-1)

A. Product: Tandus Centiva, Style #11146; Columbus Metropolitan Library Standard.

B. Size: 24 inch x 24 inch.

C. Face Construction: 1. Construction: Stratatec Patterned Loop 2. Face Weight: 20.00: oz/sq yd 3. Gauge: 5/64 4. Stitches per Inch: 9.90 5. Tuft Density: 126.72: tufts/sq in 6. Pile Height Average: 0.187: inch 7. Fiber System: Antron Lumena® Nylon 8. Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096813 - 3

9. Fluorine-Free Soil Protection: DuraTech® 10. Primary Tufting Substrate: Synthetic Non-Woven

D. Total Weight: 97.9 oz/sq yd +/-5%

E. Secondary Backing: 50% Recycled Content: 1. Intermediate Layer: Fiberglass Reinforced. 2. Product Construction: No Delamination per ASTM D-3936. 3. Secondary Backing Density: 65 lbs/cubic ft. 4. Secondary Backing Thickness: 0.050 inch.

F. Color and Pattern: Match Architect's Sample.

G. Performance Requirements: 1. Antimicrobial Chemicals: No antimicrobials (EPA Registered pesticides) added

to product (ASTM E2471-05). 2. Electrostatic Propensity: <3.0 kV (AATCC 134); Permanent Conductive Fiber. 3. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC FF 1-70 (ASTM D-2859). 4. Flooring Radiant Panel: Class 1 (mean average CRF: 0.45 w/sq cm or higher)

(ASTM E-648). 5. Smoke Generation: Less than 450 (ASTM E-662). 6. Colorfastness to Light: > 4 after 100 hours (AATCC 16E). 7. Soil Protection: Application Rate: 2% of Face Weight.

H. Installation Methods 1. Peel and Stick: RS Adhesive System - Full Coverage Peel & Stick.

2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according

to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096813 - 4

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710.


D. Preparation: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

E. Installation: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011, Section 18, "Modular Carpet," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

F. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer for Peel and Stick.

G. Installation Pattern: As indicated on drawings.

H. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

I. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

J. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

K. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

L. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using

cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

M. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011, Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

END OF SECTION


SECTION 096816SHEET CARPETING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096816 - 1

SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes sheet carpeting.

B. This Section is Base Bid for an Alternate. See Section 012300 - Alternates.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations

where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3. Seam locations, types, and methods. 4. Pile direction.



E. Warrant: Sample of special warranty.



A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.

B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response per NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type

indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd..



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096816 - 2


A. Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011.


A. Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic,

failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber,

edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge, and delamination.

3. Warranty Period: Lifetime.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET (CPTT-1)

A. Product: Tandus Centiva, Style #11146; Columbus Metropolitan Library Standard.

B. Construction: Stratatec Patterned Loop. 1. Face Weight: 20.00: oz/sq yd. 2. Gauge: 5/64. 3. Stitches per Inch: 9.90. 4. Tuft Density: 126.72: tufts/sq in. 5. Pile Height Average: 0.187: inch. 6. Fiber System: Antron Lumena® Nylon. 7. Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed. 8. Fluorine-Free Soil Protection: DuraTech®. 9. Primary Tufting Substrate: Synthetic Non-Woven.

C. Powerbond® Cushion: 1. Product Size: 6 ft. 2. Cushion: Closed Cell Cushion. 3. Heterogeneous Construction: No Delamination per ASTM D-3936. 4. Cushion Weight: 35.5: oz/sq yd. 5. Cushion Density: 18.5: lbs/cu ft. 6. Cushion Thickness: 0.156: inch. 7. Total Weight with RS / Non-RS: 81.0: 78.7: oz/sq yd +/-5%. 8. Compression Set: Max. 10%. 9. Compression Deflection: 7 Min.: 25 max lbs/sq inch @ 25%.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096816 - 3

D. Performance Requirements: 1. Antimicrobial Chemicals: No antimicrobials (EPA Registered pesticides) added

to product (ASTM E2471-05) Electrostatic Propensity: <3.0 kV (AATCC 134); Permanent Conductive Fiber

2. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC FF 1-70 (ASTM D-2859) 3. Flooring Radiant Panel: Class 1 (mean average CRF: 0.45 w/sq cm or higher)

(ASTM E-648) Smoke Generation: Less than 450 (ASTM E-662) 4. Colorfastness to Light: > 4 after 100 hours (AATCC 16E) 5. Soil Protection: Application Rate: 2% of Face Weight

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet cushion manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer. 1. Use adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated


C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710.


D. Preparation: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.

E. Installation: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard

2011, Section 13, "Direct Glue-Down Installation."



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 096816 - 4

F. Comply with architectural drawings, carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.

G. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

H. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

I. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

J. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011, Section 19, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.

K. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using

cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

L. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011, Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

END OF SECTION


SECTION 098100ACOUSTIC INSULATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 098100 - 1

SECTION 098100 - ACOUSTIC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustic blanket insulation. 2. Acoustic board insulation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



C. Research/evaluation reports.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTIC INSULATION

A. Acoustic Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Thickness:

a. Partitions: As required to fill cavity. b. Above Suspended Ceilings: 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Basis-of-Design Products: a. AFB® by Roxul.

3. Density: 2.8 lbs./ft3.


A. Impaling Pin Adhesives: Type recommended by manufacturer to suit substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with not more than 50 g/L for VOC content when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):


SECTION 098100ACOUSTIC INSULATION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 098100 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

E. Acoustic Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing

members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. Where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

5. Where acoustic blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install acoustic blanket insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated.

F. Acoustic Board Insulation: For vertical and horizontal, exposed conditions. 1. Adhesive Attachment: In accordance with adhesive manufacturer's

recommendations for surface preparation and pattern. 2. Impaling Pin Attachment: In accordance with pin manufacturer's

recommendations for surface preparation, location and amount of pins. Pin length should be selected to ensure tight fit.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 099100PAINTING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099100 - 1

SECTION 099100 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior and exterior substrates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Sheen Levels: 1. Flat: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according

to ASTM D 523. 2. Eggshell: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,

according to ASTM D 523. 3. Satin: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,

according to ASTM D 523. 4. Semi-Gloss: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 5. Gloss: 70 units and greater at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color

applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for

application of each paint system specified in Part 3.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099100 - 2

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one

another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

C. Paint (PNT): Color as indicated in Finish Legend.

D. Epoxy Paint (EPNT): Color as indicated in Finish Legend.

E. Maker Board Paint (MBPNT): Color as indicated on Finish Legend.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099100 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.

E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.

F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or

apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099100 - 4

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized Metal Substrates: 1. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 and ASTM A 153: Prepare

substrates in accordance with ASTM D 6386. 2. All Other Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet

metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

J. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or

plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

K. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099100 - 5

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal conduit. e. Plastic conduit. f. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation

covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation

covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with

paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099100 - 6

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board; Acrylic Latex: One of the following systems: 1. Benjamin Moore:

a. Primer: Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater and Primer Sealer 283. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex. d. Sheen: As follows, unless indicated otherwise:

1) Walls: Eggshell. 2) Ceilings: Flat.

2. ICI Dulux paints: a. Primer: 1000 Prep + Prime Hi Hide Primer Sealer b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat:

1) Walls: 1402 Pro Acrylic Eggshell Wall and Trim Paint. 2) Ceilings: 1200 Pro Matte Flat.

3. Sherwin Williams: a. Primer: PrepRite 200 Interior Latex Primer B28 Series. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat:

1) Walls: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Eg-Shel, B20 Series. 2) Ceilings: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Flat, B30 Series.

d. Sheen: As follows, unless indicated otherwise: 1) Walls: Eggshell. 2) Ceilings: Flat.

B. Gypsum Board; Epoxy (EPNT): Provide one of the following systems: 1. Benjamin Moore:

a. Primer: Super Spec 253 Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer

b. Intermediate Coat: Same as top coat c. Top coat: Benjamin Moore P43 Acrylic Epoxy Coating; 1.5 mils DFT d. Sheen: Eggshell, unless indicated otherwise:

2. Sherwin Williams: a. Primer: ProGreen 200 Latex Primer. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Waterborne Catalyzed Epoxy; 2-4 mils

DFM. d. Sheen: Eggshell, unless indicated otherwise:

3. Locations: 1) Walls in restrooms. 2) Others: Where indicated on drawings.

C. Wood Trim, Wood Doors, Wood Frames and Other Interior Wood and Wood-Based Items as Indicated; Acrylic Latex (PNT-#). One of the following systems: 1. Benjamin Moore:

a. Primer: Benjamin Moore Super Spec 253 Interior Latex Undercoater & Primer Sealer

b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: ben Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Finish W627



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099100 - 7

d. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise: 2. ICI Devoe HPC:

a. Primer: 1020 Prep + Prime Wall and Woodwork 100% Acrylic Primer b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: Devoe 4216 HP WB Acrylic Semigloss Enamel d. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise:

3. Sherwin Williams: a. Primer: S-W PrepRite Multi-Purpose Latex Primer. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: S-W Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic. d. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise:

D. Ferrous and Non Ferrous Metals Including: Exposed metal fabrications, steel doors, steel door frames, grilles, panels, stairs, railings, and other miscellaneous metal items indicated; Direct to Metal Acrylic. One of the following systems: 1. ICI Devoe HPC:

a. Primer: 4216 Devflex HP WB DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel. b. Intermediate coat: None required. c. Top coat: Same as Primer. d. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise:

2. Sherwin Williams: a. Primer: DTM Acrylic, Semi-Gloss. b. Intermediate coat: None required. c. Top coat: Same as Primer. d. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise:

3. Rustoleum Sierra Performance: a. Primer: S-37 System Metalmax DTM Acrylic Urethane. b. Intermediate coat: None required. c. Top coat: Same as Primer. d. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise:

4. Sherwin Williams: a. Primer: Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic, Semi-Gloss. b. Intermediate coat: None required. c. Top coat: Same as Primer. d. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise:

E. Steel - Transparent Finish, flat finish 1. Primer: 100% solids epoxy; ICI Devoe Coatings "Pre-Prime" 167 Penetrating

Sealer; 1.5 DFM. 2. Intermediate Coat: None 3. Top Coat: ICI Devoe Coatings "Devthane 379UVA" Aliphatic Urethane

379K0020 Flat Clear; 3.0 DFM.

F. Mechanical and Electric Equipment Items: One of the following systems: 1. Tnemec:

a. One Coat - “Uni-Bond DF Series 115”; Tnemec; 3.0 DFM. b. Color: White.

2. ICI Dulux: a. 1280 Spraymaster Pro Uni-Grip WB Dryfall Flat b. Color: White.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099100 - 8

3.7 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Ferrous Metal: Exposed steel members, bollards, exposed miscellaneous metal; Urethane.

a. Primer (omit where shop primed): Mio-zinc urethane; Tnemec 394 "PerimePrime"; 2.5 to 3.5 DFM.

b. Intermediate coat: Hydrophobic acrylic; Tnemec Series 115 "Uni-Bond DF"; 4 to 6 DFM.

c. Top coat: High-build acrylic urethane; Tnemec Series 1081, "Endura-Shield WB"; 2 to 4 DFM.

d. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise:

B. Galvanized Metal: Exposed structural steel members, hollow metal doors and frames, railings, bollards, canopy framing, exposed miscellaneous metal; Urethane.

a. Primer: Epoxy "Series 66," by Tnemec; 2.5 DFM. b. Intermediate coat: Not required. c. Top coat: High-build acrylic urethane; Tnemec Series 1081,

"Endura-Shield WB"; 2 to 4 DFM. d. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise:

C. Concrete: 1. Modified Waterborne Acrylate:

a. Primer: Waterborne modified polyamine epoxy “151-1051 Elasto-Grip FC” by Tnemec, 6 mils.

b. Intermediate coat: Not required. c. Top coat: High build acrylic; Tnemec "Enviro-Crete"; 9 DFM. d. Sheen: Flat.

D. Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metallic Coating: 1. Advanced Thermoset Solution Fluoropolymer; 2. Intermediate Coat: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and

required topcoat. 3. Topcoat: Tnemec Series 1078 "Fluoronar Metallic"; 2-3 DFM. 4. Color and Sheen: Match adjacent factory-finished fluoropolymer aluminum

framing.

E. Exterior Wood Siding and Trim - Opaque Finish: 1. Acrylic latex.

a. Primer: A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer. b. Intermediate coat: Same as topcoat. c. Top coat: A-100 Exterior Latex, 2 DFM. d. Sheen: Satin.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 099713EXTERIOR STEEL COATINGS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099713 - 1

SECTION 099713 - EXTERIOR STEEL COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation, shop priming, and application of high-performance coating

systems for exterior steel substrates (ESC-#). 2. Surface preparation, shop priming, and application of high-performance coating

systems for exterior and interior hot dipped galvanized steel substrates (ESC-#).

B. Related Sections: 1. 050513 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal: Color of storefront. 2. 099100 - Painting: For general interior painting.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color

applied.


A. Deliver coated items wrapped to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage.

B. Do not handle freshly painted members until paint has cured in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust time requirements for ambient and surface temperature and relative humidity. 1. Packing and Shipping: Provide protective wrappings and separate coated items

as required to prevent damage to coating in shipping, delivery, and handling. 2. Lifting:

a. Machine lifting: Use padded slings to lift members. b. Manual lifting: Use clean cotton gloves.


A. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099713 - 2

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Coating Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which coatings do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: Fifteen years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: The design is based on products manufactured by Tnemec. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering comparable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Carboline.

2.2 PRODUCTS - GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with

one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated.

3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

2.3 SHOP PRIMERS

A. Moisture-cured zinc-rich MIO Urethane. 1. Salt spray resistance at minimum recommended thickness: Not less than 8500

hours per ASTM B 117 for single coat. 2. AISC rated "Class B" for use on faying surfaces. 3. VOC: Less than 250 g/l. 4. DFT: 2.5 to 3.5 mils. 5. Basis of design product: Tnemec 394 “PerimePrime".

2.4 INTERMEDIATE COATS

A. Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane: 1. VOC: Less than 100 g/l. 2. DFT: 2.5 to 4.5 mils. 3. Basis of design product: Tnemec Series 73' Enduashield".



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099713 - 3

2.5 FINISH COATS

A. Fluoropolymer Mono-Chromatic - Satin: 1. Resin: Fluoroethylene/Vinyl Ether Copolymer (FEVE). 2. VOC: Less than 300 g/l. 3. DFT: 2.0 to 3.0 mils. 4. Basis-of-Design-Product: Tnemec Series 1072 "Fluoronar.


A. Non-Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel Substrates for Shop Priming: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

B. Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel Substrate for Shop Priming: 1. General:

a. Comply with requirements of ASTM D 6386. b. Zinc high spots, such as a metal drip line, should be removed by cleaning

with hand or power tools as described in SSPC Surface Preparation Specification 2 or 3.

c. The zinc should be removed until it is level with the surrounding area, taking care that the base coating is not removed by the cleaning methods.

d. After cleaning, the surface shall be inspected for conformance to the required zinc thickness in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M or A 153/A 153M utilizing a magnetic-field-type thickness instrument in accordance with ASTM E 376. Any item falling below the required zinc thickness, before or after removal of any high spots, shall be repaired in accordance with ASTM A 780; except “Paints Containing Zinc Dust” not acceptable. Minimum thickness requirements for the repair are those described in ASTM A 123 Section 6.2 “Finish”.

2. Preparation: SSPC SP1 Solvent Cleaning followed by Abrasive Blast Cleaning per SSPC-SP16 Surface Preparation of Galvanize by abrasive blast cleaning to create a uniform 1.5 mil angular profile. a. Following cleaning, surfaces should be blown down with clean, compressed

air. b. Steel shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 5 degrees above dew

point. c. Prime paint steel within 60 minutes of cleaning steel. d. Option: Prepare and prime galvanized steel in shop, instead of field

prepared and field prime painted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Apply coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099713 - 4

B. Shop-apply primer to steel substrates scheduled to receive exterior steel coating finishes. 1. Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and

paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

C. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

D. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

E. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 1. Mica and metallic type coatings shall be spray applied.

F. Touch-Up: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop-applied paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.


A. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

B. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

A. Non-Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel Substrates: ?)

1. Fluoropolymer Mica Flake System. a. Shop Primer. b. Intermediate Coat. c. Top Coat. d. Color:

1) ESC-1: Custom color as selected by Architect.

B. Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel Substrates: 1. Primer for Damaged Galvanized Coating: As specified under SURFACE

PREPARATION, above.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099713 - 5

2. Primer: 1 Coat Tnemec 90-97 Urethane Zinc-Rich Primer, 2.5 to 3.5 mil dry film thickness, unless otherwise recommended by paint manufacturer.

3. Intermediate Coat: 1 Coat Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield with a 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.

4. Finish Coat: 1 Coat Tnemec V1071 Fluoronar at 2.0 - 3.0 mils Dry Film Thickness a. ESC-2: Custom color, as selected by Architect.

5. Locations: a. Exposed relief angle and lintels. b. Exposed galvanized steel at exterior wall. c. Others: As indicated.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 099713 - 6



SECTION 102113TOILET COMPARTMENTS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102113 - 1

SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Solid phenolic toilet compartments with surface color throughout the core

configured as floor anchored/overhead braced toilet enclosures and urinal screens.

B. Related Sections: 1. 102800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: For toilet tissue dispensers,

grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch-

(152-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 2. Each type of hardware and accessory.

D. Product certificates.



A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" for toilet compartments designated as accessible.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102113 - 2


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Accurate Partitions Corporation.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

C. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness. 1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879/A 879M, 01Z (03G). 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M, either hot-dip galvanized or

galvannealed.

D. Chrome Plating: Not permitted

E. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.

F. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.

G. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung.

H. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid colored phenolic-core panel material with uniform color throughout the core; and with eased and polished edges. Provide minimum 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch-thick panels. 1. Exposed Faces, other than edges, are smooth and flat; and uniform color and

finish.

I. Pilaster Shoes: Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 4 inches 4 high, finished to match hardware.

J. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel or

aluminum.

K. Phenolic-Panel Finish: Facing sheet of one color and pattern in each room.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102113 - 3

1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, with manufacturer's standard through-color core matching face sheet.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Stainless steel or aluminum. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted

to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard latch unit designed for emergency

access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.

4. Stops: 11 gage (3.2 mm) with rubber bumper; two required to prevent door form being kicked out of compartment.

5. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. a. Mount 1 hook at approximately 3 inches below top of partition. b. At handicap stalls and women's stalls provide additional hook, mounted at

approximately 40 inches above floor and reachable from the water closet. 6. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging

doors. 7. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102113 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and panels; 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls.

C. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

D. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

E. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 102226OPERABLE PARTITIONS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102226 - 1

SECTION 102226 - OPERABLE PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical panel partitions.


A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated: 1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested

for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Indicate storage and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation

requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing indicated.

D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

E. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support-beam, mounting-hole template.

F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For operable panel partitions, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

G. Product certificates.

H. Product test reports.

I. Field quality-control reports.

J. Operation and maintenance data.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102226 - 2

K. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for testing indicated.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes meeting one of the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E 84.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 26 to 75. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2. Fire Growth Contribution: Meeting acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness.

B. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102226 - 3

C. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use.

D. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36/C 36M.

E. Cement Board: ASTM C 1288.

F. Plywood: DOC PS 1.

G. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

H. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANEL PARTITIONS

A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Operable acoustical panel partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Series 631 individual, omni-directional panels as manufactured by Hufcor Inc.; or comparable product by one of the following: a. Hufcor. b. Modernfold, Inc.; a DORMA Group Company. c. Panelfold Inc.

B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, individual panels.

C. Panel Construction: Provide top reinforcement as required to support panel from suspension components and provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities.

D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.

E. STC: Not less than 50.

F. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard.

G. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102226 - 4

2.3 SEALS

A. General: Provide types of seals indicated that produce operable panel partitions complying with acoustical performance requirements and the following: 1. Manufacturer's standard seals. 2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent

panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed.

B. Horizontal Bottom Seals: PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting panel movement. 1. Mechanically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of

bottom seal by operating handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range not less than 2 inches between retracted seal and floor finish.

2.4 FINISH FACING

A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. White LCS boards, writable with magnetic surface; unless indicated otherwise on

drawings

B. Paint: Manufacturer's standard factory-painted finish.

C. Cap-Trimmed Edges: Protective perimeter-edge trim with tight hairline joints concealing edges of panel and finish facing.

D. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints.

2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Suspension Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted directly to overhead structural support, designed for type of operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.

B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102226 - 5

C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for type of operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum.

D. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated.

E. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, corrosion-resistant, protective coating unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; of same materials, finish, construction, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels; complete with operating hardware. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware.

B. Work Surfaces: 1. Surface: Porcelain steel marker/projection surface. 2. Surface Color: White.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.

D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.

E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operable panel partitions to operate smoothly, without warping or binding. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102226 - 6


A. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids; adjust partitions for acceptable fit.

B. NIC Testing: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Repair or replace operable panel partitions that do not comply with requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of repaired, replaced, or additional work with specified requirements.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 102600WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102600 - 1

SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards. 2. Impact-resistant wall coverings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural

analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long.

D. Material certificates.

E. Material test reports.


G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.




NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102600 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Construction Specialties, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.

B. Fasteners: Nonmagnetic stainless-steel screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.

C. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.3 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards (CG-1): Fabricated from one-piece, formed or extruded metal with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products indicated on the Finish Legend. 2. Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.

a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0500 inch . b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.

3. Height: From top of wall base to ceiling. 4. Wing Size: As indicated on drawings. 5. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch. 6. Mounting: Flat-head, countersunk screws through factory-drilled mounting

holes.

2.4 END-WALL GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Metal, End-Wall Guards (CG-1A): Fabricated from one-piece, "U" shaped formed stainless steel that covers entire end of wall; with formed edges. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

SCO-8 Series by Construction Specialties, Inc. 2. Thickness: Minimum 0.0625 inch. 3. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4. 4. Height: Extend from top of wall base and terminate where EWG meets ceiling

substrate, unless indicated otherwise. 5. Dimension of Wings: 1-1/2 inches. 6. Depth: Match depth of partition. Field measure before fabricating. 7. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102600 - 3

8. Mounting: Adhesive.

2.5 CHAIR RAIL

A. Chair Rail (CG-2): Provide Section 064000 - Architectural Woodwork.

2.6 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL COVERINGS

A. Impact-Resistant Sheet Wall Covering (PWP-1 & PWP-2): Fabricated from plastic sheet wall-covering material. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

0.060 Wall Covering by Acrovyn by Construction Specialties, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following: a. Construction Specialties, Inc. b. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International

Corporation. 2. Size: As indicated. 3. Sheet Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.5 mm). 4. Color and Texture: Match Architect's sample. 5. Height: As indicated. 6. Trim and Joint Moldings: Extruded rigid plastic that matches sheet wall covering

color at perimeter of wall covering; with manufacturer's standard butt joints. a. Nominal Joint Width: 1/32 inch. b. Others: As indicated on drawings.

7. Mounting: Adhesive.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

2.8 METAL FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. 2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 3. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 4. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102600 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 1. For impact-resistant wall protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape,

verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall protection system components.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 1. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights

indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for

a complete installation. a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.

B. Impact-Resistant Wall Covering: Install top and edge moldings, corners, and divider bars as required for a complete installation.

C. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.

D. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 102813TOILET ACCESSORIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102813 - 1

SECTION 102813 - TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Washroom accessories. 2. Shower room accessories. 3. Warm-air dryers. 4. Childcare accessories. 5. Custodial accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated.

C. Maintenance data.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by American Specialties, Inc., unless indicated otherwise.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102813 - 2

2.2 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser (A-2 or TPD-3): Model 0030. 1. Description: Double-roll dispenser. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with theft-resistant spindle . 4. Capacity: Designed for 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

B. Toilet Tissue (Jumbo-Roll) Dispenser (A-1 or TPD-1): Model 0039. 1. Description: Two-roll unit with sliding panel to expose other roll. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Capacity: 9-inch- diameter rolls. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type. 6. Refill Indicator: Pierced slots at front.

C. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser (A-10 or PTD-1): Model 0210. 1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels]. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Lockset: Tumbler type. 5. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.

D. Liquid-Soap Dispenser (A-3 or SD-3): Gojo Soap Dispenser, model 0780-12. 1. Description: Designed for touchfree dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 2. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted. 3. Material and Finish: Nickle.

E. Grab Bar (A-4, A-5, and A-6 or GB): Series 3801. 1. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.048 inch thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant peened texture in grip area.

3. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). 4. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (A-9 or SND-1): Model 0472-1. 1. Mounting: Partition mounted, dual access . 2. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with

tumbler lockset. 3. Receptacle: Removable. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Locations: Toilet stall partition.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102813 - 3

G. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (SND-2): Model 0473. 1. Mounting: Recessed. 2. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with

tumbler lockset. 3. Receptacle: Removable. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Locations:

a. End stall where shown as recessed mounted. b. Others: As indicated

H. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (SND-2): Model 0473-1A. 1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with

tumbler lockset. 3. Receptacle: Removable. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Locations:

a. End stall where shown as surface mounted. b. Others: As indicated.

I. Mirror Unit (A-11 or MIR): Series 0600 1. Frame: Stainless-steel channel.

a. Corners: mitered, welded and ground smooth. 2. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method

indicated below. a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices

requiring a special tool to remove. 3. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

J. Step and Wash (A-16 or S&W): Model SNW-SS 975 by Step'n Wash Inc.

2.3 SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation.

B. Shower Curtain Rod (SCR-1): 1. Description: 1-inch (25.4-mm) OD; fabricated from nominal 0.035-inch-thick

stainless steel. 2. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed with escutcheon. . 3. Finish: No. 4 (satin).



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102813 - 4

C. Shower Curtain SCF-1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated on Toilet Accessories Legend, A-605. 2. Size: Minimum 6 inches longer than shower rod by 72 inches high. 3. Material: Match basis of design.. 4. Color: White. 5. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches (152 mm) o.c. through top

hem. 6. Shower Curtain Hooks: Stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with snap

fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet.

D. Folding Shower Seat (SST-1): Model 8203. 1. Configuration: Rectangular seat. 2. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in

color as selected by Architect. 3. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

2.4 WARM-AIR DRYERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Toilet Accessories Legend or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Dyson. 2. Others: As Approved by Architect prior to bid.

B. Warm-Air Dryer (A-17 or WAD): Xlerator Hand Dryer Model XL-SB-1.1N 1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated. 3. Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Accessories: Provide the following:

a. Noise Reduction Nozzle: Lowers decibel level by 9db. 5. Electrical Requirements: 115 V, 13 A, 1500 W.

C. Warm-Air Dryer (A-13 or WAD-ADA): Xlerator Hand Dryer Model XL-SB-1.1N 1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated. 3. Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Accessories: Provide the following:

a. Noise Reduction Nozzle: Lowers decibel level by 9db. b. ADA -Compliant Recess Kit.

5. Electrical Requirements: 115 V, 13 A, 1500 W.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102813 - 5

2.5 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by American Specialties, Inc.

B. Diaper-Changing Station (A-14 or DCS): Model 9018. 1. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and

with child-protection strap. a. Engineered to support a minimum of 300-lb static load when opened.

2. Mounting: Recessed, with unit not projecting more than 1 inch from face of wall. 3. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism. 4. Material and Finish: HDPE in manufacturer's standard color.

2.6 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by American Specialties, Inc.:

B. Utility Shelf (A-15 or SHF): Model 0692-1224. 1. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm)

and supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside. 2. Size: 24 inch wide x 12 inches deep.

C. Mop and Broom Holder (A-12 or MBH): Model 8215. 1. Description: Unit with holders. 2. Length: 26 inches. 3. Hooks: Three. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Locations: Provide one each floor sink.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Coat Hook (A-10 or CH-1): Product as indicated on drawings. 1. Locations:

a. Doors into offices, interior side of door. Center on face door, office side, and with top of coat hook at 47 inches above finished floor.


2.8 FABRICATION

A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of three keys to Owner's representative.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 102813 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 104300EMERGENCY AID SPECIALTIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 104300 - 1

SECTION 104300 EMERGENCY AID SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. AED Units 2. First Aid Cabinets

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty for automatic external defibrillator that fail in materials or workmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Automatic External Defibrillator (AED)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products Heartsine Samaritan PAD 450P, School Package; by HeartSine Technologies, Inc. 1. Each Package includes the following:

a. One AED: Heartsine Samaritan PAD 450P AED Defibrillator. b. One AED Storage Wall Cabinet: (not used, use sign under accessories

below.) c. One Adult PAD PAK (Electrode Pads & Battery Cartridge).

1) Includes 1 Pair of defibrillation electrode pads and 1 device battery. d. One User Manual. e. One Quick Reference Card. f. One Set-Up and Training DVD. g. One Samaritan PAD Carrying Case. h. One Medical Prescription Authorization. i. One AED+CPR Responder Kit.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 104300 - 2

1) Includes 1 Zippered Carry Pouch, 1 Clear Mouth Barrier, 1 Pair of Nitrile Gloves, 1 Eye Splash Guard, 2 Antimicrobial Wipes, 1 Absorbent Towel, 1 Biohazard Bag, 1 Preparation Razor, Pair of Clothing Shears.

j. One American AED+CPR Quick Reference Card. k. One Inspection / Maintenance Tag. l. Two “Equipped Facility'' Decal / Sticker. m. One Double Sided Flanged AED Sign. (Not used, use sign under

accessories below.) n. One Child/Pediatric PAD-PAK.

1) Includes 1 Pair of defibrillation electrode pads and 1 device battery. 2. Locations: 1 unit per floor level.

a. Owner to indicate exact locations for installation. Do not install without owner approval/confirmation.

3. Accessories in addition to products included in package: 1) Fully Recessed Wall Cabinet: Product: AED wall cabinet with a

transparent door. a) Manufacturer: Cardiac Science b) Part No: 50-00400-10.

2) Cabinet Material: Stainless Steel. 3) Sizing: Internal (H/W/D): 14.25 in (36.20 cm) X 14.25 in (36.20 cm) X

7 in (17.78 cm). 4) External (H/W/D): 17.5 in (44.45 cm) X 17.5 in (44.45 cm) X 7 in

(17.78 cm). 5) Protrusion from the wall: 0.9 in (2.28 cm). 6) Include: All hardware and two keys.

b. Double Sided Flanged AED Sign: Part #: 150. Measures 7 inches x 8 inches on each side. 1) Quantity: Three, one per floor.

c. Adult PAD.PAK (Electrode Pads & Battery Cartridge). 1) Quantity: Three, one per floor.

B. FIRST AID CABINETS 1. Painted steel cabinets with swinging doors on front and compliant with current

ANSI Z308.1. 2. First Floor Level: Provided 12 inches wide X18 inches high, nominal

dimensions. a. Location: Owner to indicate exact locations for installation. Do not install

without owner approval/confirmation. 3. Second Floor Level: Provided 10 inches wide X10 inches high, nominal

dimensions. a. Location: Owner to indicate exact locations for installation. Do not install

without owner approval/confirmation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 104300 - 3

B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed.

C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 104300 - 4



SECTION 104400FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 104400 - 1

SECTION 104400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers. 2. Portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire

extinguishers. 3. Key lock boxes.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


D. Operation and maintenance data.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

D. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

E. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

F. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 104400 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by JL Industries, Inc., unless indicated otherwise.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

C. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick.

2.3 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET (FPC)

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

3015_F_10_LDCVWFE by J.L. Industries.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.

D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. 1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame

overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.

F. Door Material: Steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet. 1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Accessories: Pull handle with Saf-T-Lok.

J. Accessories:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 104400 - 3

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Identification: Pressure sensitive clear vinyl decal with white letters. . a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Manufacturer's standard.

K. Finishes: 1. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat.

a. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth.

2.5 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1. Fire Extinguishers: Provided by Owner.

2.6 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Provided by Owner where fire extinguishers are not in a cabinet.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical.

2.7 KEY LOCK BOXES

A. Key Lock Boxes: Designed for storage of keys. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Knox 3275 series

Lock Box. 2. Provide 1 and install at location as directed by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABINETS INSTALLATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated; or if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 104400 - 4

C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

D. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.

E. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

F. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

3.2 EXTINGUISHER INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire

extinguisher.

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.

3.3 KEY LOCK BOX INSTALLATION

A. Examine walls for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed key lock boxes will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of lock box and trim style.

B. Install key lock boxes in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Coordinate installation with other trades.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 104400 - 5



SECTION 105113METAL LOCKERS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 105113 - 1

SECTION 105113 - METAL LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Knocked-down two-tier lockers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and locker identification system and numbering sequence.

C. Samples: For each color specified.

D. Sample warranties.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Requirements: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1.

2.2 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by ASI Storage Solutions, unless indicated otherwise.

2.3 KNOCKED-DOWN LOCKERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Traditional Plus Lockers by ASI Storage Solutions.

B. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.075-inch (1.90-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges. 1. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from

0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors.

2. Door Style: Unperforated panel. a. Concealed Vents: Slotted perforations in top and bottom horizontal door

return flanges.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 105113 - 2

C. Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from unperforated steel sheet with thicknesses as follows: 1. Tops, Bottoms, and Intermediate Dividers: 16 gauge thickness, with single bend

at sides. 2. Backs: 18 gauge, nominal thickness, with full-height, double-flanged

connections. 3. Sides: 16 gauge nominal thickness, with full-height, double-flanged

connections.

D. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 16 gauge nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral, full-height door strikes on vertical main frames. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, continuous riveted piano type. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, continuous riveted piano type.

E. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so locking device does not protrude beyond door face; pry and vandal resistant. 1. Single-Point Latching: Nonmoving latch hook with steel padlock loop that

projects through recessed cup and is finished to match metal locker body. Equip each door with one latch hook.

F. Locks: Padlocks provided by Owner.

G. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch (9 mm) high.

H. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type hooks, aluminum or steel; zinc plated. 1. Provide one double prong rear hook at ceiling and three single prong side hooks

in each compartment. All hooks shall be made of steel, formed with ball points, zinc-plated and attached with two bolts or rivets.

I. Continuous Wood Base: Provide in conformance with Section 061053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. 1. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). 2. Division 9 shall install base over wood substrate. 3. Wood base to be fabricated from 2X4 lumber under the perimeter of lockers with

2x4 member spanning from front to back at 24 inches on center. Cover top of 2x4wood base with 1/2 inch thick plywood. Glue and secure plywood to 2x4 wood base. Exposed edges of plywood 2x4 lumber to be coplanar with face of metal locker.

J. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.

K. Filler Panels: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.036-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

L. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.050inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 105113 - 3

M. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

N. Materials: 1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type

B, suitable for exposed applications.

O. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 1. Color: White to closely match color indicated on Finish Legend. .

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs.

B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.

C. Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate and the following equipment: 1. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall

hooks.

D. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets for preassembly at plant prior to shipping.

E. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) face width and in lengths as long as practical; finished to match lockers.

F. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slip-joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.

G. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide edge dimension, and designed for concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

H. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

I. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match lockers.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 105113 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. 1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but

not more than 36 inches (910 mm) o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.

2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top, and bottom of lockers or floor..

3. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor.

B. Knocked-Down Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames.

C. Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates. 1. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips. 2. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 107516GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 107516 - 1

SECTION 107516 - GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes ground-set flagpoles made from aluminum .

B. Owner-Furnished Material: Flags.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For flagpoles. 1. Include plans, elevations, and attachment details. Show general arrangement,

jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support. 2. Include section, and details of foundation system.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For flagpoles.


A. Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpoles as complete units, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design flagpole assemblies.

B. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Wind Loads: Determine according to NAAMM FP 1001. Basic wind speed for

Project location is 90 mph. 2. Base flagpole design on polyester flags of maximum standard size suitable for

use with flagpole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 107516 - 2

2.3 ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES

A. Aluminum Flagpoles: Cone Entasis-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: a. Admiral Flag Poles, Inc., Columbus, OH (800-783-7653) (614-864-7653)

www.admiralflagpoles.com. b. American Flagpole; a Kearney-National Inc. company. c. Lingo Inc., Acme Flagpole Company Division, Southampton, NJ (800-

260-1897); www.lingoinc.com. d. Baartol Co., Inc. Kenton, OH (800- 537-4143) (419- 673-0758)

www.baartol.com. e. Ewing Flagpoles, Buffalo, NY (800-663-7653) www.ewingflagpole.com

B. Exposed Height: 30 feet.

C. Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, comply with the following: 1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead

calking. 2. Provide flush hairline joints using self-aligning, snug-fitting, internal sleeves.

D. Sleeve for Aluminum Flagpole: Fiberglass foundation sleeve, made to fit flagpole, for casting into concrete foundation. 1. Flashing Collar: Same material and finish as flagpole.

E. Cast-Metal Shoe Base: Made from aluminum with same finish and color as flagpoles for anchor-bolt mounting; furnish with anchor bolts.

2.4 FITTINGS

A. Finial Ball: Flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole-butt diameter. 1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole.

B. Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and removable handle, stainless-steel cable halyard, and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Furnish flush access door secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole. 1. Cylinder furnished by Section 087100 - Door Hardware. 2. Halyard Flag Snaps: Stainless-steel swivel snap hooks with neoprene or vinyl

covers. Furnish two per halyard.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 107516 - 3


A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.

B. Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate.

C. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M, fine aggregate.

D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone joint sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.


A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm. 1. Color: Black. 2. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not

acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below-grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

B. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom.

C. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during concreting.

D. Foundation Tube: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement during concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete to cure.

E. Place concrete, as specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for no fewer than seven days or use nonstaining curing compound.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 107516 - 4

F. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base.

3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install flagpoles where indicated and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Foundation Tube: Place flagpole in tube, seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges, and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 113100RESIDENTIAL AND COMMECIAL

APPLIANCES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 113100 - 1

SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL AND COMMECIAL APPLIANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Residential Refrigeration appliances. 2. Commercial Refrigeration appliances. 3. Residential microwave. 4. Ice Maker

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product certificates.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

E. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. [High-Altitude] [and] [Propane] Conversion: Provide gas-operated appliances with manufacturer's conversion kit installed by a qualified service agency according to manufacturer's written instructions for Project location and type of fuel.


1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Periods: As indicated in PART 2.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by one of the following:



APPLIANCES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 113100 - 2

1. Electrolux Home Products (Frigidaire). 2. General Electric Company (GE). 3. General Electric Company (Hotpoint). 4. KitchenAid; a division of Whirlpool Corporation. 5. LG Appliances. 6. Samsung. 7. Whirlpool Corporation. 8. Comparable Product approved by Architect.

2.2 MICROWAVE OVENS

A. Microwave Oven (E2): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: PEB72226DFWW, W/ TRIM KIT by General Eclectic.

a. Control Type: Electronic Touch. b. Cooking Technology: Microwave Electronic Digital Display with Clock:

Scrolling. c. Express Cook: 1-6 Minutes. d. Instant On Controls: Yes. e. Microwave Watts (IEC-705): 1100.00 W. f. Power Levels: 10. g. Sound Volume Control: On/Off. h. Timer (On/Off): Yes. i. Turntable: Glass. j. Turntable Size: 16.00 in. k. Scrolling Display with Help: Yes. l. USDA MyPlate menu: Grains; Vegetables. m. Microwave Sensor Cooking Controls: Beverage; Defrost: Weight/Time. n. MyPlate menu; Popcorn; Potato; Reheat; Vegetable. o. Control Features: Add 30 Seconds; Cancel/Off; Cook Time; Demo Mode;

Display On/Off; Help; Power Level; Set Clock; Sound; Start/Pause; Timer On/Off.

p. Power Cord Length: 39". 2. Material: Manufacturer's standard.

2.3 RESIDENTIAL REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS

A. Refrigerator/Freezer (E1): Two upper doors, side by side refrigerator compartment with lower freezer drawer; and complying with AHAM HRF-1. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model RF28HFEDTSR, White by Samsung. 2. Type: Freestanding. 3. Refrigerator: 19.14 cu. ft.

a. Premium External Filtered Water and Ice Dispenser b. Ice Maker c. Dispenser in door for ice and cold water. d. Pantry with Temperature Control Ó Deli (410C), Fresh (380F) and Chilled

(320F) options e. 2 Humidity-Controlled Crispers f. 5 Tempered Glass Spill-Proof Shelves g. Adjustable Shelf for Tall oversized Items h. 6 Door Bins



APPLIANCES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 113100 - 3

i. Right Door: 3 Gallon Bins j. Left Door: 3 Regular Bins k. High-Efficiency Top and Side LED Lighting

4. Freezer: 8.93 cu. ft. a. Filtered Ice Maker (Cubed) b. EZ-Open Handle. c. 1 Drawer Divider d. High-Efficiency LED Lighting e. Accessories f. Water Filter: HAF-CIN

5. Accessories: a. Water Filter.

6. Warranty: a. One (1) Year Parts and Labor on Refrigerator b. Five (5) Years Parts and Labor on Sealed Refrigeration System Only c. Ten (10) Years Parts d. Five (5) Years Labor on Digital Inverter and Compressor.

7. Dimensions (WxHxD) with hinge and door, no handle): 35-3/4 inches x 70 inches x 33-1/2 Inches.

8. Dimensions (WxHxD) without hinges and door): 35-3/4 inches x 68-7/8 inches x 29 inches.

9. Finish: White.

B. Refrigerator/Freezer (E3): Two-door refrigerator/freezer with freezer on top and complying with AHAM HRF-1. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Refrigerator/Freezer (E1): Two upper doors, side by

side refrigerator compartment with lower freezer drawer; and complying with AHAM HRF-1.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Model RT21M6213SR, by Samsung. 3. Type: Freestanding. 4. Total Capacity: 21.1 cu. ft. 5. Refrigerator: 15.4 cu. ft.

a. Fresh Room b. Dairy Bin c. 2 Vegetable Bins d. LED Top Lighting

6. Fridge in Freezer: 5.7 cu. ft. a. 1 Glass Shelf. b. Accessories: Ice maker.

7. Dimensions (WxHxD) with hinges, handles and doors): 32-7/8 inches x 67-3/4 inches x 31-7/8 inches.

8. Dimensions (WxHxD) without hinges and door): 32-7/8 inches x 66-3/4 inches x 28-1/2 inches.

9. Finish: Stainless steel. 10. Warranty:

a. One (1) Year Parts and Labor on Refrigerator b. Five (5) Years Parts and Labor on Sealed Refrigeration System Only. c. Ten (10) Years Parts and Five (5) Years Labor on Digital Inverter

Compressor.



APPLIANCES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 113100 - 4

2.4 COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS

A. Reach In Refrigerator (E5): Two-door, side-by-side refrigerator. 1. Product: TS-49-HC by True Food Service Equipment, Inc.

a. No substitutions permitted. 2. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Undercounter Refrigerator (E6): Two-door, side-by-side undercounter refrigerator. 1. Product: TUC-48F-ADA-HC~SPEC1 by True Food Service Equipment, Inc.

a. No substitutions permitted. b. Front Panel Finish: Corian to match adjacent casework.

2. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard.

2.5 ICEMAKERS

A. Icemaker (E4): 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model ICEU220A by Ice-O-Matic.

a. No substitutions permitted. 2. Type: Undercounter. 3. Ice Capacity:

a. Production: 211 per day with Air at 70 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Storage: 73 lbs.

4. Front Panel: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Warranty:

a. Three years Parts and labor. b. Five years Parts coverage on the evaporator and compressor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed.

B. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.

C. Range Anti-Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Utilities: Comply with plumbing and electrical requirements.

E. Undercounter Refrigerator (E6): Install a font removable panel with finish that matches adjacent Corian finish material. Align faces of Corian on E6 to be coplanar with adjacent Corian; and lock wheels in place.



APPLIANCES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 113100 - 5


A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each

appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters.

2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and components.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION



APPLIANCES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 113100 - 6



SECTION 115116BOOK DEPOSITORIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 115116 - 1

SECTION 115116 -BOOK DEPOSITORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide through wall book depository system, including interior wall trim, faceplate, attached chute housing with entry chute; slide chute, and air blocking system for wall system thickness as required.

B. Provide arrangements, layouts and quantities as indicated on drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data, layout drawings and installation instructions in accordance with the General Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide KINGSLEY # 10-8100.

2.2 BOOK DEPOSITORY

A. Door: Mounted into a built in weather hood and opens inward and up. Door to be weather resistant with gravity and weight balanced allowing it to automatically close after materials have passed through. Lockable from interior.

B. Construction: 16-gauge stainless steel exterior faceplate and depository door. 1. Brushed stainless steel finish with graffiti resistant clear coat. 2. Depository opening: 18”L x 2-7/8”H

C. Chute: Four sides, extends from the faceplate and will cover the wall rough cuts when installed. Entry chute to have an upward angle to prevent theft. Provide air blocking devise/panels.

D. Fabrication: Provide units completely factory assembled, requiring no field assembly. Hone all edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and attach assembly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


SECTION 115116BOOK DEPOSITORIES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 115116 - 2

B. Anchor units securely to wall structure. Trim opening with flanged trim provided by manufacturer and seal as recommended.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 122413ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 122413 - 1

SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes manually operated roller shades.

1.2 DEFINITIONS:

A. Blackout and Light-Blocking are interchangeable terms for purposes of this contract.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.


D. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Product certificates.


G. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the





NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 122413 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by MechoShade Systems, Inc.; or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Hunter Douglas Contract. 2. MechoShade Systems, Inc. 3. Silent Gliss USA, Inc.

2.2 ROLLER SHADES (RWS)

A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. 1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel.

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade . b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, jamb mounted.

B. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller-shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades. 1. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 6 lbs or for shades as

recommended by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent.

C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. 1. Roller Mounting Configuration: As indicated on drawings. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: As indicated on drawings.

D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

E. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

F. Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material (SBM): Light-blocking fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Hem weights shall be of appropriate size

and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous c. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Installation Accessories:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 122413 - 3

1. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure. a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and

shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches. b. Locations: Rooms without ceilings. ..

2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 3. Recessed Shade Pocket: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure designed

for recessed ceiling installation; with front, top, and back formed as one piece, end plates, and removable bottom closure panel. a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and

shadeband when shade is fully open. b. Provide pocket with lip at lower edge to support acoustical ceiling panel.

4. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS

A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Light-Filtering Fabric (RWS-1): Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. 1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer. 2. Basis of Design: Product indicated on Finish Legend. 3. Type: Opaque, non-raveling vinyl/polyester yarn. 4. Weave: As indicated in Finish Legend. 5. Thickness: 0.025 inches. 6. Roll Width: Custom, and as approved by Architects through submittal process.. 7. Openness Factor: 5 percent. 8. Color: Match Architect's sample.

C. Light-Blocking Fabric (RWS-2): Opaque fabric, stain and fade resistant. 1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer. 2. Basis of Design: Product indicated on Finish Legend. 3. Type: Fiberglass with acrylic backing . 4. Thickness: .008 inches. 5. Weight: .94 lbs. per square yard. 6. Roll Width: Custom, and as approved by Architects through submittal process.. 7. Orientation on Shadeband: As indicated on Drawings. 8. Color: Match Architect's sample.

2.4 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F:



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 122413 - 4

1. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater

than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


C. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to

interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

D. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

E. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 123600COUNTERTOPS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 123600 - 1

SECTION 123600 - COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Countertops fabricated of the following materials: 1. Solid-surfacing-material (SSM) countertops.

B. Work Specified Herein but Performed Elsewhere: See Section 064000 - Architectural Woodwork.

C. Related Sections: 1. 061053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: For wood blocking for anchoring

countertops, plywood subtops. 2. Solid surface material used with all glass storefronts as wall graphics: Section

084126.


A. The configuration of countertops is shown on drawings. Manufacturer's standard units fitting these requirements will be accepted. Where manufacturer cannot furnish standard units meeting requirements, custom units must be provided.

B. The detailing and design required to provide rigid, solid and structurally adequate countertop which is level, flat, and free of warp or distortion is the responsibility of the fabricator; all within parameters of AWI specifications and as approved by Architect. 1. Countertops and supporting bases to be capable of supporting a uniform load of

50 lb./sq. ft. plus a concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied at any point on countertop.

C. The following conditions require special attention: 1. Casework exceeding 42" in width between supports. 2. Sink and/or equipment cut-outs or supports. 3. Countertops exceeding 24" unsupported.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each manufactured product. 1. Flammability Rating.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each material type indicated. 1. Minimum size: 6 inches square.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 123600 - 2


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Quality Standard: For solid-surfacing-material and simulated stone, comply with "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.


A. Coordinate locations of utilities and toilet accessories that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID SURFACING MATERIALS (SSM)

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide products indicated on the Interior Finish Legend or comparable products by one of the following: a. Avonite Surfaces. b. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. c. Formica Corporation. d. LG Chemical, Ltd. e. Wilsonart International

B. Fire Resistance: Class 1, per ASTM E 84.

C. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's samples.


A. Countertop Supports: 1. Surface-Mounted Counter Brackets:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Rakks; Series EH. b. Size: As recommended by manufacturer. c. Finish: Primed for field painting. d. Locations: Where indicated.

2. Flush-Mounted Counter Brackets: Configuration installed directly to stud prior to application of gypsum board, hiding vertical support. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Rakks; Series EH-FM. b. Size: As recommended by manufacturer. c. Finish: Manufacturer's standard off-white powder coat, unless indicated

otherwise. d. Locations: Typical.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 123600 - 3

B. Adhesives: Manufacturer's recommended urea formaldehyde-free adhesive, color matched to countertop finish.

C. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 1. Locations: Typical

D. Moisture-Resistant Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 155, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 1. Product: Sierra Pine; "Medex". 2. Locations:

a. Countertops with sinks. b. Wet locations. c. Where indicated

E. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.

F. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and will not stain the surface it is applied to. 1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, mildew resistant,

acid curing, silicone. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

2.3 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. Grade: Premium.

B. Countertops: 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material laminated to 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick MDF board with exposed edges built up with 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid surface material.

C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid surface material.

D. Provide endsplash that matching backsplash.

E. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints wherever possible.

a. Joints: Make with seam adhesive. 2. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop. 3. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop. 4. Outside Corners: Slightly eased. 5. Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop using

template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 123600 - 4

6. Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.

7. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.

8. Work Station Mounting Substrate: For work stations without base cabinet, provide full coverage mounting substrate on countertop bottom with two layers of 5/8” thick MDF board for attachment of keyboards and CPU holders. Laminate plywood layers with glue and screws for total substrate thickness 1-1/4 inches. a. Extend mounting substrate not less than 1 inch beyond adjacent casework

for support. Block remainder of countertop flush with work station and as needed for support.

b. Laminate to bottom of countertop, with B face exposed, as required to support a uniform tension load of at least 25 psf plus 50-pound concentrated load applied at any location.

c. Exposed to view fasteners not permitted on top of deck. d. Provide additional apron depth as needed to conceal mounting substrate

thickness. e. Stencil warning message on bottom of mounting substrate in 1-inch high

letters as follows: “MOUNTING SCREW LENGTH 1-1/4” MAXIMUM”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF SIMULATED STONEAND SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m).

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written

instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 2. Seal edges of cutouts in MDF board subtops by saturating with varnish.

3.2 BOWLS

A. Sinks other than Integral Sinks: Installed under Division 22.

B. Drain connection to bowls and installation of plumbing fixtures and accessories provided under Division 22 except as follows: 1. Tail pieces at Integral Sink: Provided by this Section.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 125219UPHOLSTERED SEATING

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 125219 - 1

SECTION 125219 - UPHOLSTERED SEATING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes specially designed, wood frame, upholstered seating.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.

B. Shop Drawings: Show design, dimensions, construction, joinery, and upholstery material pattern placement. Include material thicknesses, finishes, direction of wood grain, reinforcements, and attachments.

C. Verification Samples: Show full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1. Upholstery Fabric: Full-width by 36-inch- long section of material from dye lot to

be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied; and with 12 inch length, minimum, of exposed seam. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of material.

2. Frame Material: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches square.

3. Cutaway Sample: For seat to leg, seat to back, and arm to seat and back joints; full size and of same materials and finishes used for the Work.

D. Product Schedule: Use same room designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that flame-resistant upholstery material treatment complies with requirements. Include conditions under which treatment is no longer effective.

F. Maintenance Data: For custom upholstered seating to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide seating identical to that tested per California Technical Bulletin 117 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify seating with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 125219 - 2

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide seating identical to that tested per California Technical Bulletin 133 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify seating with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to replace seating frame that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 2. Deterioration of finishes and other materials beyond normal wear.

C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Curran. 2. David Edward Ltd. 3. Hickory Business Furniture. 4. Katsch. 5. Lewis Mittman Inc.

2.2 UPHOLSTERY MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS (UPH)

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated on Finish Legend.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Solid Wood: Comply with AWI Quality Standard 100, "Lumber," Grade I, for hardwoods and softwoods. 1. WD-3: As specified in Section 064000. ?.

B. Wood Finish: As specified in Section 064000.

C. Cushion Material: Manufacturer's standard as follows: 1. Flexible Polyurethane Foam: As follows:

a. Seatback Cushion Polymer Density: 1.4 lb/cu. ft..



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 125219 - 3

b. Seat Cushion Polymer Density: 3.0 lb/cu. ft..

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Double stitch seams.

B. Center upholstery pattern indicated on the inside and outside seatback and cushion, and in the same location on each seating unit. Match upholstery pattern on cushion and upholstered seat edge.

C. Apply upholstery material smooth and even, with undistorted grain lines, and free of ripples, scallops, or puckers.

D. Conceal channeled seams. Channel stitch straight and continuous, with channels parallel to each other and perpendicular to intersecting materials.

E. Staple or sew breathable concealment fabric to underneath side of seat. Secure staples flush with seating frame to prevent snagging concealment fabric.

F. Fabricate removable seat cushion covers with cushion vents and concealed zippers.

G. Fabricate seat cushions and seat frame with integral, concealed, hook-type fasteners to secure cushions in place.

H. Cut welt-cord cover on bias.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas for suitable conditions where seating is to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

END OF SECTION



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 125219 - 4



SECTION 129300SITE FURNISHINGS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 129300 - 1

SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Movable and permanently anchored exterior site furnishings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s shop drawings, including dimensioned plans and elevations.


D. Maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicate on drawings.

2.2 TABLE WITH CHAIRS

A. Table: Parc Centre Tables by Landscape Forms, Inc., 7800 E. Michigan Ave, Kalamazoo, Michigan 49048. 1. Style: Round.

a. Diameter: 24 inches. 2. Mounting: Free standing with adjustable levelers.

B. Chair: Parc Centre Chairs by Landscape Forms, Inc., 7800 E. Michigan Ave, Kalamazoo, Michigan 49048. 1. Style: Armed. 2. Size:

a. Depth: 21 inches. b. Overall Height: 32-1/2 inches. c. Width: Nominal 22 inches. d. Seat Height: 17-3/4 inches.

3. Chair Frame: 7/16 outer diameter steel wire 4. Seat & Back Panels: ¾ x 0.188 Straps.

C. Finishes 1. Finish on Metal: Landscape Forms, Inc. “Pangard II”.

a. Primer: Rust inhibitor.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 129300 - 2

b. Topcoat: Thermosetting polyester powdercoat. UV, chip, and flake resistant.

c. Test Results: “Pangard II”. 1) Gloss Consistency, Gardner 60 Degrees, ASTM D 523: Plus or

minus 5 percent from standard. 2) UV Resistance, Color and Gloss, ASTM G 155, Cycle 7: Delta E

less than 2 at 2.0 mils and less than 20 percent loss. 3) Cross-Hatch Adhesion, ASTM D 3359, Method B: 100 percent

pass. 4) Flexibility Test, Mandrel, ASTM D 522: 3 mm at 2 mils. 5) Erichsen Cupping, ISO 1520: 8 mm. 6) Impression Hardness, Buchholz, ISO 2815: 95. 7) Impact Test, ASTM D 2794: 60 inch-pounds at 2.5 mils. 8) Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: 2H minimum. 9) Corrosion Resistance, 1,500-Hour Test, ASTM B 117: Max

undercutting 1 mm. 10) Humidity Resistance, 1,500-Hour Test, ASTM D 2247: Max blisters

1 mm. 2. Color: As selected by Architect for manufacturer's full range of colors.

2.3 BENCH

A. Table: "Chill Lounge" Benches by Landscape Forms, Inc., 7800 E. Michigan Ave, Kalamazoo, Michigan 49048. 1. Size:

a. Depth: 27-3/4 inches. b. Overall Height: 32-1/2 inches. c. Length: 62 inches.

B. Mounting: Free standing with adjustable levelers. 1. Composition: Chill is a one piece lounge with a 0.312 nominal wall thickness,

made from 100% linear medium density polyethylene (LMDPE) molded from ground powder to form finished products. Pigment and UV stabilizer are added in the molding process to give the desired color and resist fading from UV rays. a. Resistance to Environmental Stresses: Because Chill is made from

LMDPE, resistant to moisture, corrosive substances, insects, and other environmental stresses. Does not absorb moisture. Requires no waterproofing, staining or similar maintenance; and handles extreme temperature changes. Chill has excellent weathering resistance; however, as with other polyolefins, it is possible that the material will fade slightly over the service life of the product.

b. Melt Temperature: Approximately 262oF c. Flash Point: Approximately 620oF.

2. Test Results: a. Density: 0.0338 lbs/in3; ASTM D-792 b. Heat Deflection Temperature (@ 66 psi): 140oF; ASTM D-648 c. Tensile Strength: 2,500-4,000 psi; ASTM D-638 d. Flexural Modulus: 89,000 psi; ASTM D-790 e. Izod Impact Resistance (125 mil sample notched): 9.9 ft-lb/in; ASTM D 256 f. ESCR: >1,000 f50 hr; ASTM D-1693

3. Fabrication: Shop assembled benches.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 129300 - 3

4. Finish: Chill lounge appears with a #230 shot peen texture and light flame treatment. Unit is molded with UV stabilizer, which is resistant to UV rays. a. Color: As selected by Architect for manufacturer's full range of colors.

2.4 BICYCLE RACKS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, product designated by Construction Manager. 1. Landscape Forms, Inc., 431 Lawndale Avenue, Kalamazoo, Michigan 49048. 2. Others: As approved by Architect prior to bid.

B. Bicycle Rack Construction: 1. Frame: Galvanized steel tubing, ASTM A513, with .of high density polyurethane

plastic molded over galvanized steel frame. a. Tubing OD: Not less than 1.18 inches.

1) Steel Wall Thickness: 0.079 inches. 2. Base: Cast Aluminum. 3. Size:

a. Nominal Depth: 2-3/4 inches. b. Nominal Height: 31-1/2 inches. c. Nominal Width: 22-1/2 inches.

4. Shape: Similar to Basis of Design. 5. Installation Method: Cast in concrete.

C. Aluminum Finish: Powder coated.

D. Steel Finish: Galvanized and color coated. 1. Color Coating: Polyurethane plastic molded over galvanized finish on internal

steel tubing.

E. Color: Grey.

F. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

2.5 ASH URN

A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide - Rubbermaid R934 Metropolitan Smokers' Tower in silver metallic finish. 1. Liner: Removable galvanized steel Liner. 2. Finish: Powder Coated:

a. Color: Silver Metallic SM. 3. Installation Method: Bolted to concrete paving. 4. Quantity: 2. 5. Locations: One at each main entrance.

a. Owner to determine final location. Do not install without Owner's approval/confirmation.

2.6 TRASH RECEPTACLES

A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide - Witt Industries SC35-01-SS Stadium Series Stainless Steel Standard Receptacle (35 Gal) with SC35HT hood top lid in black for 35 gallon receptacle.



NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 129300 - 4

1. Quantity: 2. 2. Locations: One at each main entrance.

a. Owner to determine final location. Do not install without Owner's approval/confirmation.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.

B. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length, full-penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

C. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.

D. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs, barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.

E. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.

C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 142100ELECTRIC TRACTION

ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 1

SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Bid Requirement: Submit Statements of Suitability and Completeness with their bids as specified under SUBMITTALS and QUALITY ASSURANCE below

B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install machine roomless passenger elevator. The elevator system as described shall be installed with all needed accessories as required to provide a complete installation. 1. Elevators are indicated on the Drawings and herein as Elevators E101.

C. Section includes electric traction passenger elevators.

D. Hoist Beam.

E. Pit ladder.

F. Insert for attachment to CMU wall for rails.

G. Electrical Work: 1. Elevator Vendor shall become familiar with Division 26 Electrical Sections

and notify Architect of special requirements for these Sections due to characteristics of elevator equipment. Submit such notification to Architect at least 15 days prior to bid. Failure to submit such notification shall render Elevator Vendor responsible for any required changes to Electrical System due to his equipment.

2. Single power feed, through fused disconnect switch for each elevator will be brought to controller under Division 26.

3. Auxiliary power required for elevator equipment, including 110 volt, to be derived from this service under Division 26 work.

4. Items provided under Division 26: a. Heat and smoke or products of combustion sensing device in

elevator lobby on each floor, and in elevator machine room, wired to elevator controller.

b. 110 volt convenience outlets and illumination in machine room, hoistway, and pit.

5. Prior to bid, each bidder is required to coordinate directly with the Electrical Engineer to determine exactly what electrical equipment, conduit sizes, wire sizes, and panel sizes will be furnished under Base Bid Division 26 work. Bidder to advise Electrical Engineer of all electrical requirements necessary for the proper functioning of his elevator equipment that are not met under the base building electrical work. a. Information of such additional requirements to be included with each

Bid for evaluation as part of the Bidders' total proposal for elevator work.



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 2

b. The required information to be a detailed list of all additions or modifications to Base Building Electrical Work.

c. Each Bidder shall note on his proposal one of the following: 1) Base Bid Division 26 Electrical Work adequate for complete

elevator installation without further modification. 2) Base Bid Division 26 Electrical Work not adequate for complete

elevator installation; modifications required per attached list. 6. Electrical work required by the successful bidder that has not been fully

documented with his Bid, will be provided at the Elevator Contractors expense and without increase in the Contract Price.

H. Mechanical: 1. Pit sump and cover plate to be provided as specified under Section 017300;

see “Elevator Pit” under ELEVATOR WORK.

I. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary use of

elevators for construction purposes. 2. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and

anchoring devices in concrete. 3. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring

devices in masonry and for grouting elevator entrance frames installed in masonry walls.

4. Division 22 for sump pumps, sumps, and sump covers in elevator pits. 5. Division 26 for telephone service for elevators. 6. Division 26 for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall

operation and for connection to elevator controllers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to work of this Section.

B. Service Elevator: A passenger elevator that is also used to carry freight.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and operation, control, and signal systems.



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 3

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at

each landing, machine platform layout, control closet layout, hoist beam coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment.

2. Equipment: Show dimensioned locations of all equipment, service connection requirements, loads, and any other pertinent information required for coordination; include rail loads on safety application; bracket spacing schedule and rail anchorage location.

3. Supports: Show locations of separator and machine beams and required anchorages for all equipment.

4. Entrances: Show details of entrances and locations of signals, hall lanterns, and call buttons.

5. Cabs: Show fully detailed and dimensioned cab interiors. Identify and describe finishes and lighting system.

6. Include large-scale layout of car-control station and standby power operation control panel.

7. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For exposed car, hoistway door and frame, and signal equipment finishes; 3-inch-75-mm- square Samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch100-mm lengths of running trim members.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Certificates: 1. Required UL fire endurance rating or evidence of UL label and listing. 2. Approval and compliance from all governing authorities having

jurisdiction.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and control closet layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service including standby power generator, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.

H. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

I. Maintenance Manuals: Submit to the Owner 3 sets of maintenance manuals for the elevator including the following: 1. Complete sets of maintenance and operating instructions. 2. Complete sets of "as wired" wiring diagrams to all components including

solid state units and boards. 3. Manuals on the sequence of operation and adjusting procedure of the

system. 4. Parts catalog to match job. 5. A cross reference sheet for all specially marked components.



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 4

6. Single binders for each group of elevators and identify each binder with the elevator designation shown.

J. Diagnostic Tool: 1. Prior to seeking final acceptance for the completed project as specified by the

Contract Documents, the Elevator Contractor shall deliver to the Owner any specialized tool(s) that may be required to perform diagnostic evaluations, adjustments, and/or parametric software changes and/or test and inspections on any piece of control or monitoring equipment installed. This shall include any specialized tool(s) required for monitoring, inspection and/or maintenance where the means of suspension other than conventional wire ropes are furnished and installed by the Elevator Contractor. Any and all such tool(s) shall become property of the Owner. Any diagnostic tool provided to the Owner by the Elevator Contractor shall be configured to perform all levels of diagnostics, systems adjustment and parametric software changes which are available to the Elevator Contractor. In those cases where diagnostic tools provided to the Owner require periodic recalibration/or re-initiation, the Elevator Contractor shall perform such tasks at no additional cost to the Owner for a period equal to 12 months past the term of the maintenance agreement from the date of final acceptance of the competed project. During those intervals in which the Owner might find it necessary to surrender a diagnostic tool for re-calibration, re-initiation, or repair, the Elevator Contractor shall provide a temporary replacement for the tool at no additional cost to the Owner. The Elevator Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, printed instructions for the proper use of any tool that may be necessary to perform diagnostic evaluations, system adjustment, and/or parametric software changes on any unit of microprocessor-based elevator control equipment and means of suspension other than standard elevator steel cables furnished and install by the Elevator Contractor. Accompanying the printed instructions shall be any and all access codes, password, or other proprietary information that is necessary to interface with the microprocessor-control equipment.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance

Data," include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel.

B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard one-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

D. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner with terms, conditions, and obligations as set forth in, and in same



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 5

form as, "Draft of Elevator Maintenance Agreement" at end of this Section, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded.


A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Elevator system shall conform to requirements of: 1. Ohio Building Code (OBC), current edition. 2. ASME A17.1. 3. ANSI/NFPA 70. 4. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 5. All other applicable state and local codes and regulations.

C. Intent: 1. These specifications are intended to cover the complete installation of the

elevator system and to outline broadly the equipment required, but not to cover the details of design and construction. Such details are recognized to be the exclusive responsibility of the Manufacturer and Installer. It is hereby recognized that the Architect did not design or develop any part of the elevator systems, but only made selections of capacities, speeds, control systems, materials, etc., from choices made available by the Manufacturer.

2. In all cases, where a device or part of equipment is referred to in the singular number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many devices as are required to complete the installation.

D. Suitability: The elevator manufacturer shall confirm that the elevator type(s), machine location(s), and shaft sizes are suitable the conditions shown for the Project location. 1. Advise Architect in writing of unsuitable types, locations or sizes, if any,

before starting construction or bear costs of remedial measures. 2. Starting construction constitutes above conditions as suitable.

E. Completeness: The elevator manufacturer shall confirm that the elevator system(s) shown and specified are sufficiently complete to provide such elevator system(s) complete as bid and at no change in price unless modifications are requested by Owner or Architect. 1. Advise Architect in writing of items listed below, if any, before starting

construction or bear costs of remedial measures. a. Missing or conflicting information. b. Inadequate structural supports. c. Insufficient space for machine or equipment. d. Insufficient height for overrun or pit dept. e. Incorrect electric power characteristics. f. Items manufacture will not provide which are included in the

documents or normally includes as elevator work scope. 2. Starting construction constitutes bidding documents complete.



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 6

F. Subcontractor Qualification: Elevator Subcontractor shall provide evidence that a service office is located within 50 miles of the installation and a warehouse of parts is maintained within 100 miles.

G. Upon request, provide reference installation within 100 miles of project site and installed within last 3 years which meets or exceeds conditions specified under PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS.


A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to meet Architect's approval, at no additional cost to Owner.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to electric traction elevators including pit ladders; sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service; and electrical outlets, lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and machine rooms.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product for Passenger Elevator E01 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EcoSpace traction elevators, elevators by KONE, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following: 1. KONE Inc. 2. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators from single manufacturer. 1. Major elevator components, including driving machines, controllers, signal

fixtures, door operators, car frames, cars, and entrances, shall be manufactured by single manufacturer.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 7

B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1.

C. Elevator Equipment shall conform to the requirements of seismic zone: Non-seismic.

D. Seismic Performance: Elevator system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and shall comply with elevator safety requirements for seismic risk Zone 2 or greater in ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 1. Elevator Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

E. Car Performance: 1. Car Speed: ± 5% of contract speed under any loading condition or direction of

travel. 2. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold (per code) up to 125% of rated load.

F. System Performance: 1. Vertical Vibration (maximum): 25 mg. 2. Horizontal Vibration (maximum): 25 mg. 3. Jerk Rate (maximum): 3.3 ft/sec3 4. Acceleration (maximum) 1.3 ft/sec2 5. In Car Noise (maximum): 55 dB (A). 6. Leveling Accuracy (Minimum): ±0.2 inches. 7. Starts per hour (maximum): 120

2.3 ELEVATORS

A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturer's standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator systems and as required for complete system.

B. Elevator Description: 1. Passenger Elevator Number(s): E101. 2. Machine Location: Hoistway; no machine room is provided. 3. Control Space Location: Immediately adjacent to hoistway at top landing. 4. Rated Load:

a. Passenger Elevator: 3500 lb1589 kg 5. Rated Speed: 150 fpm 6. Operation System: Simplex. 7. Auxiliary Operations:

a. Battery-powered lowering. 8. Car Enclosures:

a. Clear Inside Width: Nominal 80 inches. b. Clear Inside Depth: Nominal 66 inches c. Car Height: 96 inches. d. Clear Height Under Suspended Ceiling: Nominal 88 inches. e. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. g. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish h. Base: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 8

i. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. j. Door Sills: Provide extruded nickel silver sills with non-slip wearing

surface and grooves for door guides. k. Ceiling: Round LED Down Light Drop Ceiling - LF-88: Satin Finished

Stainless Steel three panel suspended ceiling with three holes per panel for Round LED lights.

l. Handrails: 1/2 by 2 inches13 by 50 mm rectangular satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at sides and rear of car.

m. Floor: Prepared to receive floor finish indicated on drawings. 9. Hoistway Entrances:

a. Width: 42 inches. b. Height: 84 inches. c. Type:

1) Passenger Elevators: Single-speed center opening. d. Frames at First Floor: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. e. Frames at Other Floors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Doors at First Floor: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. g. Doors at Other Floors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. h. Door Sills: Provide extruded nickel silver sills with non-slip wearing

surface and grooves for door guides. 1) Hoistway Entry Sill Supports: Provide hot rolled steel angle or

extruded aluminum shapes, full width of hoistway, for support of all elevator entrance sills. Size and thickness as required for intended use. Provide with slotted holes for attachment. Bolt size for anchorage: 3/4" diameter, minimum.

10. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 11. Additional Requirements:

a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

b. Provide hooks for protective pads in all cars and one complete set of full-height protective pads for each elevator.

2.4 TRACTION SYSTEMS

A. Elevator Machines: Variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines and solid-state power converters. 1. Provide nonregenerative system. 2. Voltage: As indicated on Electrical drawings. 3. Limit total harmonic distortion of regenerated power to 5 percent per IEEE 519.

B. Fluid for Hydraulic Buffers: If using hydraulic buffers, use only fire-resistant fluid.

C. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work. Device installation is specified in another Section.

D. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector sheaves from the building structure. Comply with Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for materials and fabrication.



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 9

E. Car Frame and Platform: Bolted- or welded-steel units.

F. Guides: Roller guides. Provide guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames.

G. Pit Ladders: 1. Comply with requirements of ASME A17.1. 2. Material: Steel, ASTM A36. 3. Rung: 3/4 inch diameter rod with abrasive slip resistant coating. 4. Design Load:

a. Ladders and Rungs: >120 kg (250 pounds) at any point. 5. Locations: Provide one ladder for each elevator. Ladders to provide access to

elevator pit from elevator door opening at lowest level elevator serves.

2.5 OPERATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation systems as required to provide type of operation indicated.

B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators where indicated: 1. Single-Car Battery-Powered Automatic Evacuation: If power fails and car is at a

floor, it remains at that floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is between floors, it moves to the next floor above or below, opens its doors, and shuts down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system.

2. Automatic Dispatching of Loaded Car: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity, doors begin closing.

C. Security Features: Provide the following security features. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters' service. 1. Card-Reader Operation: Provide wiring for future card reader without any

rewiring. a. Provide additional conductors in traveling cable and panel in Control Space

Location for interconnecting future security camera. 2. Provide additional conductors in traveling cable and panel in Control Space

Location for interconnecting a security camera.

2.6 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.

2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES

A. General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable wall panels, with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops

where required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 10

B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Subfloor: Exterior, two layers of underlayment grade plywood, not less than

5/8-inch15.9-mm nominal thickness, install with joints staggered. 2. Floor Finish: Specified elsewhere. 3. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 4. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 5. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from

stainless-steel sheet. 6. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.

2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction. 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be

self-supporting with reinforced head sections.

B. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply with NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction based on testing at as close-to-neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 1. Fire-Protection Rating: 45 minutes.

C. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet. 2. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from

stainless-steel sheet. 3. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.

2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Series KSS140 by KONE Inc. or a comparable product by the elevator manufacturer.

B. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long-life lamps and acrylic or other permanent, non-yellowing translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs.

C. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car-control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mark buttons and switches for required use or function. Use both tactile

symbols and Braille. 2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, either integral with

car-control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity and car number.



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 11

4. Help Button: The help button shall initiate two-way communication between the car and a location inside the building, switching over to another location if the call is unanswered, where personnel are available who can take the appropriate action. Visual indicators are provided for call initiation and call acknowledgement.

5. Firefighter's Phase II Key-switch. 6. Call Cancel Button. 7. In car stop switch per local code.

D. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require handset use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply.

E. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing. 1. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 2. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of

travel. 3. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating direction of travel or

destination as required by system. Provide a signaling system to verify floor selection, where destination registration is required, and to direct passengers to appropriate car. a. Provide a means for passengers to indicate that they have disabilities so

control system can allow extra room in assigned car. b. Provide for connecting units that require destination registration to building

security access system so a card reader can be used to register calls.

F. ADA Phone: Pre-programmed integrated ADA phone (complete description of krms features included as standard). Help Button/Communicator. Activation of help button will initiate two-way communication between car and a location inside the building, switching over to alternate location if call is unanswered, where personnel are available to take the appropriate action. Visual indicators are provided for call initiation and call acknowledgement.

G. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Provide the following: 1. Units mounted in both jambs of entrance frame for each elevator.

H. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. 1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on cars.

I. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire, elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station unless otherwise indicated.

2.10 FINISH MATERIALS



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 12

A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. 1. Finish: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish

E. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

F. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

G. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063.

H. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500 or No. C77600.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with the approved shop drawings, the original design, and all pertinent regulations and codes, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 13

D. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system.

E. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.

F. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing.

G. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch3 mm, up or down, regardless of load and travel direction.

H. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

I. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at

center of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers. 2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.

a. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches1829 mm above finished floor.


A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies.

B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that tests are to be performed on elevators.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Installer shall advise Construction Manager of recommended protection facilities and procedures, to prevent damage and deterioration of completed elevator work (regardless of whether placed in temporary service) during remainder of construction period.

B. Temporary enclosures or hoistway opening protection, protection against damage to the machines, car, doors or door frames shall be provided by the Construction Manager.

C. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator, NS-1. Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction purposes: 1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of

finished car, to protect finishes from damage.



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 14

2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames. 3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and

frame faces. 4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as

needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment. 5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 6. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance and inspection service.

Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleanup, and adjustment as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

7. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

1.1 TESTING

D. Upon completion of the installation, and as a condition of its acceptance, provide all necessary equipment and personnel and perform all tests required. Secure all required approvals from agencies having jurisdiction.

a. Perform testing as required by governing Elevator Inspection Agency to demonstrate compliance with performance requirements.

E. Advise Construction Manager, Architect, Owner, and Inspection Department of governing agencies, in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed.

F. Make a final check of operation just prior to time of substantial completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s). Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program.

B. Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present before date of Substantial Completion and again not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.

3.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer for the Initial Maintenance Service Period indicated below. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,



ELEVATORS

NBBJ Project No. 101253.00 142100 - 15

cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 1. Perform maintenance during normal working hours. 2. Perform emergency callback service during normal working hours with response

time of two hours or less. 3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service with

response time of two hours or less. 4. Initial Maintenance Service:

a. Base Bid: 12 months. b. Alternate 3A: 24 months if Alternate 3A is accepted. See Section 012300

- Alternates. c. Alternate 3B: 60 months if Alternate 3B is accepted. See Section

012300 - Alternates.

END OF SECTION